Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
GATE
Analog Circuits
Vol 5 of 10
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 660.00
To Our Parents
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GATE Electronics & Communications
Small Signal Equivalent circuits of diodes, BJTs, MOSFETs and analog CMOS. Simple diode circuits, clipping,
clamping, rectifier. Biasing and bias stability of transistor and FET amplifiers. Amplifiers: single-and multi-stage,
differential and operational, feedback, and power. Frequency response of amplifiers. Simple op-amp circuits. Filters.
Sinusoidal oscillators; criterion for oscillation; single-transistor and op-amp configurations. Function generators and
wave-shaping circuits, 555 Timers. Power supplies.
IES Electronics & Telecommunication
Transistor biasing and stabilization. Small signal analysis. Power amplifiers. Frequency response. Wide banding
techniques. Feedback amplifiers. Tuned amplifiers. Oscillators. Rectifiers and power supplies. Op Amp, PLL, other
linear integrated circuits and applications. Pulse shaping circuits and waveform generators.
**********
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
DIODE CIRCUITS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.2
DIODE
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
3
3
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.6.1
Clippers
1.6.2
Clampers
1.7.1
Voltage Doubler
1.7.2
RECTIFIER CIRCUIT
4
6
10
11
11
1.8.1
1.8.2
Classification of Rectifiers
1.9
1.10
12
12
14
1.10.1
1.10.2
Bridge Rectifier
1.11
FILTERS
1.12
ZENER DIODE
1.13
VOLTAGE REGULATORS
15
15
EXERCISE 1.1
18
EXERCISE 1.2
36
EXERCISE 1.3
42
SOLUTIONS 1.1
47
SOLUTIONS 1.2
90
16
16
14
2
2
SOLUTIONS 1.3
CHAPTER 2
111
BJT BIASING
2.1
INTRODUCTION
2.2
2.3
2.4
117
2.2.1
117
2.2.2
118
2.2.3
BJT CONFIGURATION
2.3.2
120
2.3.3
Common-Collector Configuration
122
119
122
2.4.1
122
2.4.2
123
2.6
BIASING
2.8
119
2.3.1
2.5
2.7
117
123
125
2.6.1
125
2.6.2
2.6.3
126
128
BIAS STABILIZATION
129
2.7.1
Stability factor
129
2.7.2
EARLY EFFECT
EXERCISE 2.1
132
EXERCISE 2.2
147
EXERCISE 2.3
155
SOLUTIONS 2.1
159
SOLUTIONS 2.2
201
SOLUTIONS 2.3
224
CHAPTER 3
130
BJT AMPLIFIERS
3.1
INTRODUCTION
229
3.2
229
3.3
230
3.3.1
Current Gain
230
3.3.2
Voltage Gain
230
3.3.3
Input Impedance
231
118
3.3.4
3.4
3.5
Output Impedance
3.7
232
3.4.1
232
3.4.2
233
3.4.3
3.6.2
3.6.3
235
236
237
Cut-off Frequency
EXERCISE 3.1
241
EXERCISE 3.2
254
EXERCISE 3.3
260
SOLUTIONS 3.1
265
SOLUTIONS 3.2
295
SOLUTIONS 3.3
315
CHAPTER 4
238
239
FET BIASING
4.1
INTRODUCTION
4.2
4.4
235
235
3.6.1
3.7.1
4.3
233
3.5.1
3.6
231
321
4.2.1
321
4.2.2
Characteristics of JFET
322
321
4.3.1
323
4.3.2
325
4.3.3
326
4.3.4
326
4.4.1
328
4.4.2
329
4.4.3
330
323
328
4.5
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
331
332
331
331
4.6.3
Enhancement Mode NMOS device with the Gate Connected to the Drain
EXERCISE 4.1
334
EXERCISE 4.2
347
EXERCISE 4.3
354
SOLUTIONS 4.1
358
SOLUTIONS 4.2
388
SOLUTIONS 4.3
408
CHAPTER 5
FET AMPLIFIERS
5.1
INTRODUCTION
5.2
5.3
413
5.2.1
Transconductance
413
5.2.2
Output Resistance
414
413
414
5.3.1
414
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
418
5.5
EXERCISE 5.2
432
EXERCISE 5.3
438
SOLUTIONS 5.1
442
SOLUTIONS 5.2
467
SOLUTIONS 5.3
483
CHAPTER 6
INTRODUCTION
6.2
GENERAL CONSIDERATION
6.3
421
6.1
487
6.2.1
Power
6.2.2
487
487
418
420
5.4
EXERCISE 5.1
415
487
6.3.1
487
6.3.2
488
6.3.3
488
422
333
6.3.4
6.4
PUSH-PULL STAGE
6.5
CLASSES OF AMPLIFIERS
490
6.5.1
Class-A Operation
491
6.5.2
Class-B Operation :
492
6.5.3
6.6
6.7
489
AMPLIFIER DISTORTION
6.6.2
HEAT SINKS
6.7.1
Junction Temperature
495
6.7.2
Thermal Resistance
495
6.7.3
EXERCISE 6.2
508
EXERCISE 6.3
513
SOLUTIONS 6.1
517
SOLUTIONS 6.2
539
SOLUTIONS 6.3
551
CHAPTER 7
7.1
INTRODUCTION
7.2
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
7.3
7.6
494
494
496
7.5
494
6.6.1
EXERCISE 6.1
7.4
493
555
555
555
7.3.1
556
7.3.2
556
556
7.4.1
Inverting Amplifier
556
7.4.2
7.4.3
Unity Follower
7.4.4
Summing Amplifier
7.4.5
558
558
559
7.5.1
Unity Follower
7.5.2
Inverting Amplifier
7.5.3
559
560
560
7.6.1
562
7.7
7.8
7.7.1
Differential Inputs
7.7.2
Common Inputs
562
7.7.3
Output voltage
562
7.7.4
562
562
562
7.8.1
7.8.2
EXERCISE 7.1
565
EXERCISE 7.2
578
EXERCISE 7.3
587
SOLUTIONS 7.1
591
SOLUTIONS 7.2
619
SOLUTIONS 7.3
644
CHAPTER 8
OP - AMP APPLICATION
8.1
INTRODUCTION
8.2
INVERTING AMPLIFIER
8.3
NON-INVERTING AMPLIFIER
8.4
8.5
8.6
651
8.7
651
8.8
8.9
8.10
INTEGRATOR
654
8.11
DIFFERENTIATOR
655
8.12
LOGARITHMIC AMPLIFIER
655
8.13
EXPONENTIAL AMPLIFIER
656
8.14
SQUARE-ROOT AMPLIFIER
656
8.15
COMPARATOR
8.16
SCHMITT TRIGGER
8.17
8.18
PRECISION RECTIFIER
659
8.19
FUNCTION GENERATOR
660
EXERCISE 8.1
661
649
649
650
657
657
658
563
EXERCISE 8.2
679
EXERCISE 8.3
684
SOLUTIONS 8.1
688
SOLUTIONS 8.2
734
SOLUTIONS 8.3
751
CHAPTER 9
ACTIVE FILTERS
9.1
INTRODUCTION
757
9.2
ACTIVE FILTER
757
9.3
9.2.1
757
9.2.2
759
9.2.3
759
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.4
BUTTERWORTH FILTERS
765
9.5
765
9.6
765
9.7
SENSITIVITY
767
EXERCISE 9.2
778
EXERCISE 9.3
781
SOLUTIONS 9.1
786
SOLUTIONS 9.2
813
SOLUTIONS 9.3
818
CHAPTER 10
761
762
766
EXERCISE 9.1
10.1
INTRODUCTION
10.2
FEEDBACK
10.3
760
821
821
10.2.1
Negative Feedback
821
10.2.2
Positive Feedback
822
10.3.1
Voltage Amplifier
822
10.3.2
Current Amplifier
823
10.3.3
Transconductance Amplifier
823
10.3.4
Transresistance Amplifier
824
822
10.4
10.5
OSCILLATORS
10.6
10.7
10.8
824
826
10.6.1
826
10.6.2
827
826
10.7.1
Colpitts Oscillator
827
10.7.2
Hartley oscillator
828
828
10.8.1
Monostable Multivibrator
10.8.2
Astable Multivibrator
EXERCISE 10.1
830
EXERCISE 10.2
840
EXERCISE 10.3
844
SOLUTIONS 10.1
849
SOLUTIONS 10.2
873
SOLUTIONS 10.3
878
828
829
***********
CHAPTER 1
Page 15
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
DIODE CIRCUITS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
A general goal of this chapter is to develop the ability to use the piece wise
linear model and approximation techniques in the hand analysis and design
of various diode circuits. The chapter includes the following topics:
Introduction to diode
AC and DC analysis of diode.
Application of diodes to perform signal processing functions: rectification,
clipping and clamping.
Zener diode, which operates in the reverse breakdown region
Application of Zener diode in voltage regulators
1.2
DIODE
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1.2.1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 16
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
Reverse Bias
If the p-terminal of an ideal diode is at lower voltage level than the n
-terminal (i.e. negative voltage applied across diode), then there is no current
across the diode. The diode operating in this mode is said to be turned OFF
or reverse biased. Mathematically, we define the condition for a reverse
biased diode as
_
Vanode < Vcathode
b
Vp < Vn
` Reverse bias
VD = Vp - Vn < 0b
a
1.2.2
i. n
o
.c
NOTE :
Thermal voltage at room temperature is VT = 0.026 V . The value of ideality factor is in the
range 1 # h # 2 . For germanium, h = 1, and for silicon, h = 2 .
1.2.3
a
i
d
o
n
The ideal diode may be considered as the most fundamental non-linear circuit
element. Figure 1.2 (a) and (b) shows the current-voltage characteristics of
an ideal diode in the forward bias and reverse bias regions, respectively.
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1.3
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(a)
...(1.2)
(b)
Figure 1.4: (a) A Simple Diode Circuit, (b) Load Line Characteristic for the Diode Circuit
...(1.3)
VD = E
ID = 0
The two variables (VD , ID ) are the same as the diode axis variable, so
we draw the load line and determine the point of intersection, as shown in
Figure 1.4 (b).
1.4
Figure 1.5 shows the piecewise linear model of a diode forward characteristic.
The exponential curve is approximated by two straight lines, line A with
zero slope and line B with a slope of rd . The straight line model or piecewise
linear model can be described as
ID = 0 ,
VD # Vg
V - Vg
, VD $ Vg
ID = D
rd
where
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(a)
(b)
Figure 1.5: (a) Piecewise Linear Model of the Diode Forward Characteristics, and (b) its
Equivalent Circuit Representation
1.5
When pn junction diode is used in a linear amplifier circuit, the time varying
or ac characteristics of the diode becomes important. For these circuits, we
define the small signal model of diode. For the small signal model analysis,
assume that the ac signal is small compared to the dc component, so that a
linear ac model can be developed from the non linear diode. The relationship
between the diode current and voltage can be written as
i. n
o
.c
VDQ + vd
VT
S
VD
S VT
where VDQ
a
i
d
iD . I e = I e
is the dc quiescent voltage and vd is the ac component. So,
VDQ
S VT
vd
iD = I e eV
Since, the ac signal is small, i.e
.
w
w
o
n
...(1.4)
vd << VT
ev /V . 1 + vd
VT
Substituting the above expression to equation (1.4), we get
V
vd
iD = _IS e V i a1 + VT k = IDQ a1 + vd k
VT
So,
...(1.5)
DQ
T
IDQ
+ IDQ vd
VT
S
S
Quiescent diode current
AC current
(dc bias current)
VDQ
S VT
(signal current)
where IDQ . I e
is the quiescent diode current. Thus, the relationship
between the ac components of the diode voltage and current is
...(1.6)
id = IDQ vd
VT
1.5.1
1.5.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Figure 1.4 (a): Bias Model and (b): Small Signal Model of a Diode
In using the piecewise linear model to the diode, the first objective is to
determine the Linear region (forward bias or reverse bias) in which the
diode is operating To do this, we can :
Step 1: Find the input voltage conditions such that a diode is ON
(forward bias) then find the output signal for this condition.
Step 2: Find the input voltage condition such that a diode is OFF
(Reverse bias) then find the output signal for this condition.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
NOTE :
Step 2 can be performed before step 1.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1.6
Diode can be used in wave shaping circuits that either limit or clip portion
of a signal, or shift the dc voltage level. The circuits are called clippers and
clampers, respectively.
Diode Circuits
1.6.1
Clippers
Clipper circuits, also called limiter circuits are used to eliminate portion
of a signal that are above or below a specified level without distorting
the remaining part of the alternating waveform. The simple form of diode
clipper-one resistor and diode depending on the orientation of the diode the
positive or negative region of the input signal is clipped OFF. There are two
general categories of clippers:
1. Series clipper
2. Parallel clipper.
1. Series Clipper
The series configuration is defined as one where the diode is in series
with the load. Table 1.1 summarizes the output waveform of various
biased and unbiased series clipper circuits for the input waveform shown
in Figure 1.5.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Series Clippers
Clipper Circuits
Output Waveforms
Unbiased Series
Clipper Using
Ideal Diode
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Clipper Circuits
Biased Series
Clipper Using
Ideal Diode
Page 21
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
2. Parallel Clipper
The parallel clipper (or shunt clipper) has the diode in a branch parallel to
the load. Table 1.2 summarizes the output waveform of various biased and
unbiased parallel clipper circuits for the input waveform shown in Figure
1.5.
Table 1.2: Parallel Clipper Circuits and its Output Waveform
Parallel Clippers
Clipper Circuits
Output Waveforms
Unbiased
Parallel Clippers
Using Ideal
Diode
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Parallel Clippers
Clipper Circuits
Output Waveforms
Biased Parallel
Clippers Using
Ideal Diode
Diode Circuits
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
1.6.2
Clampers
Clamping shifts the entire signal voltage by a dc level. In a steady state, the
output waveform is an exact replica of the input waveform, but the output
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
signal is shifted by a dc value that depends on the circuit. The network must
have a capacitor, a diode, and a resistive elements but it can also employ an
independent dc supply to introduce an additional shift. Figure 1.6 shows a
clamper circuit and a sinusoidal input waveform.
(a)
Page 23
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
(b)
For the positive half cycle of input waveform, diode is short and the
output is zero, as shown in Figure 1.7 (a). The capacitor is charged in the
positive half cycle. In the negative cycle, the diode is open and the output is
vo =- V - V =- 2V
Thus, we get the output waveform of the clamper as shown in Figure 1.7 (c).
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 1.7: Equivalent Clamping Circuit for (a) Positive Half Cycle, (b) Negative Half
Cycle of Input Waveform, (c) Output Waveform of Clamper Circuit
1.7
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1.7.1
Voltage Doubler
Voltage doubler circuits provide twice the peak voltages of the transformer
secondary. Figure 1.8 shows the half wave voltage doubler circuit.
Step 1: For positive voltage half cycle across the transformer secondary,
diode D1 conducts so capacitor C1 will be charged.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
Step 2: For negative voltage half cycle across the transformer secondary,
diode D2 will conduct and capacitor C2 will be charged.
.
w
w
Step 1: For the given voltage doubler circuit, we deduce that it includes
a negative clamper and a peak detector.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 25
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
(vo) clamper =- Vm - vi
Step 3: Since, the peak detector provides the peak voltage at output, so
we get
vo =- 2Vm
NOTE :
If a circuit includes a diode and a capacitor, then the circuit is either a clamper or
a peak detector. For a clamper, output is always across diode; whereas for a peak
detector, output is across capacitor.
1.7.2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1.8
RECTIFIER CIRCUIT
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1.8.1
Diode Circuits
Idc =
= 1
2p
2.
#
0
2p
I d (wt)
3.
Vdc = Idc RL
RMS load current: The rms load current of a rectifier is defined as
4.
1 2p I 2 d wt
^ h
2p 0
RMS load voltage: The rms load voltage of a rectifier is given by
Irms =
Vrms = Irms RL
5.
6.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
2
^Irms h2 - (Idc)
Idc
2
= b Irms l - 1
Idc
Voltage regulation: The percentage voltage regulation for a rectifier is
defined as
o
n
.
w
w
7.
8.
(Vdc) NL - (Vdc) FL
(Vdc) FL
where (Vdc) FL is the full load dc voltage and (Vdc) NL is the null load
voltage. Ideally VR should be zero.
Rectifier efficiency: The rectifier efficiency is defined as
%VR =
9.
1.8.2
Classification of Rectifiers
Rectifier circuits can be classified as
1. Half wave rectifier
2. Full wave rectifier
In the following sections, we will discuss some typical classes of rectifiers.
1.9
For a half wave rectifier, the output voltage appears only during the half
cycle of the input signal. Figure 1.11 shows a half wave rectifier, its input
waveform, and the corresponding output waveform.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 1.11: (a) Half Wave Rectifier Circuit, (b) Input Waveform, and (c) Output Waveform
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Some important parameters for a half wave rectifier are described in the
following table.
Table 1.3: Parameters of a Half Wave Rectifier Circuit
S.N.
1.
2.
Parameters
Expression
DC load current
Idc = Im
p
DC load voltage
Vdc =
Vm
R f + RS
pc
+ 1m
RL
3.
V
^Vdc hNL = pm
Irms = Im
2
5.
Vrms = Vm
2
6.
Ripple factor
r.f. = 1.21
7.
Voltage regulation
8.
Rectifier efficiency
h . 40.6
9.
10.
Output frequency
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The full wave rectifier inverts the negative portions of the sine wave so
that a unipolar output signal is generated during both halves of the input
sinusoidal. Following are the full wave rectification methods:
1. Centre tap full wave rectifier
2. The Bridge rectifier
i. n
(a)
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(b)
o
.c
(c)
Figure 1.13: (a) Full Wave Rectifier, (b) Input Waveform, and (c) Output Waveform
Some important parameters for a centre taped full wave rectifier are
summarized in the following table.
Table 1.4: Parameters of Centre Taped Full Wave Rectifier
S.N.
Parameters
Expression
1.
DC load current
Idc = 2Im
p
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ripple factor
2V
^Vdc hNL = p m if RL = 3, i.e. load terminal
is open
Irms = Im
2
Vrms = Vm
2
r.f. = 0.48
8.
Rectifier efficiency
h . 81.2 %
9.
PIV = 2Vm
10.
Output frequency
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 29
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
(a)
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(b)
(c)
Figure 1.14: (a) Bridge Rectifier, (b) Input Waveform, (c) Output Waveform
3.
Parameters
Expression
DC load current
Idc = 2Im
p
2V
^Vdc hNL = p m
5.
6.
Ripple factor
Irms = Im
2
Vrms = Vm
2
r.f. = 0.48
8.
Rectifier efficiency
h . 81.2 %
9.
PIV = Vm
10.
Output frequency
4.
1.11 FILTERS
A capacitor is added in parallel with the load resistor of a half wave rectifier
to form a simple filter circuit as shown in fig 1.15.
Conduction Interval
The diode only conducts for a short time TT during each cycle. This time
is called the conduction interval.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Output Voltage
During the discharge period the voltage across the capacitor is described by
vo ^ t h = Vm e-t/RC
At the end of discharge interval, we have the output
VL = Vm e-Tl/RC
where Tl is the discharge time.
(a)
(b)
Figure 1.15: (a) Capacitor Filter Circuit, (b) Input and Output Waveform for the Filter
i. n
Ripple Voltage
The output voltage is no longer constant as in the ideal peak detector circuit
but has ripple voltage ^Vr h. The ripple voltage is defined as the difference
between Vm and VL , i.e.
o
.c
Vr = Vm - VL = Vm ^1 - e-Tl/RC h
Since, RC >> Tl, so we may write
Vr . Vm b Tl l
RC
or
Vr . Vm T
RC
or
Vr = Vm
fRC
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(Tl . T )
( f = 1/T )
(a)
(b)
Figure 1.16: Equivalent Circuit Model for a Zener Diode for (a) ON State and (b) OFF
State
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
the simplest discrete Regulator consists of only a resistor and a zener diode,
as shown in Figure 1.17.
Page 31
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
The applied dc voltage is fixed, as is the load resistor. The zener regulator
can be analysed in the following steps.
Step 1: Remove the zener diode from the network.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
RL v
R + RL i
Step 3: Determine the state of the zener diode by checking the obtained
value of voltage V for the following conditions
If V $ Vz , the zener diode is ON
If V < Vz , the diode is OFF
Step 4: Substitute the appropriate equivalent circuit for the resulting
state of zener diode. For ON state, equivalent mode of Figure
1.16(a) can be substituted, while for OFF state the open circuit
equivalence of Figure 1.16(b) is substituted.
Step 5: Solve the resulting equivalent circuit for the desired unknowns.
For example, assume that the equivalent circuit for the zener
regulator is as shown below.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.1
Page 32
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.1.1
Consider the given circuit and a waveform for the input voltage, shown in
figure below. The diode in circuit has cutin voltage Vg = 0 .
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 1.1.2
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Consider the given circuit and a waveform for the input voltage, shown in
figure below. The diode in circuit has cutin voltage Vg = 0 .
MCQ 1.1.3
Consider the given circuit and a waveform for the input voltage, shown in
figure below. The diode in circuit has cutin voltage Vg = 0 .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.4
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Consider the given circuit and a waveform for the input voltage. The diode
in circuit has cutin voltage Vg = 0 .
MCQ 1.1.5
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.6
For the circuit shown below the cutin voltage of diode is Vg = 0.7 V.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.7
The vo for - 10 # vs # 10 V is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.8
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.9
In the circuit shown below, the three signals of fig are impressed on the
input terminals.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.10
For the circuit shown below the input voltage vi is as shown in figure.
i. n
Assume the RC time constant large and cutin voltage of diode Vg = 0 . The
output voltage vo is
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.11
For the circuit shown below, the input voltage vi is as shown in figure.
Assume the RC time constant large and cutin voltage Vg = 0 . The output
voltage vo is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.12
In the circuit I is DC current and capacitors are very large. Using small
signal model which of following is correct ?
hVT
hVT + IRs
vs
(C) vo =
hVT + IRS
(A) vo = vs
(B) vo = vs
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(D) vo = 0
MCQ 1.1.13
MCQ 1.1.14
MCQ 1.1.15
If v1 =- 5 V and v2 = 5 V then vo is
(A) 9.474 V
(C) 4.5 V
(B) 8.943 V
(D) 9 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.16
MCQ 1.1.17
MCQ 1.1.18
In the circuit shown below diodes has cutin voltage of 0.6 V. The diode in
ON state are
Diode Circuits
(A) only D1
(C) both D1 and D2
MCQ 1.1.19
(B) only D2
(D) None of these
i. n
For the circuit shown below cutin voltage of diode is Vg = 0.7 . What is the
value of v and i ?
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
For the circuit shown below the value of v and i are (if the diode is ideal)
(A) + 5 V, 0 mA
(C) + 5 V, 0.4 mA
MCQ 1.1.21
(B) + 1 V, 0.6 mA
(D) + 1 V, 0.4 mA
For the circuit shown below each diode has Vg = 0.6 V and rf = 0 . Both
diode will be ON if
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 39
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.1.22
The current iD is
(A) 2.5 (1 + cos wt) mA
(C) 5 (1 + cos wt) mA
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.23
The voltage vD is
(A) 0.25 (3 + cos wt) V
(B) 0.25 (1 + 3 cos wt) V
(C) 0.5 (3 + 1 cos wt) V
(D) 0.5 (2 + 3 cos wt) V
MCQ 1.1.24
The circuit inside the box in figure shown below contains only resistor and
diodes. The terminal voltage vo is connected to some point in the circuit
inside the box.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.1.26
MCQ 1.1.27
MCQ 1.1.28
MCQ 1.1.29
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The following circuit has a source voltage Vs as shown in the graph. The
current through the circuit is also shown.
Page 41
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.1.31
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
In the voltage doubler circuit shown in the figure, the switch S is closed at
t = 0 . Assuming diodes D1 and D2 to be ideal, load resistance to be infinite
and initial capacitor voltages to be zero. The steady state voltage across
capacitor C1 and C2 will be
What are the states of the three ideal diodes of the circuit shown in figure ?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.33
Diode Circuits
The equivalent circuit of a diode, during forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
(I)
(II)
If such a diode is used in clipper circuit of figure given above, the output
voltage Vo of the circuit will be
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.34
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
A voltage signal 10 sin wt is applied to the circuit with ideal diodes, as shown
in figure, The maximum, and minimum values of the output waveform Vout
of the circuit are respectively
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 1.1.36
Page 43
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
+ 10 V and - 10 V
+ 4 V and - 4 V
+ 7 V and - 4 V
+ 4 V and - 7 V
The forward resistance of the diode shown in Figure is 5 W and the remaining
parameters are same at those of an ideal diode. The dc component of the
source current is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) Vm
50p
Vm
(C)
100p 2
MCQ 1.1.37
Vm
50p 2
(D) 2Vm
50p
(B)
The cut-in voltage of both zener diode DZ and diode D shown in Figure
is 0.7 V, while break-down voltage of DZ is 3.3 V and reverse break-down
voltage of D is 50 V. The other parameters can be assumed to be the same
as those of an ideal diode. The values of the peak output voltage (Vo) are
(A) 3.3 V in the positive half cycle and 1.4 V in the negative half cycle.
(B) 4 V in the positive half cycle and 5 V in the negative half cycle.
(C) 3.3 V in both positive and negative half cycles.
(D) 4 V in both positive and negative half cycle
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.38
MCQ 1.1.39
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 1.1.40
JAEGER/120/3.9
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.41
JAEGER/120/3.9
MCQ 1.1.42
JAEGER/168/3.82
I znom
I znom
I zworst
^minh
(A)
1.2 mA
0 mA
0 mA
(B)
0.5 mA
0.70 mA
0.103 mA
(C)
0.5 mA
0.60 mA
0.346 mA
(D)
0.5 mA
0.796 mA
0.215 mA
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.44
What are the nominal and worst case values of zener power dissipation?
(A) 10.8 mW, 0 mW, 0 mW
(B) 4.5 mW, 7.52 nW, 1.80 mW
(C) 4.5 mW, 6.81 mW, 2.03 mW
(D) 4.5 mW, 5.13 mW, 5.67 mW
BOYLSTEAD/68/2.14
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
The diode circuit shown in figure. Assume that diode is ideal, what will be
the biasing modes of diode D1 , D2 and D 3 ? (FB " forward biased, RB "
reverse biased)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 1.1.46
Page 45
Chap 1
The diode circuit in figure shown below the biasing of the diode D1 , D2 is
(A) ON, ON
(C) OFF, ON
MCQ 1.1.45
D1
FB
FB
FB
FB
D2
FB
FB
RB
RB
D3
FB
RB
RB
FB
The diode in the circuit shown below have linear parameter of Vg = 0.7 (for
Si), Vg = 0.3 (for Ge) and rf = 0 for both the diode. What is the biasing
condition of diode D1 and D2 ?
(A) D1 - ON , D2 - ON
(C) D1 - OFF , D2 - ON
(B) D1 - ON , D2 - OFF
(D) D1 - OFF , D2 - OFF
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.47
In the voltage regulator circuit below rating of zener diode is given, then the
range of values of vi that will maintain the zener diode in the ON state is
Diode Circuits
Consider the given a circuit and a waveform for the input voltage.
BOYLSTEAD/109/29
i. n
o
.c
If the diode has cut in voltage Vg = 0 , the output waveform of the circuit is
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.49
BOYLSTEAD/112/41
Assume that the diode cut in voltage for the circuit shown below is Vg = 0.7V
. Which of clamper circuit perform the function shown below ?
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.50
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(B) 2.602 # 10-16 A
(D) 7.598 # 10-14 A
(A) 6 mA
(C) 8.672 # 10-14 A
The circuit diagram of a zener regulator is shown in figure below. The data
sheet specification for zener IN4742A provides following values
Vz = 12 V at IzT = 21 mA , Rz = 9 (assume constant) IzM = 76 mA , Izk = 1 mA
.
MCQ 1.1.51
The values of zener diode voltages ^Vz hmax , ^Vz hmin respectively are
DESHPANDE/169/3.17
MCQ 1.1.52
The maximum value of load current over which the zener diode is in ON
state.
(A) 36.88 mA
(B) 35.88 mA
(C) 36.36 mA
(D) 35.36 mA
MCQ 1.1.53
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.1.54
REA/29/1.31
The new value of reference voltage and the temperature coefficient of the
series combination of diode D and zener diode.
MCQ 1.1.55
MCQ 1.1.56
The diode circuit given below. Assume diode is ideal. The operating states
of diodes D1 , D2 are
i. n
o
.c
o
n
.
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
w
MCQ 1.1.57
D1
ON,
ON,
OFF,
OFF,
a
i
d
D2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Consider the given circuit. The diode in circuit has cut in voltage Vg = 0.6 V
and zener diode voltage Vz = 9.4 V .
Plot vo versus vi is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.58
Assume that the diodes in the circuit are ideal. What are the operating
states of diodes ?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 1.1.59
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
D1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Status of
(A) ON,
(B) ON,
(C) ON,
(D) ON,
MCQ 1.1.60
D2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
**********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.2
Page 50
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
QUES 1.2.1
In the circuit shown below, D1 and D2 are ideal diodes. The current i2 is
_____ mA
QUES 1.2.2
Let cutin voltage Vg = 0.7 V for each diode in the circuit shown below.
i. n
a
i
d
o
.c
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 1.2.4
The cutin voltage for each diode in circuit shown below is Vg = 0.6 V. Each
diode current is 0.5 mA. The value of R 3 will be _____ kW.
QUES 1.2.5
The diodes in the circuit shown below has parameters Vg = 0.6 V and rf = 0
. The current iD is ____ mA.
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 1.2.6
QUES 1.2.7
QUES 1.2.8
The diodes in the circuit shown below have linear parameters of Vg = 0.6
V and rf = 0 .
QUES 1.2.9
QUES 1.2.10
If v2 = 5 V, then vo is____volts.
QUES 1.2.11
QUES 1.2.12
Ten diodes, each of them provides 0.7 V drop when the current through it
is 20 mA, connected in parallel operate at a total current of 0.1 A. What
current flows in each diode (in Amp) ?
QUES 1.2.13
In the voltage regulator circuit shown below the maximum load current iL
that can be drawn is _____ mA.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 1.2.14
In the voltage regulator shown below the power dissipation in the Zener
diode is _____ watts.
QUES 1.2.15
In the voltage regulator circuit shown below the power rating of Zener diode
is 400 mW. The value of RL that will establish maximum power in Zener
diode is _____ kW.
QUES 1.2.16
Diode Circuits
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 1.2.17
The input to full-wave rectifier shown below is vi = 120 sin 2p60t V. The
diode cutin voltage is 0.7 V. If the output voltage cannot drop below 100 V,
the required value of the capacitor is _____ mF .
QUES 1.2.18
For the circuit shown below diode cutin voltage is vin = 0 . The ripple voltage
is to be no more than vrip = 4 V. The minimum load resistance, that can be
connected to the output is _____ kW.
QUES 1.2.19
Assuming that the diodes in the given circuit are ideal, the voltage Vo
is_____ volts.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 1.2.20
Assume that D1 and D2 in given figure are ideal diodes. The value of current
is _____ mA.
QUES 1.2.21
QUES 1.2.22
Assuming that in given circuit the diodes are ideal. The current in diode D1
is ____ mA.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 1.2.23
What is the value of RL min (Minimum load resistance) for zener voltage
regulator circuit (in kW ) ?
QUES 1.2.24
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 1.2.25
Diode Circuits
QUES 1.2.26
QUES 1.2.27
QUES 1.2.28
Assume that in the given circuit diodes are ideal. The value of ID2 is __mA.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 1.2.29
The diode in the circuit shown below have linear parameter of Vg = 0.7 V
and rf = 0 W . The value of the current ^ID2h in diode D2 is ____ mA.
QUES 1.2.30
QUES 1.2.31
QUES 1.2.32
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 1.2.34
QUES 1.2.35
QUES 1.2.36
In the circuit shown in figure, both diodes have h = 1, but D1 has 10 times
the junction area of D2 . The value of voltage V is ____ mV.
QUES 1.2.37
Page 55
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Assume that the voltage drop across each of the diodes in the circuit shown
below is 0.7 V. The value of current through diode D1 , is ID1 = _____ mA
QUES 1.2.38
QUES 1.2.39
The value of
vo ^ t h
is _____
vin ^ t h
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.3
Page 56
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.3.1
MAINI/585/2
Which of the following filter types is suitable only for large values of load
resistance ?
(A) Capacitor filter
(B) Inductor filter
(C) Choke-input filter
(D) p-type CLC filter
MCQ 1.3.2
Which of the following filter types is suitable only for small values of load
resistance ?
(A) Capacitor filter
(B) Inductor filter
(C) Choke-input filter
(D) p-type CLC filter
MCQ 1.3.3
A rectifier is used to
(A) convert a.c. voltage to d.c. voltage
(B) convert d.c. voltage to a.c. voltage
(C) both (a) and (b)
(D) convert voltage to current
MCQ 1.3.4
MCQ 1.3.5
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.3.6
A half wave diode rectifier and full wave diode bridge rectifier both have an
input frequency of 50 Hz. The frequencies of outputs respectively are
(A) 100 Hz and 50 Hz
(B) 50 Hz and 100 Hz
(C) 100 Hz each
(D) 50 Hz each
MCQ 1.3.7
A full wave bridge diode rectifier uses diodes having forward resistance of 50
ohms each. The load resistance is also 50 ohms. The voltage regulations is
(A) 20%
(B) 50%
(C) 100%
(D) 200%
MCQ 1.3.8
MCQ 1.3.9
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 57
Chap 1
MCQ 1.3.10
MCQ 1.3.11
MCQ 1.3.12
MCQ 1.3.13
MCQ 1.3.14
MCQ 1.3.15
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
The forward resistance of the diode shown in figure is 5 W and the remaining
parameters are same as those of an ideal diode. The dc component of the
source current is
(A) Vm
(B) Vm
50p
50p 2
V
m
(C)
(D) 2Vm
50p
100p 2
The relation between diode current, voltage and temperature is given by
V
V
(A) I = Io _1 - e hV i
(B) I = Io _e hV - 1i
T
(C) I = Io _e
MCQ 1.3.16
MCQ 1.3.17
V
hVT
+ 1i
(D) I = Io e
V
hVT
MCQ 1.3.18
Diode Circuits
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.3.19
Diode Circuits
MCQ 1.3.20
MCQ 1.3.21
(B) Lc = RL
(A) Lc = 3wRL
3w
w
3
(C) Lc =
(D) None of the above
RL
Transformer utilization factor is more for
(A) half wave rectifier
(B) center tapped full wave rectifier
(C) bridge rectifier
(D) all of the above
The zener diode in the regulator circuit shown in figure has a Zener voltage
of 5.8 Volts and a Zener knee current of 0.5 mA. The maximum load current
drawn from this circuit ensuring proper functioning over the input voltage
range between 20 and 30 Volts, is
i. n
o
.c
(A) 23.7 mA
(C) 13.7 mA
MCQ 1.3.22
a
i
d
(B) 14.2 mA
(D) 24.2 mA
o
n
MCQ 1.3.23
.
w
w
LAL KISHORE
198/4
MCQ 1.3.24
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
For an input VS = 5 sin wt (assume ideal diode), the circuit shown in Fig. will
be behave as a
Page 59
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 1.3.26
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.3.27
MCQ 1.3.28
MCQ 1.3.29
MCQ 1.3.30
MCQ 1.3.31
In a full wave rectifier, the current in each of the diodes flows for
(A) the complete cycle of the input signal
(B) half cycle of the input signal
(C) for zero time
(D) more than half cycle of input signal
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.3.32
MCQ 1.3.33
MCQ 1.3.34
Diode Circuits
(C) Vm /2
MCQ 1.3.35
(D) Vm / 2
In a bridge type full wave rectifier, if Vm is the peak voltage across the
secondary of the transformer, the maximum voltage coming across each
reverse-biased diode is
(A) Vm
(B) 2Vm
i. n
o
.c
(C) Vm /2
MCQ 1.3.36
a
i
d
(D) Vm / 2
In a half wave rectifier, the peak value of the ac. voltage across the secondary
of the transformer is 20 2 V . If no filter circuit is used, the maximum d.c.
voltage across the load will be
(A) 28.28 V
(B) 25 V
(C) 14.14 V
(D) 9 V
o
n
.
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.1
Page 61
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.1
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
at the p-terminal
at the n - terminal
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
CASE I:
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.2
i. n
at the p-terminal
at the n - terminal
o
.c
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
a
i
d
o
n
CASE I:
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.3
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
at the p-terminal
at the n - terminal
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
CASE I:
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 64
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.4
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
at the p-terminal
v p1 = vi
at the n - terminal
vn1 = 8 V
Step 3: Voltage across the diode D2 is obtained as
o
n
.
w
w
at the p-terminal
v p2 = 0 V
at the n - terminal
vn1 = vi + 6
Step 4: Now, we have the condition for both the diodes
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
CASE I:
If - 6 V < vi < 8 V , then both diodes D1 and D2 are OFF. So, the
equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
vo = 8 V
Step 5: From the results obtained in the above step, we sketch the output
waveform as shown below.
SOL 1.1.5
diode is ON
diode is OFF
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 66
Chap 1
CASE I
Diode Circuits
vi # 4.03
Diode is OFF. So, the equivalent circuit is
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
vo = 3.33
Step 4: From the results obtained in the above step, we sketch the ransfer
characteristic is as shown below.
w
SOL 1.1.6
diode is ON
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage. By
using voltage divider rule,
vn =
Page 67
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
1k
15 = 5 V
1k + 2k #
CASE I :
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
By using super node technique
vo - 0.7 - 15 + vo - 0.7 + vo - vi = 0
2k
1k
1k
vo = 0.4vi + 3.42
Step 3 From the two results obtained in the above steps, we sketch the Transfer
characteristic is as shown below. So, the transfer characteristic is
SOL 1.1.7
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
I = 10 - 0.7 = 0.465 mA
10 + 10
So, the output voltage is
vo = 10k # 0.465 mA = 4.65 V
If vs > 4.65 then diode D 4 is always OFF. So, the equivalent circuit
is
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
CASE II:
Page 69
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
Current through D 4 is
- 0.7 - ^- 10h
= 0.465 mA
10 + 10
So, the output voltage is
I =
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
So, the output voltage is
vo = vs
If - 10 < vs < - 4.65 then D2 is OFF. So, the equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 70
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.8
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
o
n
.
w
w
CASE I:
If vi < 2.5 V then diode is ON. So, the equivalent circuit is,
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
vi = 10 V
Nodal analysis at Node vo ,
Page 71
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
vo - vi + vo - 2.5 = 0
2M
1M
3vo = vi + 5
3vo = 15
So, the output voltage is
vo = 5 V
Step 3: From the two results obtained in the above steps, we sketch the
output waveform is as shown below.
SOL 1.1.9
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
v1 - v 2 = v D - v D ,
v1 - v 3 = v D - v D
Suppose that v1 is positive and exceeds v2 and v 3 . Then D1 must be forwardbiased with vD = 0 and consequently vD < 0 and vD < 0 . Hence D2 and D 3
block, while v1 is passed as vo . This is so in general. The largest positive
input signal is passed as vo , while the remainder of the input signals are
blocked. If all input signals are negative, vo = 0 .
1
SOL 1.1.10
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
vo = 0
CASE II:
In positive half cycle diode will be OFF. So, the equivalent circuit is
i. n
o
.c
SOL 1.1.11
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 73
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
For small signal response, open dc current source, short capacitor C1 and C2 ,
and replace diode with it small signal resistance rd . So, the output voltage is
hVT
v
s rd
I
= vs
vo =
rd + Rs
hVT
+ Rs
I
= vs
SOL 1.1.13
hVT
hVT
= vs
hVT + Rs
hVT + IRs
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage. So,
v pn1 = 10 - 0 = 10 V
v pn2 = 5 - 0 = 5 V
Step 3: Assume diode is D1 is ON and diode D2 is OFF.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 74
Chap 1
vo = 1 # 9 = 9 V
Voltage across diode D2
Diode Circuits
v pn2 = v p2 - vn2
= 5 - 9 =- 4
So diode D2 is in OFF state.
Step 4: From the results obtained in the above steps, the output voltage is,
Vo = 9 V
SOL 1.1.14
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
Step 3: Assume that diode D1 and D2 is in ON state. So, the equivalent
circuit is
.
w
w
Nodal analysis
v 0 - 10 + vo - 10 + vo = 0
1
1
9
Step 4: From the two results obtained in the above steps, the output voltage
is,
vo = 20 # 9 = 9.474 V
19
both are positive. So, D1 and D2 are ON
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
reverse bias) in which the two diodes are operating, and then obtain the
output.
Step 1: Assume that the two diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit
So, the equivalent circuit is
Page 75
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Step 3: From the results obtained in the above steps, the output voltage is,
SOL 1.1.16
vo = 5 # 9 = 4.5 V
10
Option (B) is correct.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the two diode are operating, and then obtain the
output.
Step 1: Assume that the two diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit.
So, the equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we determine the output voltage.
Step 3: Diode D1 is OFF and D2 is ON. So, the equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 77
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we analyse the circuit.
Step 3: Both diodes are ON. So, the equivalent circuit is
V = 3.71 V
In this case, iD1 and iD2 are positive, so D1 and D2 are ON (assumption
is correct).
SOL 1.1.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 78
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
v = 3 - 0.7 = 2.3 V
This diode D1 is not conducting because of diode D2 is ON. (highly
forward biased).
2.3 - ^- 3h
= 2.65 mA
2
i =
SOL 1.1.20
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we obtain the required unknowns
Step 3: Diode D1 is OFF & D2 is ON. Since the equivalent circuit is
SOL 1.1.21
v =5V
i = 5-v
10 kW
= 5 - 5 = 0 mA
10k
Option (A) is correct.
The given circuit is,
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
vs - v1 > 0.6
For both diode is ON when v1 > 0.6 . Using nodal analysis at node v1 ,
v 1 + 0. 6 - v s + v 1 - v s + v 1 + v 1 - 0 . 6 = 0
500
500
5k
5k
v1 = 2vs + 5.4 > 0.6
22
vs > 3.9 V
SOL 1.1.22
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
vTH = 100 (2 + cos wt) = 1 + 0.5 cos wt V
200
RTH = 100 # 100 = 50 W
100 + 100
SOL 1.1.24
SOL 1.1.25
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
3.6
20
11 + 3.6 #
V =
Diode Circuits
= 4.93
So,
V > vz
Therefore, the zener diode is in ON State. In ON condition, the diode circuit
is
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.27
and
iL (min)
Thus,
= 25 mA
25 m # iL # 120 mA
SOL 1.1.28
iL = iR - iz
40 # RL # 192 W
SOL 1.1.29
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 81
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
Step 2: Now, we have the condition for both the diodes are
For normal diode,
v p > vn
v p < vn
diode is ON
diode is OFF
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
CASE I:
If vi < - 0.7 , pn diode are OFF and zener diode behave as forward
bias. So, the equivalent circuit is
vo =- 0.7
CASE II:
- 0.7 # vi # 5.7 both zener and diode D will be off. So, the
equivalent circuit is,
vo = vi
CASE III:
5.7 < vi < 10 Diode D will be ON and zener will be OFF. So, the
equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 82
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.30
SOL 1.1.31
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
Step 1: We have the input waveform, vi = 5 sin wt . So, we draw the waveform
as
o
n
.
w
w
Step 2: For half part of the circuit. When positive half cycle of input is
applied, diode D1 is ON and D2 is OFF. So, capacitor C1 will charge
upto + 5 Volt
VC =+ 5 Volt
1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 83
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
So, it allows only peaks at the output. Thus, from the results obtained
in the above step, the output voltage is
VC =- 10 Volt
2
SOL 1.1.32
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we obtain the required unknowns
Step 3: In the given circuit, D 3 is always OFF because it is connected to 5 A
current source and D1 is always ON because it is connected to 10 V
battery source. So, voltage drop across D1 is always positive.
Step 4: Now, we check for D2 diode.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 84
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
vo =
v p < vn
So diode is always OFF. Thus, we get the output voltage as shown
below.
i. n
o
.c
SOL 1.1.34
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
The output voltage is
vo = vi
Step 3: In both cases diode D2 is always OFF. From the results obtained in
above steps, we get the transfer characteristic as
SOL 1.1.35
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Applying KVL,
Vin - 10kI + 4 - 10kI = 0
Vin + 4 = I
20k
Since, the minimum input voltage is Vin =- 10 V , so we obtain the
corresponding current as
I = - 10 + 4 =- 3 mA
20k
10
Thus, the minimum output voltage is obtained as
Vin - Vout = I
10
- 10 - Vout =- 3 m
10k
10
i. n
o
.c
Vout =- (10 - 3)
=- 7 volt
SOL 1.1.36
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
For positive half cycle ^vo < 4 Vh, the equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1k 10 sin wt
1k + 1k
vo = 5 sin wt
For peak positive value of input zener diode will be ON state So,
Page 87
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
vo = 3.3 + 0.7
vo = 4 V
CASE II:
For negative value of input, the zener diode will be in OFF state. So, the
equivalent circuit is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.38
&
Initially,
At t = Toff ,
I = C dVc
dt
Vc = I t + Vc (0)
C
Vc (0) = 0
Vc = I t
C
Vc = I Toff
C
TON
= TON
TON + TOFF
T
TON = DT
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 88
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.39
ia
DT = T
I
Vo = 1 ; #
b-C t l dt +
T 0
ON
d
o
SOL 1.1.40
n
.
w
w
i. n
o
.c
Vo =- Vc = - I t
C
TOFF
#0
a dVc = I
dt
C
0 dtE
2 DT
=- 1 . I :t D
T C 2 0
2
2
2
=- 1 . I . D T =- I D .T
2
T C
C 2
Option (C) is correct.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the three diodes are operating, and then obtain the
output.
Step 1: Assume that the three diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit.
So, equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
VC = 0 - 0.6 =- 0.6 V
VB =- 0.6 + 0.6 = 0 V
VA = VB - 0.6 = 0 - 0.6 =- 0.6 V
So, current I1 is
I1 = 10 - VB = 10 - 0 = 1 mA
10k
10 kW
Current through diode D1 is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VA - ^- 20h
= - 0.6 + 20 = 1.94 mA
10k
10 kW
Also, current I2 is
ID1 =
VC - ^- 10h
= - 0.6 + 10 = 0.94 mA
10k
10k
Applying KCL at node VB ,
I2 =
I 1 = I D1 + I D2
1 mA = 1.94 mA + ID2
ID2 =- 0.94 mA 1 0
Applying KCL at node VC ,
I D2 + I D 3 = I 2
- 0.94 mA + ID3 = 0.94 mA
ID3 = 1.86 mA 2 0
From the result ID1 and ID3 are greater than zero and ID2 which is
less than zero, represent a contradiction. So, diode D 3 will be OFF.
Step 3: For second iteration let us assume D1 and D 3 are ON and D2 is OFF
so
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 90
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
- 0.6 - ^- 10h
= 0.94 mA 2 0
10k
Current through diode D2 is
ID3 =
i. n
o
.c
VD1 = 0.6 V
Voltage drop across diode D 3 is
a
i
d
VD3 = 0.6 V
and voltage across the diode D2 is
.
w
w
o
n
where
and
So,
SOL 1.1.42
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 30 ^1.05h = 31.5
= 30 ^0.95h = 28.5
= 15k ^1.05h = 15.75 kW
= 15 ^0.95h = 14.25 kW
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
For Iz max
For Iz min
= IS - I L
Iz = VS - Vz - Vz - 0
RS
RL
VS max - Vz min - Vz min
I zworst
max =
RS min
RL max
31.5 - 8.55 - 8.55
I zworst
max =
10.5
14.25k
I zworst
min
I zworst
min
SOL 1.1.43
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
For these condition, we conclude from the above circuit that diode
D1 is ON and diode D2 is OFF.
Step 3: For the result obtained in above step, we draw the equivalent circuit
as
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
diode is ON
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions to above circuit, we conclude that D1 , D2
, D 3 are ON.
Step 3: If D1 , D2 , D 3 are ON, then equivalent circuit is
Page 93
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Current I1 = 10 - 5 = 1.667 mA
3k
Current I2 = 5 - 0 = 0.714 mA
7k
Applying KCL at vA node,
i 1 + i D2 = I 2
iD2 = 0.714 mA - 1.667 m
=- 0.9527 mA
So, diode D2 is OFF because iD2 1 0
Step 4: For diode D2 to be OFF, the modified circuit is
Current i1 = 10 - 0 = 1 mA
3k + 7k
0 - ^- 5h
Current i 3 =
= 2 mA
2.5k
Applying KCL at Node VB ,
i 1 + i D3 = i 3
iD3 = 2 m - 1 mA = 1 mA
ID3 2 0
So, diode D 3 is ON.
Step 5: Thus, from the above results, we have
D1
FB
D2
RB
D3
FB
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.46
Diode Circuits
In this case, the voltage across the parallel arm is not same. So it does not
follow the KVL rule. When the supply is turned ON, it will increase from
0 to 15 V within milliseconds. During the rise in voltage across the diodes,
when 0.3 V is established across the germanium diode it will turn ON and
maintain a level of 0.3 V. So, silicon diode always remains OFF. Therefore,
we get the equivalent circuit as
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 1.1.47
.
w
w
VA =
VA min
vi min
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 1200 + 220 # 20
1200
Diode Circuits
= 23.67 V
So, the load current is
iL = Vz - 0 = 20 = 16.67 mA
1.2 k
1.2 k
Applying KCL at node VA ,
IR = Iz + IL
IR max = Iz max + IL
vi max - vz = 60m + 16.67 mA
R
vi max = 76.67m # 220 + vz
= 16.87 V + 20 V = 36.87 V
SOL 1.1.48
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
CASE I:
For positive half wave of the input, the diode D1 and D 3 will be forward
biased and diode D2 , D 4 will be reverse diode. So, equivalent circuit diagram
is
vo + vi = 0
vo =- vi
...(1)
CASE II:
For negative half cycle of the input, the diode D 4 and D2 will be ON, and
D1 and D 3 will be OFF. So, the equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.49
SOL 1.1.50
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
VD
I = IS eV
6 m = IS e 800m
26m
T
or
or
SOL 1.1.51
IS = 2.602 # 10-16 A
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 97
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 36.88m - 1m = 35.88 mA
SOL 1.1.53
SOL 1.1.54
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 98
Chap 1
Vref = Vz + Vg
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.1.56
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
V + 2V + 20 = 5m # 2k
3V =- 10
V =- 10
3
Step 4: At node A voltage is negative, so we get
Page 99
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
From the above circuit, ID2 > 0 . Thus, diode D1 is OFF and Diode
D2 is ON.
SOL 1.1.57
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Zener diode is ON
| Vpn | > Vz
Zener diode is OFF
| Vpn | < Vz
Using these conditions, we analyze the given circuit.
Step 1: For positive half cycle, the diode D2 , D 3 , D 4 are operating in OFF
state and diode D1 is in forward biased for Vi 2 0.6 . Now, consider
the following two cases for positive half cycle.
CASE I:
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
vo = vin
o
n
CASE II:
.
w
w
SOL 1.1.58
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Step 1: Assume that the two diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit.
So, the equivalent circuit is
Page 101
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we conclude that both diodes are
operating in ON state. But, the n -terminals of diode are commonly
connected, so the result is incorrect.
Step 4: For the obtained voltage, we conclude that diode D1 approaches the
ON state first. So, we check for D1 ON and D2 OFF. The equivalent
circuit is
vPn2 = 5 - 10
vPn2 =- 5
vPn2 1 0
i.e. diode D2 is OFF (assumption is correct). Thus, diode D1 is ON
and D2 is OFF.
SOL 1.1.59
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 102
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
i. n
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
For these conditions, we conclude that diode D1 is ON.
Step 4: Now, we draw the equivalent circuit (for the diode D1 ON) for
checking the operating regions of diodes D2 and D 3 .
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
V2 =
1k
- 15 Vh
1k + 1k + 1k ^
=- 5 V
vPn2 = vP2 - vn2
= 0 - ^- 5h = 5
So, diode D2 is also ON.
Step 6: Again, we redraw the equivalent circuit (for the diodes D1 and D 3
ON) for checking the operating region of diode D 3 .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
=- 7.5 - 0 =- 7.5 V
vPn3 1 0
So, diode D 3 is OFF.
Step 7: Thus, combining the all results obtained in above cases, we conclude
that diode D1 is ON, D2 is ON, and diode D 3 is OFF.
SOL 1.1.60
Page 103
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 7.5 V
I = V1 - V2
1 kW
= 0 - 0 = 0 Amp
1k
**********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.2
Page 104
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.2.1
Correct answer is 4.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the diodes are operating, and then obtain the required
unknowns.
Step 1: Assume that the diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit. So,
equivalent circuit is,
i. n
o
.c
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we conclude that diode D1 is OFF and
D2 is ON.
Step 3: For the result obtained in the above case, the equivalent circuit is
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
i1 = 0 mA ,
SOL 1.2.2
i2 = 5 - 3 = 4 mA
500
diode is ON
diode is OFF
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
I =
Page 105
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
10 - 0.7 - ^- 10h
= 1.287 mA
15k
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
iD1 = 0 mA
vo =- 10 + ^5kh^1.287 mh
=- 3.57 V
Correct answer is - 2 .
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the diode is operating, and then obtain the output.
Step 1: Assume that the diode is OFF, and replace it by open circuit. So,
equivalent circuit is
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Applying these conditions, we conclude that diode is OFF.
Step 4: So, the voltage across diode is
vD = vA - vB = 2 - 4 =- 2 V
SOL 1.2.4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
o
n
.
w
w
In this case,
o
.c
a
i
d
= 2.93 kW
SOL 1.2.5
i. n
vo = 5 - 0.6 = 4.4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Using Nodal analysis, we obtain the output voltage as
vo - 10 + ^vo - 0.6h - 0 = 0
9.5
0.5k
v 0 = 1.07 V
SOL 1.2.7
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
SOL 1.2.9
o
n
.
w
w
vo = 0.842 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.2.11
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
v2 = 10 V
which is greater than the required voltage to turn ON the diode D2 . So,
the diodes D1 and D2 both are ON for the given voltage. Therefore, the
equivalent circuit is
SOL 1.2.13
vo = 9.16 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 110
Chap 1
vo > vz
Diode Circuits
,
vo < vz
Zener diode in ON state.
So, the equivalent circuit is,
Zener diode is ON
Zener diode is OFF
According to KCL
SOL 1.2.14
iR = iz + iL
For
iL (max) & iz (min) = 0
iR = iL (max)
iL (max) = 30 - 9 = 1.4 mA
15 kW
Correct answer is 0.5.
We have the given circuit,
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
Step 1: From the circuit, the voltage across Zener diode is obtained as
V = 75 # 50 = 16.66 V
225
Step 2: For Zener diode, we have the condition
.
w
w
Zener diode is ON
V > vz
Zener diode is OFF
V < vz
Checking this condition for the obtained value V , we conclude that
V > Vz
16.66 > 15 V
i.e. the Zener diode is ON.
Step 3: For the Zener diode operating in ON condition, the equivalent circuit
is
Step 4: From the equivalent circuit, we obtain the current through Zener
diode as
iR = iz + iL
iz = iR - iL = 50 - 15 - 15
150
75
iz = 33.33 mA
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Correct answer is 2.
Zener diode is operating in ON state, so equivalent circuit is
Page 111
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
iR = 20 - 10 = 45 mA
222
Step 3: For maximum power in zener diode, the value of RL is obtained as
iL (min) = iR - iz (max)
10 = 45 - 40
RL
RL = 10 = 2 kW
5
SOL 1.2.16
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.2.18
Diode Circuits
So,
vrip = v max
fRL C
75
= 6.25 kW
RL = v max =
fCvrip 60 # 50 # 10-5 # 4
SOL 1.2.19
Correct answer is 5.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the diode is operating, and then obtain the output.
Step 1: Assume that the diode is OFF, and replace it by open circuit. So,
equivalent circuit is
i. n
o
.c
diode is ON
v p > vn
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Checking the given circuit for these conditions, we conclude that D2
is always OFF and D1 is ON.
Step 3: So, we draw the equivalent circuit for the obtained result as
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
10k
10
10k + 10k #
=5V
SOL 1.2.20
Correct answer is 0.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the diodes are operating, and then obtain the output.
Step 1: Assume that the diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit. So,
equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
diode is ON
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Checking the given circuit for the conditions,
Diode D1 " v pn = 2 =+ ve . So D1 is ON.
Diode D2 " v pn =- 2 =- ve . So D2 is OFF.
Step 3: Thus, for the obtained result, we draw the equivalent circuit as
Page 113
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
I =0
SOL 1.2.21
Correct answer is 2.
We analyze the given circuit in following steps.
Step 1: Assume that Zener diode is OFF, and draw the equivalent circuit as
Zener diode is ON
V > Vz
Zener diode is OFF
V < Vz
Checking the given circuit for the conditions, we have
V > vz
i.e. zener diode is ON and work as a voltage regulation.
Step 3: For the obtained result, we draw the equivalent circuit as
Correct answer is 0.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the two diodes are operating, and then obtain the
output.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 114
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
Current, I =
.
w
w
5 - ^- 8h
= 6.5 mA
2k
SOL 1.2.23
ID = 0
For RL min the load current will be maximum. Since, by applying KCL at
Node A, we have
So, for IL max
or
or
Thus,
IS
the value of Iz
Iz min
VS - Vz
R
Vz
RL min
RL min
= IL + Iz
has to be minimum, i.e.
= 0 mA
= 0 + IL max
= 20 - 5
5k
= 5 = 1.66 kW
3m
Vz
:Put IL,max = RL min D
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 115
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.2.25
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 116
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.2.26
So,
SOL 1.2.27
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
V - Vo
;a Idc = m
E
R
w
SOL 1.2.28
Correct answer is 0.
For the given circuit, we first determine the linear region (forward bias or
reverse bias) in which the diodes are operating, and then obtain the output.
Step 1: Assume that the diodes are OFF, and replace it by open circuit. So,
equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
diode is ON
diode is OFF
v p < vn
Checking the given circuit for these conditions, we conclude that the
diodes D1 and D2 will be ON.
Step 3: For the obtained result, we get the equivalent circuit as
Page 117
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
From the circuit, we obtain
ID2 =
15 - ^- 10h
= 1.66 mA
5k + 10k
Vpn2 1 0
i.e. D2 will be OFF due to D1 ON (assumption is incorrect).
Step 5: Therefore, the total current from 15 V supply will go through diode
D1 and no current flow through diode D2 , i.e.
ID2 = 0
Step 6: Thus, the actual equivalent circuit is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 118
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
Step 2: For the equivalent circuit, we may conclude that the applied voltage
forward biases the diodes. So, both the diodes are operating in ON
state. So equivalent Circuit is
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
0.7 = 0.11 mA
6.6 kW
I 3 = VB - 0
R2
= 18.6 - 0 = 1.66 mA
11.2k
Step 4: Again, applying KCL at node VB ,
I2 =
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.2.30
I 3 = ID2 + I2
1.66 m = ID2 + 0.11 mA
ID2 = 1.55 mA
...(1)
...(2)
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
We have
DC bias current,
ID = 1 mA
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
rd = VT = 26m = 26 W
1m
ID
By ac analysis, we get small change in current as
TID = TVD = 1m = 38.4 mA
26
rd
Small signal resistance,
SOL 1.2.31
Page 119
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
Vrip =
or
Vrip
SOL 1.2.32
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.2.33
Diode Circuits
o
.c
i. n
...(1)
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Im =
Vm
RS + R f + R L
...(2)
Where
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 121
Chap 1
2
dc
Given that,
...(3)
Diode Circuits
2 VS ^rms h
= 2 # 20 = 28.28 V
Substituting these values in equation (3), we get
2
Pdc = ; 2 # 28.28 E # 50
3.14 ^5 + 2 + 50h
= 4.98 watt
SOL 1.2.34
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
L
= 2Vm = 18.01 V
p
2Vm RL
p ^RS + R f + RL h
= 2 # 28.28 # 50
3.14 ^5 + 2 + 50h
= 15.80 V
Thus, the percentage load regulation is
% Load regulation = VNL - VFL # 100 %
VFL
= 18.01 - 15.80 # 100 = 14 %
15.80
VFL = Idc RL =
SOL 1.2.35
I m2
2 ^RS + R f + RL h
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 122
Chap 1
4 I2 R
2 m L
p
h =
I m2
2 ^RS + R f + RL h
Diode Circuits
RL
= 82
p ^RS + R f + RL h
50
= 82
p 5 + 2 + 50
= 0.711
SOL 1.2.36
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
.
w
w
o
n
V1
VD2
ID2 = IS 2 e hV = IS 2 e hV
T
...(1)
VD1 = V1 - V
So, the current through diode D1 is
V1 - V
...(2)
ID1 = IS1 e hV
Now, the reverse saturation current is directly proportional to junction area,
i.e.
T
IS \ A
where A denotes the junction area. Since, D1 has 10 times the junction area
of D2 . So, we get
IS1 = 10
IS2
Applying KCL at node V1 ,
I 1 = I D1 + I D2
or
10m = ID2 + 2m
or
ID2 = 8 mA
Dividing equation (2) by (1), we have
V1 - V
ID1 = IS1 e V
V
I D2
IS2 eV
T
1
or
Thus,
2m = 10e-VV
8m
V = VT ln ^40h
= 92.22 mV
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 123
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.2.39
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
= 0.33
o
n
.
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.3
Page 125
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.3.1
SOL 1.3.2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.3.3
SOL 1.3.4
SOL 1.3.5
SOL 1.3.7
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 2 # 50 # 100%
50
Diode Circuits
= 200%
Option (C) is correct.
A voltage multiplier circuit is shown in figure
SOL 1.3.8
SOL 1.3.9
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Vo = 10 V
SOL 1.3.10
Zener diode can work in the breakdown region without getting damaged. So
a Zener diode is always used in Reverse biased.
SOL 1.3.11
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 127
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.3.13
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.3.15
I = Io ^eV/hV - 1h
where
Io = reverse saturation current
V = voltage across diode
VT = temperature equivalent voltage
= KT
q
Option (A) is correct.
The transformer utilization factor (TUF) is defined as,
dc power delivered to the load
TUF =
ac rating of the transformer secondary
= Pdc
Rac rated
Option (A) is correct.
Peak inverse voltage (PIV) of an half wave rectifier is Vm .
PIV of an full wave rectifier with centre tapped is 2Vm .
T
SOL 1.3.16
SOL 1.3.17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.3.18
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.3.19
SOL 1.3.20
SOL 1.3.21
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
KCL at node A
IS = I L + I z
For maximum load current,
IS^maxh = IL^minh + Iz^minh
Vi^maxh - Vz
= IL^maxh + 0.5m
RS
IL^maxh = 30 - 5.8 - 0.5m
1000
= 24.2m - 0.5m = 23.7 mAmp
SOL 1.3.22
SOL 1.3.23
At no load, RL = 3
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 129
Chap 1
Diode Circuits
So,
SOL 1.3.25
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V2 = 6 - 0.6
= 5.4 V
V1 = 6 V
This is a clamper circuit and the diode is in downward direction the total
signal will be clamp below the reference voltage.
SOL 1.3.26
SOL 1.3.27
SOL 1.3.28
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.3.29
Diode Circuits
SOL 1.3.30
SOL 1.3.31
SOL 1.3.32
SOL 1.3.33
SOL 1.3.34
SOL 1.3.35
SOL 1.3.36
Vm = 20 2 V
Vdc = Vm
p
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
= 20 2
p
=9V
o
n
.
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Eighth Edition
GATE
Communication Systems
Vol 9 of 10
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 490.00
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GATE Electronics & Communications:
Random signals and noise: probability, random variables, probability density function, autocorrelation, power spectral density. Analog
communication systems: amplitude and angle modulation and demodulation systems, spectral analysis of these operations, superheterodyne
receivers; elements of hardware, realizations of analog communication systems; signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) calculations for amplitude
modulation (AM) and frequency modulation (FM) for low noise conditions. Fundamentals of information theory and channel capacity
theorem. Digital communication systems: pulse code modulation (PCM), differential pulse code modulation (DPCM), digital modulation
schemes: amplitude, phase and frequency shift keying schemes (ASK, PSK, FSK), matched filter receivers, bandwidth consideration and
probability of error calculations for these schemes. Basics of TDMA, FDMA and CDMA and GSM.
GATE Instrumentation
Signals, Systems and Communications: Periodic and aperiodic signals. Impulse response, transfer function and frequency response of firstand second order systems. Convolution, correlation and characteristics of linear time invariant systems. Discrete time system, impulse
and frequency response. Pulse transfer function. IIR and FIR filters. Amplitude and frequency modulation and demodulation. Sampling
theorem, pulse code modulation. Frequency and time division multiplexing. Amplitude shift keying, frequency shift keying and pulse shift
keying for digital modulation.
IES Electrical
Communication Systems Types of modulation; AM, FM and PM. Demodulators. Noise and bandwidth
considerations. Digital communication systems. Pulse code modulation and demodulation. Elements of sound
and vision broadcasting. Carrier communication. Frequency division and time division multiplexing, Telemetry
system in power engineering.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
RANDOM VARIABLE
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.2
PROBABILITY
1.3
1.2.1
Joint Probability
1.2.2
Conditional Probability
1.2.3
Statistical Independence
RANDOM VARIABLE
2
2
2
1.3.1
1.3.2
2
3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.6.1
1.6.2
Moments
1.6.3
Variance
1.6.4
Standard Deviation
1.6.5
Characteristic Function
1.6.6
Joint Moments
1.6.7
Covariance
1.6.8
Correlation Coefficient
4
5
6
6
6
7
1.7.1
Binomial Distribution
1.7.2
Poisson Distribution
1.7.3
Gaussian Distribution
1.7.4
Rayleigh Distribution
10
EXERCISE 1.1
11
EXERCISE 1.2
26
EXERCISE 1.3
33
SOLUTIONS 1.1
34
SOLUTIONS 1.2
61
SOLUTIONS 1.3
81
CHAPTER 2
RANDOM PROCESS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
82
2.2
RANDOM PROCESS
82
2.3
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3.1
83
84
83
2.3.2
2.3.3
Autocorrelation function
84
2.3.4
Cross-Correlation Function
85
2.3.5
Autocovariance Function
85
2.4
ERGODIC PROCESS
2.5
2.6
85
86
87
2.6.1
Wiener-Khintchine Theorem
2.6.2
2.6.3
88
2.7
88
2.8
LINEAR SYSTEM
EXERCISE 2.1
90
EXERCISE 2.2
100
EXERCISE 2.3
106
SOLUTIONS 2.1
107
SOLUTIONS 2.2
128
SOLUTIONS 2.3
148
CHAPTER 3
87
87
89
NOISE
3.1
INTRODUCTION
3.2
149
3.2.1
External Noise
149
3.2.2
Internal Noise
149
3.2.3
3.3
3.4
151
152
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
Noise Temperature
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.5
WHITE NOISE
3.6
NARROWBAND NOISE
3.7
84
152
153
156
156
3.6.1
3.6.2
NOISE BANDWIDTH
EXERCISE 3.1
159
EXERCISE 3.2
168
EXERCISE 3.3
174
SOLUTIONS 3.1
177
SOLUTIONS 3.2
193
SOLUTIONS 3.3
211
CHAPTER 4
155
157
158
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
156
154
4.1
INTRODUCTION
213
4.2
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
213
4.2.1
Envelope of AM Wave
214
4.2.2
Percentage of Modulation
214
4.2.3
Modulation Index
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
Modulation Efficiency
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
215
216
216
217
219
219
220
220
221
4.4
DSB-SC AM SIGNAL
221
222
222
4.3.1
222
4.3.2
222
4.3.3
223
4.3.4
4.3.5
SSB-SC AM SIGNAL
223
224
224
4.4.1
225
4.4.2
225
4.5
VESTIGIAL-SIDEBAND AM SIGNAL
4.6
NOISE IN AM SYSTEM
226
227
4.6.1
227
4.6.2
228
4.6.3
EXERCISE 4.1
230
EXERCISE 4.2
242
EXERCISE 4.3
248
SOLUTIONS 4.1
253
SOLUTIONS 4.2
279
SOLUTIONS 4.3
296
CHAPTER 5
228
ANGLE MODULATION
5.1
INTRODUCTION
299
5.2
ANGLE MODULATION
5.3
300
5.3.1
300
5.3.2
299
300
5.4
MODULATION INDEX
300
5.5
301
5.5.1
Deviation Ratio
302
5.5.2
302
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.7.1
Narrowband FM
303
5.7.2
Wideband FM
303
5.7.3
SUPERHETERODYNE RECEIVER
EXERCISE 5.1
306
EXERCISE 5.2
318
EXERCISE 5.3
324
SOLUTIONS 5.1
329
SOLUTIONS 5.2
352
SOLUTIONS 5.3
368
CHAPTER 6
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
INTRODUCTION
6.2
SAMPLING PROCESS
371
6.2.1
Sampling Theorem
372
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
Nyquist Interval
6.4
6.5
371
372
372
6.3.1
373
6.3.2
373
374
6.4.1
374
6.4.2
375
6.5.1
Sampling
376
6.5.2
Quantization
376
6.5.3
Encoding
6.7
378
378
6.7.1
Quantization Noise
6.7.2
6.7.3
Channel Noise
6.7.4
Companding 380
378
379
380
6.8
6.9
DELTA MODULATION
6.9.1
374
377
6.6
6.10
303
305
6.1
6.3
303
380
381
MULTILEVEL SIGNALING
381
383
383
383
MULTIPLEXING
384
383
383
384
386
EXERCISE 6.2
395
EXERCISE 6.3
401
SOLUTIONS 6.1
407
SOLUTIONS 6.2
427
SOLUTIONS 6.3
446
CHAPTER 7
7.1
INTRODUCTION
449
7.2
INFORMATION
449
7.3
ENTROPY
7.4
INFORMATION RATE
7.5
SOURCE CODING
7.6
450
450
451
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
Coding Efficiency
7.5.4
7.6.1
452
7.7
SHANNON-FANO CODING
7.8
HUFFMAN CODING
7.9
7.10
452
452
Prefix coding
451
452
453
453
454
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.9.3
Mutual Information
455
7.9.4
Channel Capacity
455
7.9.5
Channel Efficiency
455
EXERCISE 7.1
457
EXERCISE 7.2
466
EXERCISE 7.3
471
SOLUTIONS 7.1
473
SOLUTIONS 7.2
491
SOLUTIONS 7.3
507
CHAPTER 8
454
456
8.1
INTRODUCTION
509
8.2
509
8.3
510
8.4
510
8.4.1
510
8.4.2
512
8.4.3
512
454
8.5
8.6
513
8.5.1
513
8.5.2
514
514
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
516
517
8.7
8.8
8.8.1
EXERCISE 8.1
520
EXERCISE 8.2
527
EXERCISE 8.3
531
SOLUTIONS 8.1
534
SOLUTIONS 8.2
548
SOLUTIONS 8.3
559
CHAPTER 9
SPREAD SPECTRUM
9.1
INTRODUCTION
9.2
9.2.1
9.3
9.4
9.5
561
561
562
562
9.3.1
562
9.3.2
562
9.3.3
563
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
Jamming Margin
9.5.2
564
9.6
565
9.7
565
EXERCISE 9.2
572
EXERCISE 9.3
576
SOLUTIONS 9.1
578
SOLUTIONS 9.2
587
SOLUTIONS 9.3
597
563
564
9.5.1
EXERCISE 9.1
563
563
9.7.1
562
564
565
518
515
CHAPTER 6
Page 371
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
6.1
INTRODUCTION
6.2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SAMPLING PROCESS
The sampling process is usually described in the time domain. In this process,
an analog signal is converted into a corresponding sequence of samples that
are usually spaced uniformly in time. Consider an arbitrary signal x ^ t h of
finite energy, which is specified for all time as shown in figure 6.1(a).
Suppose that we sample the signal x ^ t h instantaneously and at a uniform
rate, once every Ts seconds, as shown in figure 6.1(b). Consequently, we
obtain an infinite sequence of samples spaced Ts seconds apart and denoted
by "x ^nTs h, , where n takes on all possible integer values.
Thus, we define the following terms:
1.
2.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
Figure 6.1: Illustration of Sampling Process: (a) Message Signal, (b) Sampled Signal
6.2.1
o
.c
Sampling Theorem
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
6.2.2
6.2.3
Nyquist Rate
Nyquist rate is defined as the minimum sampling frequency allowed to
reconstruct a bandlimited waveform without error, i.e.
fN = min " fs , = 2W
where W is the message signal bandwidth, and fs is the sampling frequency.
6.2.4
Nyquist Interval
The reciprocal of Nyquist rate is called the Nyquist interval (measured in
seconds), i.e.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
TN = 1 = 1
2W
fN
where fN is the Nyquist rate, and W is the message signal bandwidth.
6.3
Page 373
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
PULSE MODULATION
6.3.1
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
6.3.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 374
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
6.4
6.4.1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Figure 6.3: Illustration of Nautural Sampling Pulse Amplitude Modulation: (a) Message
Signal, (b) Pulse Waveform, (c) Resulting PAM Signal
6.4.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ m^kT hh^t - kT h
3
k =- 3
Page 375
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Figure 6.3: Illustration of Flat-top Sampling Pulse Amplitude Modulation: (a) Message
Signal, (b) Sampling Pulse, (c) Resulting PAM Signal
POINT TO REMEMBER
6.5
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.5.1
Sampling
The incoming message signal m ^ t h is sampled with a train of narrow
rectangular pulses so as to closely approximate the instantaneous sampling
process. To ensure perfect reconstruction of the message signal at the
receiver, the sampling rate must be greater than twice the highest frequency
component W of the message signal in accordance with the sampling
theorem. The resulting sampled waveform m ^kTs h is discrete in time.
Digital Transmission
APPLICATION OF SAMPLING
6.5.2
Quantization
A quantizer rounds off the sample values to the nearest discrete value in
a set of q quantum levels. The resulting quantized samples mq ^kTs h are
discrete in time (by virtue of sampling) and discrete in amplitude (by virtue
of quantizing). Basically, quantizers can be of a uniform or nonuniform type.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Uniform Quantizer
A quantizer is called as a uniform quantizer if the step size remains constant
throughout the input range. To display the relationship between m ^kTs h and
mq ^kTs h, let the analog message be a voltage waveform normalized such that
m ^ t h # 1 V . Uniform quantization subdivides the 2 V peak-to-peak range
into q equal steps of height 2/q , as shown in Figure 6.6. The quantum levels
are then taken to be at ! 1/q , ! 3/q ,..., !^q - 1h /q in the usual case when
q is an even integer. A quantized value such as mq ^kTs h = 5/q corresponds
to any sample value in the range 4/q < x ^xTs h < 6/q .
Nonuniform Quantizer
Nonuniform quantization is required to be implemented to improve the signal
to quantization noise ratio of weak signals. It is equivalent to passing the
baseband signal through a compressor and then applying the compressed
signal to a uniform quantizer. A particular form of compression law that is
used in practice is the so called m-law, which is defined by
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
ln `1 + m m j
ln ^1 + mh
where m and mq are the normalized input and output voltages, and m is a
positive constant.
mq =
6.5.3
Page 377
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
Encoding
An encoder translates the quantized samples into digital code words. The
encoder works with M -ary digits and produces for each sample a code
word consisting of n digits in parallel. Since, there are M n possible M
-ary codewords with n digits per word, unique encoding of the q different
quantum levels requires that
Mn $ q
The parameters M , n , and q should be chosen to satisfy the equality, so
that
q = M n or n = log M q
Encoding in Binary PCM
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
For binary PCM, each digit may be either of two distinct values 0 or 1, i.e.
M =2
If the code word of binary PCM consists of n digits, then number of
quantization levels is defined as
q = 2n
or
n = log 2 q
In general, we must remember the following characteristics of a PCM system:
CHARACTERISTICS OF PCM SYSTEM
q = 2n
4. If the message signal is sampled at the sampling rate fs , and encoded
to n number of bits per sample; then the bit rate (bits/sec) of the
PCM is defined as
Rb = nfs
METHODOLOGY 1 : TO EVALUATE BIT RATE FOR PCM SYSTEM
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Step 2: Deduce the number of bits per sample using the expression
n = log 2 q
Step 3: Evaluate bit rate (bits/sec) for the PCM system by substituting
the obtained values in the expression
Digital Transmission
Rb = nfs
6.6
The bandwidth of (serial) binary PCM waveforms depends on the bit rate
and the waveform pulse shape used to represent the data. The dimensionality
theorem shows that the bandwidth of the binary encoded PCM waveform
is bounded by
BPCM $ 1 Rb = 1 nfs
2
2
where Rb is the bit rate, n is the number of bits in PCM word, and fs is the
sampling rate. Since, the required sampling rate for no aliasing is
i. n
fs $ 2W
where W is the bandwidth of the message signal (that is to be converted to
the PCM signal). Thus, the bandwidth of the PCM signal has a lower bound
given by
BPCM $ nW
o
.c
a
i
d
POINT TO REMEMBER
o
n
.
w
w
6.7
6.7.1
Quantization Noise
For a PCM system, the k th sample of quantized message signal is represented
by
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
For a PCM system, consider the message signal having frequency fm and
peak to peak amplitude 2m p . If the accuracy of the PCM system is given
as ! x % of full scale value, then the bit rate is obtained in the following
steps:
Step 1 : Obtain the sampling frequency for the PCM signal. According
to Nyquist criterion, the minimum sampling frequency is given
by
Page 379
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
fs = 2fm
Step 2 : Obtain the maximum quantization error for the PCM system
using the expression
2m p
m
m
error = d =
= p = np
2
2q
q
2
Step 3 : Apply the given condition of accuracy as
error # x % of full scale value
Step 4 : Solve the above condition for the minimum value of number of
bits per second ^n h.
Step 5 : Obtain the bit rate by substituting the approximated integer
value of n in the expression
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Rb = nfs
6.7.2
For PCM system, we have the message signal m ^ t h, and quantization error
e. So, we define the signal to quantization noise ratio as
m2 ^ t h m2 ^ t h
...(6.2)
= 2
d /12
e2
where d is the step size of the quantized signal defined as
2m p
...(6.3)
d =
q
Substituting equation (6.3) in equation (6.2), we get the expression for signal
to quantization noise ratio as
^SNRhQ =
^SNRhQ = 12
m2 ^ t h
^2m p /q h2
m2 ^ t h
...(6.4)
m p2
where m p is the peak amplitude of message signal m ^ t h, and q is the number
of quantization level. Let us obtain the more generalized form of SNR for
the following two cases:
^SNRhQ = 3q 2
Case I :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
^SNRhQ = 3q 2
Digital Transmission
1/2
3q 2
=
2
^1 h2
Case II :
Case III:
For any arbitrary message signal m ^ t h, the peak signal to quantization noise
ratio is defined as
m2
^SNRhpeak = 3q 2 p2 = 3q 2
mp
6.7.3
Channel Noise
i. n
If a PCM signal is composed of the data that are transmitted over the
channel having bit error rate Pe , then peak signal to average quantization
noise ratio is defined as
3q 2
^SNRhpeak =
1 + 4 ^q 2 - 1h Pe
Similarly, for the channel with bit error probability Pe , the average
signal to average quantization noise ratio is defined as
q2
^SNRhave =
1 + 4 ^q 2 - 1h Pe
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
POINT TO REMEMBER
w
6.7.4
If the additive noise in the channel is so small that errors can be neglected,
quantization is the only error source in PCM system.
Companding
Companding is nonuniform quantization. It is required to be implemented
to improve the signal to quantization noise ratio of weak signals. The signal
to quantization noise ratio for m-law companding is approximated as
3q 2
^SNRhQ =
6ln ^1 + mh@2
where q is the number of quantization level, and m is a positive constant.
6.8
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
4.
Page 381
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
POINT TO REMEMBER
6.9
DELTA MODULATION
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
6.9.1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
POINT TO REMEMBER
Granular noise occurs for any step size but is smaller for a small step
size. Thus we would like to have d as small as possible to minimize the
granular noise.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 383
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
6.10.1 Baud
Let a multilevel signaling scheme having the symbol duration Ts seconds. So,
we define the symbols per second transmitted for the system as
D = 1
Ts
where D is the symbol rate which is also called baud.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
For a multilevel signaling scheme, the bit rate and baud (symbols per second)
are related as
...(6.5)
Rb = kD = D log 2 M
where Rb is the bit rate, k = log 2 M is the bits per symbol, and D is the
baud (symbols per second).
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 384
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
6.11 MULTIPLEXING
i. n
o
.c
B =
/W
a
i
d
i
i=1
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Figure 6.8: (a) Time Division Multiplexing System, (b) Resulting Baseband Signal
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
/W
i=1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.1
Page 386
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.1
MCQ 6.1.2
MCQ 6.1.3
MCQ 6.1.4
(B) 75 kHz
(D) 300 kHz
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.5
i. n
MCQ 6.1.6
x (t) would be recovered from the product x (t) c (t) by using an ideal LPF if
X (jw) = 0 for
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 387
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.7
If X (jw) satisfies the constrains required, then the pass band gain A of the
ideal lowpass filter needed to recover x (t) from c (t) x (t) is
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 8
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.9
MCQ 6.1.10
MCQ 6.1.12
MCQ 6.1.13
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.14
MCQ 6.1.15
It was found that a sampling rate 20% above the rate would be adequate. So
the maximum SNR, that can be realized without increasing the transmission
bandwidth, would be
(A) 64.4 dB
(B) 70.3 dB
(C) 50.1 dB
(D) None of the above
MCQ 6.1.16
MCQ 6.1.17
fm
(A)
0.3 V
(B)
1.5 V
(C)
1.5 V
(D)
3.0 V
o
.c
8 kHz
ia
d
o
i. n
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.18
A 1.0 kHz signal is flat-top sampled at the rate of 1800 samples/sec and the
samples are applied to an ideal rectangular LPF with cut-off frequency of
1100 Hz. The output of the filter contains
(A) only 800 Hz component
(B) 800 and 900 Hz component
(C) 800 Hz and 1000 Hz components
(D) 800 Hz, 900 and 1000 Hz components
MCQ 6.1.19
A signal x (t) = 100 cos (24p # 103) t is ideally sampled with a sampling
period of 50 m sec and then passed through an ideal lowpass filter with
cutoff frequency of 15 kHz. Which of the following frequencies is/are present
at the filter output
(A) 12 kHz only
(B) 8 kHz only
(C) 12 kHz and 9 kHz
(D) 12 kHz and 8 kHz
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.21
Page 389
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.22
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(C) 2
MCQ 6.1.23
(D) 4
MCQ 6.1.25
PROBLEM
SOLVER/597
/11.6
MCQ 6.1.26
PROBLEM
SOLVER/597
/11.6
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.27
PROBLEM
SOLVER/597
/11.6
MCQ 6.1.28
PROBLEM
SOLVER/597
/11.6
MCQ 6.1.29
PROBLEM
SOLVER/626
/12.2
MCQ 6.1.30
PROBLEM
SOLVER/626
/12.2
MCQ 6.1.31
PROBLEM
SOLVER/626
/12.2
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(B) 0.4908
(D) 0.5093
If the probability density function is not constant over each level, what will
be the variance of the quantization error ?
(A) 0.1869
(B) 0.5093
(C) 0.7341
(D) 0.3739
MCQ 6.1.32
CARTOON/255
/6.1.20
MCQ 6.1.33
COUCH/250
/3.7
fN 2
(A)
100
200
(B)
200
100
(C)
50
100
(D)
100
50
In a binary system, the quantizing noise is not to exceed ! x % of the peakto-peak analog level. The minimum number of bits in each PCM words
needs to be
(A) x/50
(B) 50/x
(C) log 2 b 50 l
(D) log 2 a x k
x
50
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.35
COUCH/250
/3.8
MCQ 6.1.36
COUCH/250
/3.9
Page 391
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.38
COUCH/250
/3.10
If there is no bit error and no inter symbol interferrence, what will be the
number of quantizing steps needed ?
(A) 512
(B) 9
(C) 4
(D) 256
What will be the channel bandwidth required if rectangular pulse shapes
are used ?
(A) 75.6 MHz
(B) 8.4 MHz
(C) 933.3 kHz
(D) 17.4 MHz
MCQ 6.1.40
COUCH/250
/3.11 (A,B)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.41
COUCH/251
/3.14 (A,B)
MCQ 6.1.42
COUCH/251
/3.14 (A,B)
MCQ 6.1.44
COUCH/251
/3.19
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.1.45
COUCH/251
/3.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.48
COUCH/253
/3.34
Page 393
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.50
COUCH/253
/3.35(A,B)
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.52
COUCH/254
/3.45
What is the maximum PCM bit rate that can be supported by this system
without introducing ISI (intersymbol interference) ?
(A) 5.33 k bits/sec
(B) 8 k bits/sec
(C) 12 k bits/sec
(D) 16 k bits/sec
The maximum bandwidth that can be permitted for the analog signal is
(A) 666 Hz
(B) 2.22 kHz
(C) 333 Hz
(D) 1.33 kHz
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.1.53
COUCH/255
/3.47
MCQ 6.1.54
COUCH/255
/3.47
MCQ 6.1.56
COUCH/255
/3.50
MCQ 6.1.57
COUCH/255
/3.50
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
If the receiver input is band limited to 200 kHz, what is the average signal
quantizing noise power ratio ?
(A) 11.8 dB
(B) 1.18 dB
(C) 14.8 dB
(D) 1.48 dB
MCQ 6.1.58
ZEIMER/192
/3.59
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.2
Page 395
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
QUES 6.2.1
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
If the period Ts of c (t) is chosen that have the maximum allowable value, the
largest value of 3 would be _______ ms .
QUES 6.2.2
A compact disc recording system samples a signal with a 16-bit analog-todigital convertor at 44.1 kHz. The CD can record an hour worth of music.
The approximate capacity of CD is _______ Mbytes.
QUES 6.2.3
An analog signal is sampled at 36 kHz and quantized into 256 levels. The
time duration of a bit of the binary coded signal is _______ ms .
QUES 6.2.4
QUES 6.2.5
A Television signal is sampled at a rate of 20% above the Nyquist rate. The
signal has a bandwidth of 6 MHz. The samples are quantized into 1024
levels. The minimum bandwidth required to transmit this signal would be
_______ Mbps.
QUES 6.2.6
A CD record audio signals digitally using PCM. The audio signal bandwidth
is 15 kHz. The Nyquist samples are quantized into 32678 levels and then
binary coded. What is the minimum bit rate (in kbps) required to encode
the audio signal ?
QUES 6.2.7
The American Standard Code for information interchange has 128 characters,
which are binary coded. If a certain computer generates 1,000,000 character
per second, the minimum bandwidth required to transmit this signal will be
_______ Mbps.
QUES 6.2.8
Figure given below shows a PCM signal in which amplitude level of + 1 volt
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 396
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
QUES 6.2.9
A PCM system uses a uniform quantizer followed by a 8-bit encoder. The bit
rate of the system is equal to 108 bits/s. The maximum message bandwidth
for which the system operates satisfactorily is _______ MHz.
QUES 6.2.10
i. n
QUES 6.2.11
QUES 6.2.12
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 6.2.13
For a PCM signal the compression parameter m = 100 and the minimum
signal to quantization-noise ratio is 50 dB. The number of bits per sample
would be _______
QUES 6.2.14
QUES 6.2.15
QUES 6.2.16
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The Nyquist sampling interval, for the signal sin c (700t) + sin c (500t) is
_______ second.
Page 397
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
QUES 6.2.18
In a PCM system, if the code word length is increased form 6 to 8 bits, then
by what factor signal to quantization noise ratio improves ?
QUES 6.2.19
Four signals g1 (t), g2 (t), g 3 (t) and g 4 (t) are to be time division multiplexed
and transmitted. g1 (t) and g 4 (t) have a bandwidth of 4 kHz, and the
remaining two signals have bandwidth of 8 kHz. Each sample requires 8
bits for encoding. What is the minimum transmission bit rate (kbps) of the
system ?
QUES 6.2.20
Three analog signals, having bandwidths 1200 Hz, 600 Hz and 600 Hz, are
sampled at their respective Nyquist rates, encoded with 12 bit words, and
time division multiplexed. What is the bit rate (in kbps) for the multiplexed
signal ?
QUES 6.2.21
Four signals each band limited to 5 kHz are sampled at twice the Nyquist
rate. The resulting PAM samples are transmitted over a single channel
after time division multiplexing. The theoretical minimum transmission
bandwidth of the channel should be equal to _______ kHz.
QUES 6.2.22
Four independent messages have bandwidths of 100 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz
and 400 Hz respectively. Each is sampled at the Nyquist rate, time division
multiplexed and transmitted. The transmitted sample rate in Hz, is given
by _______
QUES 6.2.23
The Nyquist sampling rate for the signal g (t) = 10 cos (50pt) cos2 (150pt)
where 't ' is in seconds, is _______ samples per second.
QUES 6.2.24
A TDM link has 20 signal channels and each channel is sampled 8000
times/sec. Each sample is represented by seven binary bits and contains an
additional bit for synchronization. The total bit rate for the TDM link is
_______ kbps.
QUES 6.2.25
The Nyquist sampling interval for the signal s (t) = sin c (350t) + sin c (250t)
is _______ second.
QUES 6.2.26
In a CD player, the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz and the samples are quantized
using a 16-bit/sample quantizer. The resulting number of Mega-bits for a
piece of music with a duration of 50 minutes is _______
QUES 6.2.27
Four voice signals, each limited to 4 kHz and sampled at Nyquist rate are
converted into binary PCM signal using 256 quantization levels. The bit
transmission rate for the time-division multiplexed signal will be _______
kbps.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 6.2.28
QUES 6.2.29
QUES 6.2.30
QUES 6.2.31
Digital Transmission
PROBLEM
SOLVER/643
/12.13
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 6.2.32
PROBLEM
SOLVER/644
/12.14
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 6.2.36
FRENZEL/222
/7.2
QUES 6.2.37
FRENZEL/233
/7.4
QUES 6.2.38
COUCH/251
/3.20(A)
QUES 6.2.39
COUCH/254
/3.46
QUES 6.2.40
COUCH/255
/3.48(A)
What is the maximum bit duration (in ms ) for the transmitted signal ?
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ZEIMER/192
/3.56
QUES 6.2.42
QUES 6.2.41
ZEIMER/192
/3.58
Page 399
Chap 6
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 6.2.43
KENNELY/107
/5.2
QUES 6.2.44
GLOVER/171
/5.1
If the signal is sampled at 90% of its Nyquist rate and reconstruction filter
has an ideal rectangular amplitude response, what will be signal to distortion
ratio in decibel ?
i. n
o
.c
***********
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.3
Page 401
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.3.1
MCQ 6.3.2
The smallest increment of voltage that the D/A converter produces over its
output range is called the
(A) step
(B) resolution
(C) pixel
(D) bit
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.3.3
MCQ 6.3.4
In what type of multiplexing does each signal occupy the entire bandwidth
of the channel?
(A) frequency-division multiplexing
(B) time-division multiplexing
(C) pulse-width multiplexing
(D) phase-shift multiplexing
MCQ 6.3.5
MCQ 6.3.6
MCQ 6.3.7
R.P. SINGH
/406/3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 402
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.3.8
R.P. SINGH
/406/4
MCQ 6.3.9
R.P. SINGH
/406/5
MCQ 6.3.10
R.P. SINGH
/406/8
MCQ 6.3.11
R.P. SINGH
/428/1
MCQ 6.3.12
R.P. SINGH
/428/2
MCQ 6.3.13
R.P. SINGH
/428/3
MCQ 6.3.14
R.P. SINGH
/428/5
(B) aliasing
(D) none
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(B) PWM
(D) none of the above
MCQ 6.3.15
R.P. SINGH
/428/6
MCQ 6.3.16
R.P. SINGH
/428/8
MCQ 6.3.17
R.P. SINGH
/428/9
MCQ 6.3.18
R.P. SINGH
/428/10
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.3.20
G.KENNEDY
/114/4
MCQ 6.3.21
G.KENNEDY
/114/5
MCQ 6.3.22
G.KENNEDY
/114/6
MCQ 6.3.23
G.KENNEDY
/114/7
MCQ 6.3.24
G.KENNEDY
/114/8
MCQ 6.3.25
A. YADAV
/281/1
Page 403
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 404
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.3.26
A. YADAV
/281/4
MCQ 6.3.27
A. YADAV
/313/1
MCQ 6.3.28
A. YADAV
/313/13
MCQ 6.3.29
A. K. GAUTAM
/157/1
MCQ 6.3.30
A. K. GAUTAM
/158/5
(B) PCM
(D) None of the above
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.3.31
A. K. GAUTAM
/158/9
MCQ 6.3.32
A. K. GAUTAM
/158/11
MCQ 6.3.33
A. K. GAUTAM
/158/13
MCQ 6.3.34
A. K. GAUTAM
/158/14
A. K. GAUTAM
MCQ
6.3.35
/159/15
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.3.37
UPENA DALAL
2/75/1
MCQ 6.3.38
UPENA DALAL
2/75/12
MCQ 6.3.39
UPENA DALAL
3/142/3
MCQ 6.3.40
UPENA DALAL
3/142/4
MCQ 6.3.41
UPENA DALAL
3/142/5
MCQ 6.3.42
UPENA DALAL
3/142/6
MCQ 6.3.43
UPENA DALAL
3/142/8
MCQ 6.3.44
UPENA DALAL
3/143/9
Page 405
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 406
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
MCQ 6.3.45
UPENA DALAL
3/143/11
MCQ 6.3.46
UPENA DALAL
3/143/12
MCQ 6.3.47
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.1
Page 407
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.1.1
SOL 6.1.2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.1.3
fs = 2fx
= 2 # ^2 # 105h
= 4 # 105 Hz
= 400 kHz
SOL 6.1.4
= 3 # 1.5 # 105
= 4.5 # 105
So, the Nyquist sampling rate of y3 ^ t h is given by
fs = 2fy = 2 # ^4.5 # 105h
3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 9 # 105 Hz
= 900 kHz
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.1.5
= 2 # ^2.5 # 105h
= 5 # 105 Hz
= 500 kHz
SOL 6.1.6
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
fs > 2fx
or
2pfs > 2p ^2fx h
2p # 1000 > 2w
or
w < 1000p
So, the signal X ^ jwh must be defined for the region w < 1000p. Therefore,
we have X ^ jwh = 0 for w > 1000p
o
n
SOL 6.1.7
.
w
w
Ts = 10-3 sec
ON Time duration of pulse train is
3 = 0.25 ms = 0.25 # 10-3 sec
So, the duty cycle of pulse-train is given by
-3
D = 3 = 0.25 #-310 = 0.25
Ts
10
Now, the gain of LPF is A. To recover the signal x ^ t h, the overall gain of
the system must be 1. So, we have
D#A = 1
3A = 1
Ts
A = Ts = 1 = 4
3 0.25
SOL 6.1.8
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 0.2 # m p
100
m
= p
500
Now, the Nyquist sampling rate for each signal is
Page 409
Chap 6
...(1)
Digital Transmission
fN = 2fm = 2 # 2 # 1000
= 4000 Hz
Since, the sampling must be 20% above the Nyquist rate so, we have the
actual sampling rate as
fs = 1.2 # fN = 1.2 # 4000
= 4800 Hz
Again, let the number of quantization level of the sampled signal be q . So,
we have the maximum quantization error in the sampled signal as
2m p
m
q
quantization error =
...(2)
= p
2
q
This error must be less than the maximum tolerable error. So, from equations
(1) and (2), we have
mp
m
# p
q
500
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
or,
q $ 500
or
2n $ 500
where n is the number of bits used to encode the quantized signal. For
satisfying the above condition, the minimum number of bits is n = 9 bits.
Therefore, the bit rate of the sampled signal is given by,
Rb = nfs
= 9 # 4800
= 4.32 # 10 4 bits/sec
since, ten signals are multiplexed, and framing and synchronising requires
an additional 1% extra bits. Therefore, the total data rate is given by
Data rate = 1.01 # 610 # Rb@
= 1.01 # 10 # ^4.32 # 10 4h
= 4.3632 # 105 bits/sec
= 436.32 kbits/sec
SOL 6.1.9
As we can transmit error free at most two peices of information per second per
Hz bandwidth, here we have dividided the data rate by 2 bits (information)
to get the minimum transmission bandwidth.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.10
Digital Transmission
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
7.2n # 36
n#5
or
or
2n # 2 5
or
q # 32
Thus, the appropriate values of quantizing level and sampling frequency are
q = 32 and fs = 7.2 kHz
o
n
SOL 6.1.11
.
w
w
B = 3.5 kHz
the amplitude of test signal, Am = 1 volt
frequency of test signal, fm = 800 Hz
sampling frequency of the system, fs = 64 kHz
So, we have time duration of a sample as
1
Ts =
= 1.56 # 10-5 sec
64 # 103
Let the step size of the delta modulated signal be d . So, the condition to
avoid slope overload is
d $ max dm ^ t h
Ts
dt
d
or
$ Am ^2pfm h
1.56 # 10-5
or,
d $ ^1.56 # 10-5h # 1 # ^2p # 800h
or,
d $ 7.84 # 10-2 volt
Thus, the minimum value of step size to avoid slope overload is
d = 78.5 mV
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 411
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
2
^78.5 # 10-3h # ^3.5 # 103h
3 # ^64 # 103h
= 1.123 # 10-4 watt
SOL 6.1.13
SOL 6.1.14
SOL 6.1.15
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Now signal to be sampled at a rate 20% above the Nyquist rate (adequate
rate). So ,we have the sampling frequency for the second case as
Digital Transmission
i. n
SOL 6.1.16
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Am ^2pfm h # 2.512 # 10 4
or,
Am fm # 2.512 # 10 4 = 3.998 # 103
2p
This is the condition to avoid slope overload.
In the given options, (A), (C) and (D) satisfy this condition, where as option
(B) does not satisfy the condition. Therefore, the slope overload will take
place at
Am = 1.5 V , fm = 4 kHz
SOL 6.1.17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 413
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
m2 ^ t h
SNR q = So = 3q2
mp
No
2
1/2 3 ^2n h2 3 ^28h
= 3q
=
=
1
2
2
2
= 9.83 # 10 4
In decidel, we have
SOL 6.1.18
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
fs $ fN = 2fm
So, for the sampling frequency fs = 1800 Hz , the message signal recovered
has the maximum frequency,
f
fm # s = 1800 = 900 Hz
2
2
Thus, for the applied message signal of bandwidth W = 1 kHz = 1000 Hz ,
the recovered message signals are of the frequency less or equal to 900 Hz.
i.e. the output of the filter contains 800 Hz and 900 Hz components.
SOL 6.1.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 414
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.1.20
fs = 2fm
= 2 # 3000 = 6000 Hz
= 6 # 103 Hz
SOL 6.1.21
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
m ^t h
SNR = So = 3q2
mp
No
where q is the number of quantization levels, m2 ^ t h is the power in the
message signal m ^ t h and m p is the peak amplitude of m ^ t h. Since, the
number of bits in PCM system is increased from n to n + 1, so we have the
number of quantization levels in the two cases as
2
SOL 6.1.23
Page 415
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
q 1 = 2n
q 2 = 2n + 1
Therefore, The factor by which the new SNR increase is given by
^SNRh2 q 22
=
^SNRh1 q 12
2
^2n + 1h
22n = 4
4
=
=
#
22n
^2n h2
Option (C) is correct.
The transmission bandwidth of a channel for PCM system is given by
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
...(1)
BT = Rb = nfs
where Rb is the bit rate, n is the number of bits per sample, and fs is the
sampling frequency. Also, the quantization level are defined as
q = 2n
So, we have
n = log 2 q
Substituting it in equation (1), we have
BT = n log 2 q
So, for change in the quantization level from q1 = 2 to q2 = 8 , the change in
bandwidth is obtained as
n log 2 q1 n log 2 2
BT
\
=
=
BT
n log 2 q2 n log 2 8
1
3BT1 = BT
i.e., the bandwidth requirement will be tripled.
2
SOL 6.1.24
SOL 6.1.25
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 416
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.1.26
SOL 6.1.27
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
al = 1000 dB
Thus, the rms voltage at receiving end is obtained as
20 log 10 a vo k =- 1000 dB
vi
log 10 vo =- 50
vi
vo = vi 10-50 = 1 # 10-50 = 10-50 volt
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.28
SOL 6.1.29
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
2m p = 4 - ^- 4h = 8 volt
Therefore, the step size of each level is
2m p 8
d =
= = 2 volt
q
4
SOL 6.1.30
Page 417
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
#f
3
X^ t h
-3
^x h dx = 1
-4
or
2k e-x dx = 1
or
-x 4
2k :e D = 1
-1 0
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
2k 6- e-4 + 1@ = 1
Thus,
k = 0.5-4 = 0.5093
1-e
Option (D) is correct.
We have the four quantization levels in the range - 4 # X # 4 given by
x1 =- 3 volt
x2 =- 1 volt
x 3 = 1 volt
x 4 = 3 volt
So, for any value between - 2 to - 4 , the quantized value is - 3 . So for any
value x in the range - 2 < x < 4 , the quantization error is
or
SOL 6.1.31
ke- x dx = 1
e ^X h = ^- 3 - x h
Similar discussions can be made for other quantization levels. So, we get the
variance of quantization error is
var 6e ^X h@ =
-2
-4
^- 3 - x h2 ke- x dx +
+
= 2k
#
0
#
0
-2
^- 1 - x h2 ke -x dx
^1 - x h2 ke- x dx +
#
2
^3 - x h2 ke- x dx
^1 - x h2 e-x dx + 2k # ^3 - x h2 e-x dx
4
-x
= 2k 6e-x ^- 1 - x2 + 2x + 2 - 2x - 2h@20
+ 2k 6e-x ^- 9 - x2 + 6x + 6 - 2x - 2h@04
e-4 ^- 5 - 16 + 16h
= 2k 6e-2 ^- 5h - ^- 1h@ + 2k >
H
- e-2 ^- 5 - 4 + 8h
= 2 # 0.5093 61 - 5e-2 + e-2 - 5e-4@
= 0.3739
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.32
Digital Transmission
m1 ^ t h = sin c ^100t h =
sin ^100pt h
100pt
sin2 ^100pt h
m2 ^ t h = sin c ^100t h =
^100pt h2
1 - cos ^200pt h
1
=
E
2;
2
^100pt h
So, we have the corresponding maximum frequency for these signals as
fm1 = 100p = 50 Hz
2p
fm2 = 200p = 100 Hz
2p
Therefore, the corresponding Nyquist rates are obtained as
2
fN = 2fm1 = 2 # 50 Hz = 100 Hz
fN = 2fm2 = 2 # 100 = 200 Hz
1
SOL 6.1.33
i. n
o
.c
q = 2 Levels
A quantized signal with peak-to-peak value 2m p is shown in figure below.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 419
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
fN = 2W = 2 # 100 = 200 Hz
SOL 6.1.35
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
q $ 500
2n $ 500
or
n $ log 2 500 = 8.96
i.e. the minimum number of bits per sample is 8.96. Approximating the
value, we consider
n = 9 bits/samples
Thus, the minimum bit rate for the transmitted signal is
Rb = nfs
= ^9 bits/sampleh # ^200 samples/ sech
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 420
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
= 5 # 8 = 40 k bits/ sec
Converting it into bytes/sec, we have
Rb = 40 k bytes/ sec = 5 k bytes/ sec
8
Since, an 820 Mbyte hard disk is used to store the PCM data, so the duration
of stored voice frequency conversation is
850 Mbyte
T =
5 k bytes/ sec
6
= 850 # 103 sec
5 # 10
= 170 # 103 # 1 minute
60
= 2.833 # 103 minute
= 2833 minute
SOL 6.1.37
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
3q = 10
q =
o
n
5.5
.
w
w
n = 9 bits
Therefore, the required number of quantizing steps is
SOL 6.1.38
q = 2n = 29 = 512
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 421
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
fs = 8fN = 8 # ^2W h
= 8 # ^2 # 20 # 103h
= 320 k samples/ sec
Thus, the null bandwidth of this PCM signal is given by
B null = Rb = nfs
= ^16 bits/sampleh # ^320 k samples/ sech
= 512 MHz
SOL 6.1.40
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
q = 2n - 1 = 216 - 1 = 215
Therefore, the peak SNR for the signal is given by
S
= 3q2
bN l
peak
= 3 ^215h2 = 3 # 230
In decibel, we get
S
= 10 log 10 ^3 # 230h
bN l
peak
= 95.08 dB
SOL 6.1.41
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 422
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
q = 2n = 25 = 32
SOL 6.1.42
SOL 6.1.43
i. n
o
.c
M = 16 levels
So, the number of bits corresponding to each level is obtained as
a
i
d
k = log 2 M = log 2 16
o
n
= 4 bits/level
SOL 6.1.44
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.46
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 423
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
Rb = nfs = 6 # 5.4
= 32.4 k bits/ sec
SOL 6.1.47
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.1.48
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.50
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.1.51
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.1.52
.
w
w
n = log 2 q = log 2 16 = 4
Therefore, the sampling frequency for the signal is given by
fs = Rb
n
3
= 5.33 # 10 = 1.33 kHz
4
Thus, the maximum bandwidth of analog signal is
f
W = s = 1.33 = 0.666 kHz = 666 Hz
2
2
SOL 6.1.53
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 425
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 900 Hz
SOL 6.1.55
SOL 6.1.56
SOL 6.1.57
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 426
Chap 6
Pno = SN ^ f h # 2B
Digital Transmission
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
B = W + W + 2W + 4W + 4W
= 12W
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.2
Page 427
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.2.1
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
10 3 = Ts
-3
3 = Ts = 0.5 # 10 = 5 # 10-5 s = 50 ms
10
10
SOL 6.2.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 428
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
Correct answer is 7.
Given, the tolerable error in sample amplitude = 0.5% of peak-peak full
scale.
Let the analog signal lie in the internal ^- m p, m p h; where m p is the peak
value of the signal. If q levels are used to quantize the signal, then the step
size of each level is
2m p
d =
q
So, the maximum quantization error in the signal is obtained as
2m p m p
...(1)
error = d =
=
2
2q
q
Also, we have the tolerable error in sample amplitude
error = 0.5% of peak-peak full scale
= 0.5 # ^2m p h
100
...(2)
= 0.01 m p
As the maximum quantization error of the signal must be less than the
tolerable error, so from equations (1) and (2), we have
mp
# 0.01 m p
q
or,
q $ 100
Let the minimum number of binary digits required to encode the sample be
n.
Then, we have
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
2n $ 100
The minimum value of n that satisfies the above condition is
w
SOL 6.2.5
n =7
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 10 # ^1.44 # 107h
= 1.44 # 108 bits/sec
= 144 Mbits/sec
Therefore, the maximum transmission bandwidth of the signal is
Page 429
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
BT = Rb = 144 Mbits/sec.
This is the minimum channel bandwidth required to transmit the signal.
NOTE :
The maximum transmission bandwidth is defined for the case when one bit
information is transmitted in a specific instant so, we have the maximum
transmission bandwidth
BT = Rb
SOL 6.2.6
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
fs = 2fm
= 2 # 15 = 30 kHz
Let n number of bits encode each sample, then we have
q = 2n = 32678
or,
n = 15 bits
Therefore, the minimum bit rate for the analog signal is
Rb = nfs
= 15 # 30
= 450 kbits/s
SOL 6.2.7
Correct answer is 7.
Given the rate of generation of characters
Rc = 1, 000, 000 characters/sec
Total number of characters in the American standard code
q = 128 characters
Let the minimum no. of bits required to encode these characters be n .
So, we have
q = 2n = 128
or,
n = 7 bits
So, 7 bits are required to encode each character. Therefore, we have the
minimum bit rate for the signal,
Rb = nRc
= 7 # 1, 000, 000
= 7, 000, 000 bits/second
= 7 Mbits/sec
So, the transmission bandwidth of the signal is
BT = Rb = 7 Mbits/sec.
This is the minimum channel bandwidth required to transmit the signal.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.2.8
Digital Transmission
In the figure, we have put 0 for level of - 1 volt and 1 for level of +1 volt.
Since, the code word used consists of 3 bits, so, we write the words for the
transmitted bits as
1st word " 001 " 1
2nd word " 010 " 2
3rd word " 011 " 3
4th word " 100 " 4
5th word " 101 " 5
Thus, the sampled version of analog signal from which this PCM signal is
driven is 12345
i. n
o
.c
SOL 6.2.9
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.2.10
Rb = nfs
108 = 8 # ^2Wm h
8
Wm = 10
16
= 6.25 # 106 Hz
= 6.25 MHz
Correct answer is 4.
Given, the sampling rate, fs = 8 kHz
ON time duration of the flat top samples, 3 = 1 ms
The time duration for synchronization, Tsyn = 1 ms
Since, each of the 24 voice signals are sampled for the time duration 3. So,
the total time width for the 24 voice signal pulses is given by
Tvoice = 240
= 24 # 1 = 24 ms
Therefore, the total time width required for voice signal pulses along with
its synchronization pulse is
Tpulse = Tvoice + Tsyn
= 24 + 1
= 25 ms
Again, we have the time duration of each sample as
1
Ts = 1 =
= 1.25 # 10-4 sec
fs 8 # 103
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
= 125 ms
Therefore, the total OFF duration in a sample is
TOFF = Ts - Tpulse
= 125 - 25
= 100 ms
Since, there are 25 pulses (24 voice signal pulses and 1 synchronization
pulse) in a sample. So, the spacing between successive pulses is given by
Tspacing = TOFF
25
= 100 = 4 ms
25
Page 431
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Tspacing = Ts, pulse - 1 ms
= 5-1
= 4 ms
SOL 6.2.11
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.2.12
Digital Transmission
or,
SNR = kq2
where k is a constant for the given message signal. Here, the message signal
for both the cases are same, so the value of k will be constant for both the
cases, whereas the value of q varies.Therefore, the ratio of SNR is
^SNRh1 q 12
...(1)
=
^SNRh2 q 22
Initially, the quantization level is q1 = 2n = 210
For the desired value of SNR, let the system require n2 bits. So, we have
i. n
o
.c
q 2 = 2n
Substituting all the values in equation (1), we get
2
a
i
d
2
103 = 210
c nm
2
10 4.2
2
o
n
4.2 - 3
10 2 = 2n - 10
n2 - 10 = log 2 100.6
n2 = 10 + 0.6 log 2 10
Thus, the increase in bits of PCM is
.
w
w
= 20%
NOTE :
Since, the message signal (sampling frequency) for both the cases are same so,
the percentage increase in transmission bandwidth is same as the percentage
increase in number of encoding bits.
SOL 6.2.13
^SNRhmin = 50 dB = 105
For a PCM system, the output SNR (for m-law companding) is given by
3q2
So =
2
No
7ln ^1 + mhA
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 433
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
n = 10
SOL 6.2.14
Correct answer is 8.
Given, the signal to quantization ratio for the PCM,
So = 48 dB = 10 4.8
No
Now, the signal to quantization noise ratio for a PCM system is defined as
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
So = 3q2 m ^ t h
...(1)
No
m p2
where m2 ^ t h is the power in the message signal m ^ t h and m p is its peak
value. Here, the message signal is sinusoid, so we have
m2 ^ t h = 1
2
2
and
mp = 1
Substituting it in equation (1), we have
1
So = 3q2 2
1
No
10 4.8 =
3q2
2
4.8
...(2)
q2 = 2 # 10
3
Now, if the number of bits per sample of PCM be n , then we must have
q < 2n
Substituting it in equation (2), we get
4.8
^2n h2 > 2 #310
or,
4.8
n > 1 log 2 c 2 # 10 m
2
3
or,
n > 7.7
Thus, the minimum number of bits per sample is n = 8
SOL 6.2.15
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 434
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
1/2 3q2
=
1
2
If n be the minimum number of bits per sample so, we have
3q2
> 10 4
2
= 3q2
or
3 ^22n h2
> 10 4
2
4
n > 1 log 2 c 2 # 10 m = 6.35
2
3
or,
So, we have
n =7
Therefore, the data rate (bit rate) of the speech signal is given by
Rb = nfs
= 7 # 8 kHz
= 56 kbits/sec
So, the minimum storage capacity needed to accommodate the 20 sec
duration speech signal is
i. n
M = Rb # T
= ^56 kbits/ sech # ^20 sech
o
.c
= 1120 kbits
Converting it into bytes (1 byte = 8 bits ), we get
M = 1120 = 140 k bytes.
8
SOL 6.2.16
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.2.17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 435
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
2
m2 ^ t h
2n m ^ t h
3
2
=
^
h
#
m p2
m p2
where n is the number of bits per sample, m2 ^ t h is the power in message
signal, and m p is the peak amplitude of m ^ t h.
When the code word length ^n h is changed from n1 = 6 to n2 = 8 bits the
signal to quantization noise ratio improves by the factor given as
3 # ^2 h2n
3 # ^2 h2 # 8
^SNRh2
=
=
= 16
^SNRh1
3 # ^2 h2n
3 # ^2 h2 # 6
Correct answer is 384.
Given, the bandwidth of signals g1 ^ t h and g 4 ^ t h
f1 = f4 = 4 kHz
Bandwidth of signals g2 ^ t h and g 3 ^ t h.
f2 = f3 = 8 kHz
Required number of bits for each sample, n = 8 bits
For the given signals, we obtain the minimum sampling frequency (Nyquist
sampling rate) as
SNR = 3q2
SOL 6.2.19
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
fs1 = fs 4 = 2 # 4 = 8 kHz
and
fs2 = fs3 = 2 # 8 = 16 kHz
So, total number of pulses (frequency) per second for the multiplexed signal
is
fs = fs1 + fs 2 + fs 3 + fs 4
= 8 + 16 + 16 + 8
= 48 kHz
Therefore, the minimum transmission bit rate for the system is obtained as
Rb = nfs
= 8 # 48
= 384 k bits/sec
SOL 6.2.20
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 436
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
Rb = nfs
= 12 # 4800
= 57.6 kbits/sec
SOL 6.2.21
fs = 2fN = 2 ^2fm h
= 2 # 2 # 5 = 20 kHz
Now, these signals are time division multiplexed. So, the total pulses per
second (frequency) of the multiplexed signal is
fT = 4 # fs = 4 # 20 = 80 kHz
This is the theoretical transmission bandwidth of the channel.
SOL 6.2.22
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
fs = fs1 + fs 2 + fs 3 + fs 4
= 200 + 200 + 400 + 800 = 1600 Hz
This is the transmitted sample rate.
SOL 6.2.23
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
fm = 350p = 175 Hz
2p
Therefore, the Nyquist sampling rate for the signal is
Page 437
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
fN = 2fm
= 2 # 175 = 350 Hz
SOL 6.2.24
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n = 7 + 1 = 8 bits
Therefore, the total bit rate of TDM link is given by
Rb = nfs
= 8 # 160 kHz
= 1280 kbits/sec
SOL 6.2.25
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Digital Transmission
= 4233.6 Mbits
SOL 6.2.27
i. n
o
.c
fs = 4 # fs0
= 4 # 8 = 32 kHz
So, the bit transmission rate of the time division multiplexed signal is
a
i
d
Rb = nfs
where n is the number of bits per sample defined as
q = 2n
So,
n = log 2 256 = 8
Substituting it in equation (1), we get the bit rate as
Rb = 8 # 32 kHz
= 256 kbits/sec
...(1)
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.2.28
2n $ 6
or,
n = 3 bits
Now, the sampling frequency for the analog data is given by Nyquist rate as
fs = 2fm
= 2 # 30
= 60 kHz
Therefore, the rate of generated digital signal is
Rb = nfs
= 3 # 60 kHz
= 180 kbits/sec
SOL 6.2.29
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
So, the sampling frequency for the message signal is given by its Nyquist
rate as
fs = 2fm
= 2 # 4 = 8 kHz
Again, the number of bits per sample is obtained as
Page 439
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
2n $ q
or,
2n $ 16
or
n =4
Therefore, the bit transmission rate is given by
Rb = nfs
= 4#8
= 32 kbits/sec
SOL 6.2.30
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
q = 256
So, the number of bits per sample is
n = log 2 256 = 8
Therefore, the output bit rate is given by
Rb = nfs = 8 # 8 = 64 kbps
SOL 6.2.31
BT = 1 MHz
This is the bandwidth at output of PSK modulator having roll factor
a = 25% = 0.25
So, we obtain the overall system bandwidth at time division multiplexer
output as
B overall = BT
1+a
=
106 = 8 105 Hz
#
1 + 0.25
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 440
Chap 6
= 8 # 10 4 samples/second
Therefore, the number of bits per sample is given by
560 k bits/ sec
n = Rb =
fs
8 # 10 4 samples/ sec
= 7 bits/sample
Thus, number of quantization level is given by
Digital Transmission
q = 2n = 27 = 128 levels
SOL 6.2.32
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
fs = MW = M # 3000
= 3000 N samples/sec
Therefore, the bit rate at the receiving end is given by
o
n
.
w
w
Rb = nfs
= ^4 bits/sampleh # ^3000M samples/ sech
or
or
SOL 6.2.33
Rb < Rb,max
12000M < 106
6
M < 10 = 83.33
12000
M . 83 signals
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
This is the sampling frequency for the transmitted signal. Therefore, the bit
rate of the transmitted signal is obtained as
Rb = nfs
Page 441
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.2.35
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
th
harmonic
W = f4 harmonic = 5.6 # 10 4 Hz
Thus, the minimum sampling rate (Nyquist rate) for the signal is
th
fs = 2W = 2 # ^5.6 # 10 4h
= 11.2 # 10 4 Hz = 112 kHz
SOL 6.2.36
2m p = 6 - ^- 6h = 12 V
So, we have the number of digitzation (quantization) level,
q = 2n = 214 = 16384
Thus, the resolution of digitization is given by
Resolution = 12
q-1
12
=
= 7.3246 # 10-4 V
16384 - 1
= 732.5 mV
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.2.37
Digital Transmission
Correct answer is 3.
Given, the maximum voltage range
Vmax = 1 volt
i. n
o
.c
k = 4 bits/level
So, we obtain the baud rate for the system,
9600 bits/ sec
D = Rb =
k
4 bits/level
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
fs
2
= 2.67 kHz = 1.33 kHz
2
W =
SOL 6.2.40
Page 443
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 9 # 2 # 3400
SOL 6.2.41
Correct answer is 7.
Given the error at receiving end,
error # 0.5% of peak-to-peak full scale value
So, we have
1 2m p # 0.5
2m p
100 #
2 c 2n m
or,
2n $ 100
or,
n $ log 2 100 = 6.65
Therefore, the minimum number of bits per sample (word) is
n = 7 bits/word
SOL 6.2.42
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 444
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
f 3 = 1800 Hz
So, the message signal is bandlimited to
W = f 3 = 1800 Hz
Therefore, the sampling frequency of the signal is obtained as
fs $ 2W = 2 # 1800
= 3600 Hz
SOL 6.2.44
i. n
#
#
0
fS /2
ia
S ^ f h df
d
o
fS /2
n
.
w
w
;f -
o
.c
S ^ f h df
90 # 103
#
#
0
105
90 # 10
^1 - 10-5 f h df
^1 - 10-5 f h df
3
-5 2 90 # 10
10 f
2 E0
10-5 f 2 10
;f - 2 E
90 # 10
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 445
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
= 100 - 1 = 99
Also, the power in distorted signal is given by
Pdo = Area of shaded region
= 1 # 20 # 0.1 = 1
2
So, we get the signal to distortion ratio as
SDR = Pso = 99 = 99 or 20 dB
1
Pdo
***********
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.3
Page 446
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.3.1
fs $ 2fm
where fm is the input message frequency. So, aliasing occurs when a signal is
mistakenly sampled at less than twice the input frequency.
SOL 6.3.2
SOL 6.3.3
SOL 6.3.4
SOL 6.3.5
SOL 6.3.6
SOL 6.3.7
SOL 6.3.8
SOL 6.3.9
SOL 6.3.10
SOL 6.3.11
SOL 6.3.12
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.3.13
SOL 6.3.14
SOL 6.3.15
SOL 6.3.16
SOL 6.3.17
SOL 6.3.18
SOL 6.3.19
Page 447
Chap 6
Digital Transmission
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.3.20
SOL 6.3.21
SOL 6.3.22
SOL 6.3.23
SOL 6.3.24
SOL 6.3.25
SOL 6.3.26
SOL 6.3.27
SOL 6.3.28
SOL 6.3.29
SOL 6.3.30
SOL 6.3.31
SOL 6.3.32
SOL 6.3.33
SOL 6.3.34
SOL 6.3.35
SOL 6.3.36
SOL 6.3.37
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 448
Chap 6
W # Wchannel
where W is transmission bandwidth and Wchannel is channel bandwidth.
Digital Transmission
SOL 6.3.38
SOL 6.3.39
SOL 6.3.40
SOL 6.3.41
SOL 6.3.42
SOL 6.3.43
SOL 6.3.44
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.3.45
.
w
w
SOL 6.3.46
SOL 6.3.47
************
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
GATE
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
Vol 8 of 10
Eighth Edition
GATE
Control Systems
Vol 8 of 10
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 540.00
To Our Parents
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GENERAL ABILITY
Verbal Ability : English grammar, sentence completion, verbal analogies, word groups, instructions, critical
reasoning and verbal deduction.
Numerical Ability : Numerical computation, numerical estimation, numerical reasoning and data interpretation.
Engineering Mathematics
Linear Algebra : Matrix Algebra, Systems of linear equations, Eigen values and eigen vectors.
Calculus : Mean value theorems, Theorems of integral calculus, Evaluation of definite and improper integrals, Partial
Derivatives, Maxima and minima, Multiple integrals, Fourier series. Vector identities, Directional derivatives, Line,
Surface and Volume integrals, Stokes, Gauss and Greens theorems.
Differential equations : First order equation (linear and nonlinear), Higher order linear differential equations with
constant coefficients, Method of variation of parameters, Cauchys and Eulers equations, Initial and boundary
value problems, Partial Differential Equations and variable separable method.
Complex variables : Analytic functions, Cauchys integral theorem and integral formula, Taylors and Laurent
series, Residue theorem, solution integrals.
Probability and Statistics : Sampling theorems, Conditional probability, Mean, median, mode and standard
deviation, Random variables, Discrete and continuous distributions, Poisson, Normal and Binomial distribution,
Correlation and regression analysis.
Numerical Methods : Solutions of non-linear algebraic equations, single and multi-step methods for differential
equations.
Transform Theory : Fourier transform, Laplace transform, Z-transform.
Analog Circuits : Small Signal Equivalent circuits of diodes, BJTs, MOSFETs and analog CMOS. Simple diode
circuits, clipping, clamping, rectifier. Biasing and bias stability of transistor and FET amplifiers. Amplifiers: singleand multi-stage, differential and operational, feedback, and power. Frequency response of amplifiers. Simple opamp circuits. Filters. Sinusoidal oscillators; criterion for oscillation; single-transistor and op-amp configurations.
Function generators and wave-shaping circuits, 555 Timers. Power supplies.
Digital circuits : Boolean algebra, minimization of Boolean functions; logic gates; digital IC families (DTL, TTL,
ECL, MOS, CMOS). Combinatorial circuits: arithmetic circuits, code converters, multiplexers, decoders, PROMs
and PLAs. Sequential circuits: latches and flip-flops, counters and shift-registers. Sample and hold circuits, ADCs,
DACs. Semiconductor memories. Microprocessor(8085): architecture, programming, memory and I/O interfacing.
Signals and Systems : Definitions and properties of Laplace transform, continuous-time and discrete-time Fourier
series, continuous-time and discrete-time Fourier Transform, DFT and FFT, z-transform. Sampling theorem.
Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Systems: definitions and properties; causality, stability, impulse response, convolution,
poles and zeros, parallel and cascade structure, frequency response, group delay, phase delay. Signal transmission
through LTI systems.
Control Systems : Basic control system components; block diagrammatic description, reduction of block diagrams.
Open loop and closed loop (feedback) systems and stability analysis of these systems. Signal flow graphs and their
use in determining transfer functions of systems; transient and steady state analysis of LTI control systems and
frequency response. Tools and techniques for LTI control system analysis: root loci, Routh-Hurwitz criterion, Bode
and Nyquist plots. Control system compensators: elements of lead and lag compensation, elements of ProportionalIntegral-Derivative (PID) control. State variable representation and solution of state equation of LTI control
systems.
Communications : Random signals and noise: probability, random variables, probability density function,
autocorrelation, power spectral density. Analog communication systems: amplitude and angle modulation and
demodulation systems, spectral analysis of these operations, superheterodyne receivers; elements of hardware,
realizations of analog communication systems; signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) calculations for amplitude modulation
(AM) and frequency modulation (FM) for low noise conditions. Fundamentals of information theory and channel
capacity theorem. Digital communication systems: pulse code modulation (PCM), differential pulse code modulation
(DPCM), digital modulation schemes: amplitude, phase and frequency shift keying schemes (ASK, PSK, FSK),
matched filter receivers, bandwidth consideration and probability of error calculations for these schemes. Basics of
TDMA, FDMA and CDMA and GSM.
Electromagnetics : Elements of vector calculus: divergence and curl; Gauss and Stokes theorems, Maxwells
equations: differential and integral forms. Wave equation, Poynting vector. Plane waves: propagation through various
media; reflection and refraction; phase and group velocity; skin depth. Transmission lines: characteristic impedance;
impedance transformation; Smith chart; impedance matching; S parameters, pulse excitation. Waveguides: modes
in rectangular waveguides; boundary conditions; cut-off frequencies; dispersion relations. Basics of propagation in
dielectric waveguide and optical fibers. Basics of Antennas: Dipole antennas; radiation pattern; antenna gain.
**********
SYLLABUS
**********
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.2
CONTROL SYSTEM
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
TRANSFER FUNCTION 3
1.4
FEEDBACK SYSTEM
1.5
Basic Formulation
1.4.2
1.4.3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
10
1.6.2
1.6.3
EXERCISE 1.2
33
EXERCISE 1.3
37
SOLUTIONS 1.1
45
SOLUTIONS 1.2
86
SOLUTIONS 1.3
93
CHAPTER 2
1.6.1
EXERCISE 1.1
1.4.1
1.5.1
1.6
STABILITY
2.1
INTRODUCTION
99
2.2
2.3
STABILITY 99
99
10
10
10
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
100
100
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.5.1
Routh-Hurwitz Criterion
2.5.2
Nyquist Criterion
2.5.3
Bode Diagram
103
103
103
103
2.6.1
Rouths Tabulation
2.6.2
2.6.3
EXERCISE 2.2
115
EXERCISE 2.3
120
SOLUTIONS 2.1
125
SOLUTIONS 2.2
149
SOLUTIONS 2.3
170
CHAPTER 3
103
105
TIME RESPONSE
3.1
INTRODUCTION
3.2
3.3
175
175
3.3.1
3.3.2
176
3.3.3
177
3.3.4
3.4.1
3.5
100
EXERCISE 2.1
3.4
99
178
175
179
180
3.5.1
181
3.5.2
183
3.5.3
184
3.6
3.7
3.8
SENSITIVITY
EXERCISE 3.1
187
EXERCISE 3.2
198
EXERCISE 3.3
208
SOLUTIONS 3.1
219
SOLUTIONS 3.2
246
SOLUTIONS 3.3
278
CHAPTER 4
185
185
4.1
INTRODUCTION
287
4.2
ROOT LOCUS
287
4.2.1
287
4.2.2
288
4.3
289
4.4
4.5
ROOT SENSITIVITY
EXERCISE 4.1
292
EXERCISE 4.2
310
EXERCISE 4.3
314
SOLUTIONS 4.1
320
SOLUTIONS 4.2
352
SOLUTIONS 4.3
364
CHAPTER 5
291
291
5.1
INTRODUCTION
5.2
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
5.3
184
369
369
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
POLAR PLOT
372
370
370
371
5.4
5.5
5.6
NYQUIST CRITERION
372
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
BODE PLOTS
373
375
5.5.1
375
5.5.2
5.5.3
376
5.6.1
Pole-Zero Pattern
377
5.6.2
378
5.7
5.8
5.9
376
378
379
5.8.1
379
5.8.2
380
5.8.3
Stability of a System
381
5.9.1
M -Circles
381
5.9.2
N -Circles
382
384
EXERCISE 5.2
406
EXERCISE 5.3
411
SOLUTIONS 5.1
426
SOLUTIONS 5.2
465
SOLUTIONS 5.3
481
CHAPTER 6
383
6.1
INTRODUCTION
491
6.2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
6.3
CONTROLLERS
491
492
6.3.1
Proportional Controller
492
6.3.2
493
381
6.4
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
COMPENSATORS
6.4.2
Lag Compensator
501
6.4.3
Lag-Lead compensator
502
EXERCISE 6.2
515
EXERCISE 6.3
517
SOLUTIONS 6.1
526
SOLUTIONS 6.2
548
SOLUTIONS 6.3
553
CHAPTER 7
INTRODUCTION
7.2
7.5
7.6
498
7.1
7.4
497
498
Lead Compensator
505
7.3
496
6.4.1
EXERCISE 6.1
495
559
559
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Comparison between Transfer Function Approach and State Variable Approach 561
560
STATE-SPACE REPRESENTATION
561
7.3.1
561
7.3.2
562
563
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.5.1
Characteristic Equation
7.5.2
Eigen Values
565
7.5.3
Eigen Vectors
566
7.5.4
SIMILARITY TRANSFORMATION
7.6.1
563
564
565
565
566
566
566
7.7
7.7.1
Controllability
7.7.2
Output Controllability
7.7.3
Observability
566
567
567
567
7.8
568
7.9
568
7.9.1
568
7.9.2
569
EXERCISE 7.1
571
EXERCISE 7.2
599
EXERCISE 7.3
601
SOLUTIONS 7.1
606
SOLUTIONS 7.2
664
SOLUTIONS 7.3
669
***********
CHAPTER 1
Page 17
Chap 1
1.1
INTRODUCTION
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ROOT LOCUS
A graph showing how the roots of the characteristic equation move around
the s -plane as a single parameter varies is known as a root locus plot.
1.2.1
q ^s h = 1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
Now, we rearrange the equation so that the parameter of interest, K , appears
as the multiplying factor in the form,
1 + KP ^s h = 0
For determining the locus of roots as K varies from 0 to 3, consider the
polynomial in the form of poles and zeros as
K
1+
% ^s + Z h
i
% ^s + P h
=0
or
%
j
^s + Pj h + K
% ^s + Z h = 0
i
% ^s + P h = 0
j
% ^s + Z h = 0
i
Hence, we noted that the locus of the roots of the characteristic equation
1 + KP ^s h = 0 begins at the poles of P ^s h and ends at the zeros of P ^s h as
K increases from zero to infinity.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1.2.2
-3 < K < 3
G1 ^ s h H1 ^ s h =
% ^s + Z h
i
i=1
n
% ^s + P h
= 1 ;
K
-3 < K < 3
j=1
2.
i. n
o
.c
3.
o
n
.
w
w
a
i
d
n
% ^s + P h
j
K =
j=1
m
% ^s + Z h
i
i=1
The value of K at any point s1 on the root locus is obtained from above
equation by substituting value of s1 . Graphically, we write
K =
POINTS TO REMEMBER
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Some important rules are given in the following texts that are useful for
sketching the root loci.
Page 19
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
While sketching the root locus on real axis, we must note following points:
1. The entire real axis of the s -plane is occupied by the root locus for all
values of K .
2. Root locus for K $ 0 are found in the section only if the total number
of poles and zeros of G ^s h H ^s h to the right of the section is odd. The
remaining sections of the real axis are occupied by the root locus for
K # 0.
3. Complex poles and zeros of G ^s h H ^s h do not affect the type of root
locus found on the real axis.
Rule 5: Angle of Asymptotes of the Root Locus
When n is the number of finite poles and m is the number of finite zeros of
G ^s h H ^s h, respectively. Then n - m branches of the root locus approaches
the infinity along straight line asymptotes whose angles are given by
^2q + 1h p
; for K $ 0
qa = !
n-m
and
where
qa =
!^2q h p
;
n-m
for K # 0
q = 0 , 1, 2,.......... ^n - m - 1h
/ Real parts of poles ofG^s hH^s h - / Real parts of zeros of G^s hH^s h
n-m
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
f = q3 + q5 - ^q1 + q2 + q4h
fD = !6^2q + 1h p + f@;
q = 0 , 1, 2,.......
and
Rule 8: Angle of Arrival
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
f = q2 - ^q1 + q3h
fa = !6^2q + 1h p - f@;
q = 0 , 1, 2,.......
NOTE :
For K # 0 , departure and arrival angles are given by
fD = " 7_2q + 1i p + fA
and
fa = " 7_2q + 1i p - fA
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
dK = 0
ds
i.e. breakaway and break in points are determined by finding maximum
and minimum points of the gain K as a function of s with s restricted
to real values.
Page 21
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
In this section, the effect of adding poles and zeros to G ^s h H ^s h are described.
Addition of Poles to G ^s h H ^s h
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Addition of Zeros to G ^s h H ^s h
1.5
ROOT SENSITIVITY
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.1
Page 22
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
MCQ 1.1.1
i. n
MCQ 1.1.2
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.4
MCQ 1.1.5
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.6
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 1.1.7
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 25
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.9
MCQ 1.1.10
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 1.1.11
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.12
MCQ 1.1.13
K (s + 3) (s + 2)
(s3 + 2s + 2)
K (s + 3) (s + 2)
(D)
(s2 - 2s + 2)
(B)
ufb system is
Break-away
- 5.437
- 1.563
- 5.743
- 1.216
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 27
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.15
MCQ 1.1.16
MCQ 1.1.17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 28
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
MCQ 1.1.18
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(s + 4s + 4) (s + 11s + 30) + Ks + 4K = 0
where K > 0 . In the root locus of this system, the asymptotes meet in s
-plane at
(A) (- 9.5, 0)
(B) (- 5.5, 0)
(C) (- 7.5, 0)
(D) None of the above
MCQ 1.1.21
MCQ 1.1.22
Page 29
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
The root locus of the system having the loop transfer function,
K
has
G (s) H (s) =
s (s + 4) (s2 + 4s + 5)
(A) 3 break-away points
(B) 3 break-in points
(C) 2 break-in and 1 break-away point
(D) 2 break-away and 1 break-in point
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.23
MCQ 1.1.24
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.25
MCQ 1.1.26
K (s + 6)
For the system G (s) H (s) =
, consider the following characteristic
(s + 2) (s + 4)
of the root locus :
1. It has one asymptote.
2. It has intersection with jw-axis.
3. It has two real axis intersections.
4. It has two zeros at infinity.
The root locus have characteristics
(A) 1 and 2
(B) 1 and 3
(C) 3 and 4
(D) 2 and 4
The forward path transfer function of a ufb system is
K (s + 3)
G (s) =
s (s + 1) (s + 2) (s + 4)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.28
(B) 0, 2p , 4p
3
3
Page 31
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
Match List-I with List-II in respect of the open loop transfer function
K (s + 10) (s2 + 20s + 500)
G (s) H (s) =
s (s + 20) (s + 50) (s2 + 4s + 5)
and choose the correct option.
List I (Types of Loci)
List II (Numbers)
P. Separate Loci
1. One
Q. Loci on the real axis
2. Two
R. Asymptotes
3. Three
S. Break away points
4. Five
P
Q
R
S
(A) 4
3
1
1
(B)
4
3
2
1
(C)
3
4
1
1
(D) 3
4
1
2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(B)
K (s + 3)
s (s + 1)
(D)
Ks
(s + 1) (s + 3)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.30
MCQ 1.1.31
K (1 - s)
An unity feedback system is given as G (s) =
. Which of the following
s (s + 3)
is the correct root locus diagram ?
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 1.1.32
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.1.33
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.34
Figure shows the root locus plot (location of poles not given) of a third order
system whose open loop transfer function is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) K3
s
(C)
MCQ 1.1.35
K
s (s + 1)
K
(D)
s (s2 - 1)
(B)
K
s (s2 + 1)
A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function, G (s) = K2 . The
s
root locus plot is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.36
MCQ 1.1.37
MCQ 1.1.38
MCQ 1.1.39
(B) - 10
3
(C) - 4
(D) - 8
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.40
ANAND K./357
/6.5
The open loop transfer function of a ufb system and root locus plot for the
system is shown below.
K
G ^s h H ^s h =
s ^s + 2h^s + 4h
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The range of K for which the system has damped oscillatory response is
(A) 0 < K < 48
(B) K > 3.08
(C) 3.08 < K < 48
MCQ 1.1.41
(D) K > 48
ANAND K./363
/6.7
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.43
ANAND K./385
/6.16
MCQ 1.1.44
DORSEY/115
/5.3.7
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 1.1.45
DORSEY/134
/5.8.2.3
MCQ 1.1.46
DORSEY/134
/5.8.2.3
What is the gain K for which the closed loop system has a pole at s = 0 ?
(A) K = 0
(B) K = 2
(C) K = 10
(D) K = 3
Based on the above result, other pole of the system is
(A) s =- 3 + j0
(B) s =- 5 + j0
(C) s =- 13 + j0
(D) None
What is the value of gain K for which the closed loop system has two poles
with real part - 2 ?
(A) K = 0
(B) K = 30
(C) K = 84.24
(D) K = 3
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.49
DORSEY/136
/5.8.6.4
MCQ 1.1.50
Based on the above result, third pole of the closed loop system is
(A) s =- 30
(B) s =- 31
(C) s =- 27
(D) None
Complex poles of the system are
(A) s =- 2 ! j2.245
(C) s =- 2 ! j1.497
Page 37
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
(B) s =- 2 ! j3.467
(D) None
M.GOPAL/402
/8.7
Suppose delay time tD = 1 sec . In root locus plot of the system, the breakaway and break-in points are respectively
(A) 0, 4.83
(B) 4.83, 0
(C) - 0.83 , 4.83
(D) 4.83, - 0.83
MCQ 1.1.51
NISE/388/-
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Variation of system gain K along the real axis of s -plane for the root locus
of a system is shown below.
Which of the following options is correct for the root locus plot of the
system?
(A) ^- s1h is break in and s2 is break away point.
(B) ^- s1h is break away and s2 is break in point.
(C) Both ^- s1h and s2 are break away points.
(D) Both ^- s1h and s2 are break in points.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.1.52
NISE/409/8.10
MCQ 1.1.53
NISE/409/8.10
MCQ 1.1.54
S.CHAND/304
/8.4
MCQ 1.1.55
S.CHAND/307
/8.5
(B) s =- 0.53
(D) None
What will be the change in pole ^s =- 9.47h location for a 10% change in
K ?
(A) Pole moves to left by 0.056
(B) Pole moves to right by 0.056
(C) Pole moves to left by 0.029
(D) Pole moves to right by 0.029
A ufb system has an open loop transfer function,
K ^s + 1h
G ^s h H ^s h =
s ^s - 1h
Root locus for the system is a circle. Centre and radius of the circle are
respectively
(A) ^0, 0h, 2
(B) ^0, 0h, 2
(C) ^- 1, 0h, 2
(D) ^- 1, 0h, 2
i. n
o
.c
o
n
a
i
d
(C) ^s + 3h2 + w2 = ^ 3 h
MCQ 1.1.56
.
w
w
(D) ^s - 4h2 + w2 = ^2 h2
S.CHAND/332
/5
MCQ 1.1.57
D.ROY/281/6.4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 39
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
*************
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.2
Page 40
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
i. n
o
.c
QUES 1.2.1
QUES 1.2.2
QUES 1.2.3
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 1.2.4
QUES 1.2.5
The value of gain for which the closed-loop transfer function will have a pole
on the real axis at - 5 , will be _______
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 41
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
QUES 1.2.7
QUES 1.2.8
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 1.2.9
ANAND K./364
/6.8
QUES 1.2.10
ANAND K./364
/6.8
QUES 1.2.11
DORSEY/162
/6.8.4.2(B)
QUES 1.2.12
The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is shown below.
10K
G ^s h H ^s h =
^s + 2h^s + 10h
What is the value of K for which the root locus cross the line of constant
damping x = 1 ?
2
The root locus plot of a system is shown below.
S.H.SAEED/254
/5.39(A)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
C.KUO/348
/8.8(A)
QUES 1.2.14
QUES 1.2.13
NISE/409/8.10
QUES 1.2.15
MANKE/342
/7.24.9
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
QUES 1.2.16
.
w
w
MANKE/347/-
QUES 1.2.17
MANKE/347/-
QUES 1.2.18
MANKE/352
/7.25.1
The root locus of the system is plotted as the value of parameter a is varied.
The break away point is s = _______
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 1.2.20
H.BISHOP/470
/E7.8
QUES 1.2.21
S.GHOSH/449
/11.6
Page 43
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
***********
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 1.3
Page 44
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
MCQ 1.3.1
GHOSH/516/3
CHA. 4
MCQ 1.3.2
GHOSH/516/5
CHA. 4
MCQ 1.3.3
GHOSH/516/6
CHA. 4
MCQ 1.3.4
GHOSH/516/10
CHA. 4
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
The algebraic sum of the angles of the vectors from all poles and zeros to the
point on any root locus segment is
(A) 180c
(B) 150c
(C) 180c or its odd multiple
(D) 80c or its odd multiple
.
w
w
w
MCQ 1.3.5
ANAND/400/1
MCQ 1.3.6
ANAND/400/2
MCQ 1.3.7
ANAND/400/3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.3.9
ANAND/400/5
MCQ 1.3.10
ANAND/400/6
MCQ 1.3.11
ANAND/400/7
MCQ 1.3.12
ANAND/400/8
MCQ 1.3.13
ANAND/401/10
MCQ 1.3.14
ANAND/401/12
MCQ 1.3.15
ANAND/401/13
MCQ 1.3.16
ANAND/401/15
Page 45
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.3.17
ANAND/401/16
MCQ 1.3.18
GOPAL/407/8.1
MCQ 1.3.19
GOPAL/409/8.5
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
w
MCQ 1.3.20
0 < K < 0. 4
0.4 < K < 6
6<K<3
None of the answers in (A), (B) and (C) is correct
GOPAL/409/8.6
(P) Adding a zero between s =- 1 and s =- 2 would move the root locus
to the left.
(Q) Adding a pole at s = 0 would move the root locus to the right.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 1.3.22
GOPAL/409/8.4
GOPAL/409/8.10
MCQ 1.3.24
GOPAL/450/9.6
Consider the root locus plot of unity-feedback system with open-loop transfer
function,
K ^s + 5h
G ^s h =
s ^s + 2h^s + 4h^s2 + 2s + 2h
The meeting point of the asymptotes on the real axis occurs at
(A) - 1.2
(B) - 0.85
(C) - 1.05
(D) - 0.75
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 1.3.23
Page 47
Chap 1
4
1
10
None of the answers in (A), (B), and (C) is correct.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 48
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
MCQ 1.3.25
GK/98-11/61
i. n
MCQ 1.3.26
GK/98-17/90
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
MCQ 1.3.27
.
w
w
Assertion (A) : The number of separate loci or poles of the closed loop
K ^s + 4h
is three.
system corresponding to G ^s h H ^s h =
s ^s + 1h^s + 3h
Reason (R) : Number of separate loci is equal to number of finite poles of
G ^s h H ^s h if the latter is more than the number of finite zeros of G ^s h H ^s h.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(B) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false but R is true
IES-EE-2001/174
/4
MCQ 1.3.28
IES-EE-2008/210
/254
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 49
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
(D) Segments of the real axis are part of the root locus, if and only if, the
total number of real poles and zeros to their right is odd.
MCQ 1.3.30
IES-EC-2010/74
/12/ARIHANT
MCQ 1.3.31
IES-EC-2008/78
/55/ARIHANT
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.1
Page 50
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
SOL 1.1.1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
SOL 1.1.2
SOL 1.1.3
o
n
.
w
w
The angle of departure of the root locus branch from a complex pole is given by
fD = !6180c + f@
where f is net angle contribution at this pole due to all other poles and
zeros, as shown in figure below.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 51
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
fD = !6180c - 180c@ = ! 0c
Therefore, the departure angle for pole P0 is 0c. Thus, root locus branch will
depart at 0c. Only option (A) satisfies this condition.
SOL 1.1.4
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.6
fa =
^2 + 1h 180c 3 # 180c
=
= 270c; q = 1
2
P-Z
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 52
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
SOL 1.1.7
i. n
Root locus always starts from open loop poles and ends at open loop zeros
or infinite along with asymptotes. So, the options (C) and (D) are wrong.
Again, a point on the real axis lies on the root locus if the total number of
poles and zeros to the right of this point is odd. This is not satisfied by (B).
Thus, the remaining Correct option is (A).
o
.c
SOL 1.1.8
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
or
s2 + 8s + 25 = 0
s = - 8 ! 64 - 100 =- 4 ! j3
2
or
s =- 4 + j3 ; s =- 4 - j3
i.e. poles of the system are
s =- 4 + j3 ; s =- 4 - j3
Also, from the given transfer function, we have zeros of the system as
s =- 2 ; s =- 6
Thus, we get the pole-zero plot as shown below.
Also, we have the condition that root locus starts from poles and ends with
zeros. Only option (C) satisfies this condition.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 53
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
s2 + 1 = 0
or
s = ! j1
Also, zeros of the system are obtained as
s2 + 4 = 0
or
s = ! j2
Therefore, the pole-zero plot of the system is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Since, we have the condition that root locus starts from poles and ends with
zeros. Thus, Correct option is (B).
SOL 1.1.10
Hence, option (B) and (D) may not be correct option. A point on the real
axis lies on the root locus if the total number of poles and zeros to the right
of this point is odd. This is not satisfied by (C) because at origin there are
double pole. Thus, remaining Correct option is (A).
SOL 1.1.11
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
2
2
dK = -^s - 2s + 2h^2s + 5h + ^s + 5s + 6h^2s - 2h = 0
2
ds
^s2 - 2s + 2h
or
7s2 + 8s - 22 = 0
Solving the above expressions, we get
s =+ 1.29 and s =- 2.43
The point s =- 2.43 is maxima for gain K , so s =- 2.43 is break away
point.
SOL 1.1.13
Page 55
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
From the diagram, we note that root locus lies on real axis from - 6 to - 5
and from - 2 to - 1 because of odd number of pole and zero constrain.
Now, we further note that locus starts from - 6 and - 5 (poles of the system).
Thus, locus must break apart at s =- 5.437 , i.e. it is break away point.
Again, the locus end at - 2 and - 1 (zeros of the system), thus there must
be a break in at s =- 1.563 .
SOL 1.1.14
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 56
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K ^s + 6h
or
1+
=0
^s + 3h^s + 5h
-^s2 + 8s + 15h
or
K =
^s + 6h
Differentiating the above expression with respect to s and equating it to
zero, we have
2
dK = -^s + 6h^2s + 8h + ^s + 8s + 15h = 0
ds
^s + 6h2
or
s2 + 12s + 33 = 0
or
s =- 7.73 and s =- 4.27
Thus, we obtain the root locus for the system as shown below.
o
n
.
w
w
Observing the root locus, we can easily say that s =- 4.27 is break away
point and s =- 7.73 is break in point.
SOL 1.1.16
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
G ^s h H ^s h =
K
s ^s + 1h^s + 2h
In option (A) and option (C), the root locus on the real axis is found to the
left of an even count of real poles and real zeros of GH . So, these can not be
the root locus diagram. Now, we have the characteristic equation
Page 57
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 1h^s + 2h
or
s3 + 3s2 + 2s + K = 0
So, we have the Rouths array for the system
s3
6-K
3
s0
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
or
s =! j 2
Root locus cut on jw axis at s = ! j 2 for K = 6 . Since, the root locus
given in option (D) does not cut jw axis. So, it is not the root locus for given
system. Therefore, the remaining Correct option is (B).
SOL 1.1.17
where
^2 + 1h 180c
= 270c for q = 1
2
Hence, root locus plot will be as shown below.
and
fa =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.18
q ^s h = 1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
or
(Magnitude)
G ^s h H ^s h = 1
and
(Phase)
G ^s h H ^s h = ! 180c
Now, we consider the point s1 =- 2 + j3 as shown in the diagram below.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 59
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
or
f = 90c and 270c
To get intersection with imaginary axis, we use Rouths criteria. The
characteristic equation for the system is given as
s3 + bs2 + Ks + Ka = 0
So, we have the Rouths array as
s3
s2
1
s0
Ka
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
b-a
b
Ka
Here, for any value of K , s1 row of Routh array will not be zero. Thus,
system is stable for all positive value of K , and hence root locus does not
cross jw axis. Therefore, root locus completely lies in left half of s -plane.
Based on these results we say that Correct option is (A).
SOL 1.1.20
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.21
or
-^2s + 4h^s2 + 4s + 5 + s2 + 4s h = 0
or
...(2)
-^s + 2h^2s2 + 8s + 5h = 0
Solving the above equation, we get
s =- 2 and s =- 0.775 , - 3.225
Now, we check for maxima and minima value of gain K at above point.
If gain is maximum, then that point will be break away point. If gain is
minimum, then that point will be break in point. Again, differentiating
equation (2) with respect to s , we get
d 2 K =- 2s2 + 8s + 5 + s + 2 4s + 8
h ^
h^
h@
6^
ds2
2
=-^6s + 24s + 21h
For s =- 0.775 and s =- 3.225 , we have
d 2 K =- 6.0 < 0
ds2
So, the points s =- 0.775 and - 3.225 are maxima points. Hence, s =- 0.775
and s =- 3.225 are break away points. Again, for s =- 2 , we have
d 2 K =+ 3 > 0
ds2
So, the point s =- 2 is minima points. Hence, s =- 2 is break in point.
Thus, there is two break away points ^s =- .0775, - 3.225h and one break
in point (s =- 2).
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.22
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
poles : s2 + 1 = 0 & s = ! j
Page 61
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.24
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 62
Chap 1
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
10 ^s + ah^s + 3h
or
1+
=0
s ^s2 - 1h
or
s3 - s + 10 6s2 + ^a + 3h s + 3a@ = 0
or
s ^s2 + 10s + 29h + a10 ^s + 3h = 0
a10 ^s + 3h
or
=0
1+ 2
s ^s + 10s + 29h
So, we have the open loop gain as a is varied,
a10 ^s + 3h
G ^s h H ^s h = 2
s ^s + 10s + 29h
Therefore, the number of asymptotes are
...(1)
...(2)
...(3)
P-Z = 3-1 = 2
So, two root branches will go to infinite along asymptotes as a " 3. Now,
from equation (1) we have
s3 + 10s2 + ^29 + 10ah s + 30a = 0
So, we form the Rouths array as
s3
29 + 10a
s2
10
30a
s1
29 + 7a
s0
30a
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
For a > 0 , s1 row can not be zero. Hence, root locus does not intersect jw
axis for a > 0 . Only option (C) satisfies these conditions.
SOL 1.1.25
.
w
w
P-Z = 2-1 = 1
So, the characteristic (1) is correct.
Now, we have the characteristic equation for the system
^s + 2h^s + 4h + K ^s + 6h = 0
or
s2 + ^6 + K h s + 8 + 6K = 0
For the characteristic equation, we form the Rouths array as
s2
s1
6+K
s0
8 + 6K
8 + 6K
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Here, for K > 0 root locus does not intersect jw axis because s1 row will not
be zero. Thus, characteristic (2) is incorrect.
For the given system, we have two poles and one zero. So, one imaginary
zero lies on infinite. Therefore, the characteristic (4) is incorrect.
Hence, (B) must be correct option. But, we check further for characteristic
(3) as follows. We sketch the root locus for given system as
Page 63
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
and
poles: s = 0 , s =- 1, s =- 2 , s =- 4
So, we obtain the angle of asymptotes as
^2q + 1h 180c
; q = 0 , 1, 2,..... ^P - Z - 1h
fa =
^P - Z h
^0 + 1h 180c 180
=
= 60c; q = 0
=
3
^4 - 1h
^2 + 1h 180c
= 180c; q = 1
=
^4 - 1h
^4 + 1h 180c
= 300c; q = 2
=
^4 - 1h
Z60c = p ;
q=0
3
]
Thus,
fa = [180c= p; q = 1
]300c= 5p ; q = 2
3
\
SOL 1.1.27
(i.e. Z = 1)
(i.e. P = 4 )
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 64
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
i. n
o
.c
^2 + 1h 180c
= 270c; q = 1
2
Therefore, we get the root locus for the system as
=
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Here, root locus lies only in the region on real axis that is in left of an odd
count of real poles and real zeros.
Hence, root locus lies between - 20 and - 50 and break away point will also
be in this region. Thus, there will be only one break away point.
SOL 1.1.28
SOL 1.1.29
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
5s = 0
1+ K
2
s +9
Since, we defined the characteristic equation as
or
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
So, open loop transfer function of the system is
G ^s h H ^s h = 52 Ks
s +9
Therefore, we have the open loop poles and zeros of the system,
poles: s = ! j3
zeros: s = 0
Option (A) and option (B) are incorrect because root locus are starting from
zeros. On real axis, loci exist to the left of odd number of real poles and real
zeros. Hence, only Correct option is (D).
SOL 1.1.30
SOL 1.1.31
Page 65
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
^2 + 1h 180c
= 270c for q = 1
2
The centroid is obtained as
Sum of Re 6P @ - Sum of Re 6Z @
sA =
P-Z
and
fa =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
^0 - 2h - b- 23 l
=- 2
3-1
3
Also, we obtain the angle of departure at double pole (at origin) as
^2q + 1h 180c
; r = 2, q = 0, 1
fD =
r
=
= 90c, 270c
Thus, from above analysis, we sketch the root locus as
From root locus, it can be observed easily that for all values of gain K (
K = 0 to 3) root locus lie only in left half of s -plane.
SOL 1.1.32
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Centroid:
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
^0 - 1 - 3h - ^- 2h
=- 2
3-1
2
=- 1
Thus, from above analysis, we sketch the root locus as
Page 67
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
- 1 < Re 6s @ < 0
Two of its roots tends to infinite along the asymptotes Re 6s @ =- 1.
Root locus lies only in left half of s -plane.
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
...(1)
^s2 - 4h^s + 1h + K ^s - 1h = 0
K ^s - 1h
or
...(2)
=0
1+ 2
^s - 4h^s + 1h
Since, we define the characteristic equation as
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
So, the open loop transfer function of the system is obtained as
K ^s - 1h
G ^s h H ^s h = 2
^s - 4h^s + 1h
For the given system, we have the open loop poles and zeros as
poles: s = 2 , s =- 2 , s =- 1
zeros: s = 1
So, we obtain the following characteristic for root locus
Number of branches of loci:
P = number of OLP
=3
Number of asymptotes:
P - Z = number of OLP number of OLZ
= 3-1 = 2
^2q + 1h 180c
Angle of asymptotes:
; P - Z = 2, q = 0, 1
fa =
P-Z
^0 + 1h 180c
= 90c for q = 0
fa =
2
^2 + 1h 180c
fa =
= 270c for q = 1
2
Sum of Re 6P @ - Sum of Re 6Z @
Centroid:
sA =
P-Z
^- 1 - 2 + 2h - ^1 h
=
=- 2
3-1
2
=- 1
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 68
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
i. n
SOL 1.1.34
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
From given plot, we can observe that centroid (point where asymptotes
intersect on real axis) is origin and all three root locus branches also start
from origin and goes to infinite along with asymptotes. Therefore, there is
no any zero and three poles are at origin.
So, option (A) must be correct.
G ^s h = K3
s
Now, we verify the above result as follows. Using phase condition, we have
G ^s h H ^s h
s = s0
= ! 180c
3
1 m
=- 3 # 60c =- 180c
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 69
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
^2 + 1h 180c
= 270c for q = 1
2
Sum of Re 6P @ - Sum of Re 6Z @
Centroid:
sA =
= 0-0 = 0
2
P-Z
Break-away point:
1 + K2 = 0
s
or
K =- s2
dK =- 2s = 0
So,
ds
s =0
Thus, from the above analysis, we have the root locus plot as
=
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.36
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 70
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
^2 + 1h 180c
= 180c for q = 1
3
^4 + 1h 180c
=
= 300c for q = 2
3
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
or
- 3s2 - 24s - 22 = 0
So,
s =- 1.056 , - 6.943
Thus, the break-away points are
s =- 1.056 and - 6.943
SOL 1.1.39
s3 + 2s2 + Ks + K = 0
s3 + 2s2 + K ^s + 1h = 0
K ^s + 1h
1+ 2
=0
s ^s + 2h
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 71
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
^2 + 1h 180c
= 270c; q = 1
2
Intercept point (centroid) of asymptotes on real axis:
Sum of Re 6P @ - Sum of Re 6Z @
sA =
P-Z
^0 + 0 - 2h - ^- 1h
=
=- 1 =- 0.5
3-1
2
So, we get the root locus for the system as
=
SOL 1.1.40
s2
s1
48 - K
6
s0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 72
Chap 1
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 2h^s + 4h
or
...(1)
s3 + 6s2 + 8s + K = 0
1
For intersection of root locus with imaginary axis, s row should be zero, i.e.
48 - K = 0
6
or
K = 48
The breakaway point is given by
dK = 0
ds
From equation (1), we have
...(2)
K =-^s3 + 6s2 + 8s h
Substituting it in equation (2), we get
dK =- 3s2 + 12s + 8 = 0
^
h
ds
or
3s2 + 12s + 8 = 0
or
s =- 2 ! 1.15
So,
s =- 3.15 and s =- 0.85
From the plot, we can observe that s =- 0.85 is the actual break away point
out of these two points. For s 0 =- 0.85 , the value of K is obtained as
P ^Phasor lengths from s 0 to the OLP h
K =
P ^Phasor lengths form s 0 to the OLZ h
Here, no single zero in the system, hence
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 1.1.41
SOL 1.1.42
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
K ^1 - s h
=1
s ^s + 2h
s ^s + 2h
or
K =
1-s
The break points are given by solution of
dK = 0
ds
d s ^s + 2h = 0
or
ds ; 1 - s E
or
G ^s h H ^s h =
Page 73
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
or
^1 - s h^2s + 2h - s ^s + 2h^- 1h = 0
or
s2 - 2s - 2 = 0
Therefore, the break points are
s = +2 ! 4 + 8 = 1 !
2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Root locus will exist on real axis between s =- 2 and 0 and also for s > + 1
. Hence, break away point will be s =- 0.73 and break in point will be
s =+ 2.73
SOL 1.1.43
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 74
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
if
-a
x =c
2 #
then, we check
Here, if
and if
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
G ^s h H ^s h =
K
s ^s + a h^s2 + bs + c h
K
=
2
s ^s + 4h^s + 4s + 20h
Here, we have
a = 4 , b = 4 , c = 20
So,
- a =- 2 = - b
2
2
Hence, there are three break points.
and
-a # x = c
2
.
w
w
or
^- 2h # x = 20 & x = 10 > 5
Thus, there are 1 real and 2 complex break points.
SOL 1.1.44
d s2 - s + 4.25 = 0
D
s
ds :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
s2 - 4.25 = 0
s2 = 4.25
So,
s = ! 2.06
The critical point, s =- 2.06 is break point that belongs to the root locus.
The other critical point s = 2.06 belongs to the complementary root locus.
From the given gain ^K h plot, we can see that at point s =- 2.06 , gain has
a minima. Hence, this point will be break in point. Because, minimum value
of gain K is achieved at break in point and maximum value at break away
point.
or
or
SOL 1.1.45
Page 75
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K ^s - 1h
or
1+
=0
^s + 1h^s + 2h
or s2 + ^3 + K h s + ^2 - K h = 0
...(1)
It is required that one pole should lie at s = 0 . Let another pole lies at
s =- P , then required equation is
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
^s + 0h^s + P h = 0
or
s2 + Ps = 0
On comparing equations (1) and (2), we get
2-K = 0
or
K =2
SOL 1.1.46
...(2)
...(2)
P =5
Hence, other pole is located at ^- 5, 0h.
SOL 1.1.47
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K ^s + 2h
or
1+
=0
s ^s + 1h^s + 30h
or
s ^s + 1h^s + 30h + K ^s + 2h = 0
or
s3 + 31s2 + ^30 + K h s + 2K = 0
We require the two poles with real part of - 2 , i.e.
s =- 2 ! jw
Assume other pole is s =- P , then required equation is
...(1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 76
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
So,
i. n
o
.c
s =- P
Since,
P = 27
Hence, third pole of closed loop system is at
a
i
d
s =- 27
SOL 1.1.49
...(3)
...(4)
...(5)
or
or
SOL 1.1.48
...(2)
o
n
.
w
w
P = 27
and
K = 2106
25
Then, from equation (3) in above solution, we have
w2 = 2K - 4 = 2.24
27
or
w = ! 1.497
Therefore, complex poles are
s =- 2 ! jw
=- 2 ! j1.497
SOL 1.1.50
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
- K ^s - 2h
s ^s + 2h
Since, G ^s h H ^s h is negative, so the root locus will be complementary root
locus and will exist at any point on the real axis, if the total number of poles
and zeros to the right of that point is even.
G ^s h H ^s h =
Page 77
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
So, the root locus (complementary) for the given system will exist on real
axis in the region
- 2 < s < 0 and s > 2
The break points of the system are given by solution of
dK = 0
...(2)
ds
From equation (1), we have
s ^s + 2h
K =
^s - 2h
Substituting it in equation (2), we get
d s ^s + 2h = 0
ds > ^s - 2h H
or
^s - 2h^2s + 2h - s ^s + 2h = 0
or
2s2 - 2s - 4 - s2 - 2s = 0
or
s2 - 4s - 4 = 0
So,
s = 4 ! 5.657 = 4.83, - 0.83
2
Hence, break away point is s =- 0.83 and beak in point is s = 4.83 .
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.1.51
SOL 1.1.52
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 10h
or
s2 + 10s + 5 = 0
So, the poles (roots) of system are
s = - 10 ! 8.944
2
or
SOL 1.1.53
(K = 5 )
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 78
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
...(1)
...(2)
...(3)
Ts = ^- 9.47h^- 0.059h^0.1h
= 0.056
Since, the change Ts is positive, so it moves in right side. Hence, the pole
will move to the right by 0.056 units for a 10% change in K .
SOL 1.1.54
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
or
or
or
or
^s + 1h^2s - 1h - s ^s - 1h = 0
2s2 - s + 2s - 1 - s2 + s = 0
s2 + 2s - 1 = 0
s = - 2 ! 2.828
2
=- 1 ! 1.414
The root locus for the system is given below.
...(1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.1.55
Page 79
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
^s + jw + 3h - ^s + jwh - ^s + jw + 2h
or
tan-1 a w k - tan-1 a w k
s+3
s
or
tan :tan-1 a w k - tan-1 a w kD
s+3
s
w -w
s
+
3 s
or
w
w
1 +a
s + 3 ka s k
or
or
or
= 180c
...(1)
= 180c + tan-1 a w k
s+2
= tan :180c + tan-1 a w kD
s+2
0+ w
s+2
=
1 - ^0 ha w k
s+2
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
w
- 3w
2 = s+2
s ^s + 3h + w
- 3 ^s + 2h = s ^s + 3h + w2
^s2 + 6s + 9h + w2 =- 6 + 9
or
^s + 3h2 + w2 = ^ 3 h
This is the equation of circle.
SOL 1.1.56
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 4h^s + 5h
or
...(1)
s3 + 9s2 + 20s + K = 0
Intersection of root loci with jw axis is determined using Rouths array. For
the given system, we form the Rouths array as
i. n
s3
20
s2
s1
180 - K
9
K
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
s0
o
.c
The critical gain before the closed loop system goes to instability is Kc = 180
and the auxiliary equation is
or
9s2 + 180 = 0
s2 =- 20
or
s = ! j2 5
Hence, root loci intersect with jw-axis at s = ! j2 5 . The gain margin for
K = 18 is given by,
GM (in dB) = 20 log 10 b Kc l
K
= 20 log 10 180 = 20 dB
18
The gain margin for K = 1800 is given by
GM (in dB) = 20 log 10 b 180 l =- 20 dB
1800
The break away point is given by solution of
dK = 0
ds
From equation (1), we have
So,
or
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 81
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
12
K - 16
52 - K
3
s2
1
s0
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
2
- K + 59K - 832
52 - K
K
The root locus cross the jw-axis, if s1 row is completely zero, i.e.
- K2 + 59K - 832 = 0
or
K2 - 59K + 832 = 0
or
K = 59 ! 12.37 = 35.7 , 23.3
2
Hence, root locus cross jw-axis two times and the break points are given by
solution of
dK = 0
ds
Also, we can directly check option using pole-zero plot.
So, break away point will lie on real axis from s = 0 to 1 and break in point
will lie on real axis for s < - 1. Hence,
s = 0.45 is break away point
and
s =- 2.26 is break in point
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.2
Page 82
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
SOL 1.2.1
i. n
Here, root locus branches meet between - 1 and - 2 and go apart. Hence,
break-away point will lie between - 1 and - 2 . For this system, the open
loop poles and zeros are
zeros: s = 3 and s = 5 ;
poles: s =- 1 and s =- 2
So, the transfer function of given system will be
K ^s - 3h^s - 5h
G ^s h =
^s + 1h^s + 2h
Therefore, the characteristic equation is obtained as
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K ^s - 3h^s - 5h
or
1+
=0
^s + 1h^s + 2h
-^s2 + 3s + 2h
or
...(1)
K = 2
^s - 8s + 15h
Differentiating equation (1) with respect to s and equating to zero, we have
2
2
dK = -^s - 8s + 15h^2s + 3h + ^s + 3s + 2h^2s - 8h = 0
2
ds
^s2 - 8s + 15h
or
11s2 - 26s - 61 = 0
or
s =+ 3.9 and s =- 1.45
Thus, s =- 1.45 is break-away point and s =+ 3.9 is break-in point.
w
SOL 1.2.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 83
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
fD = !6180c + f@
where f is net angle contribution at pole P1 due to all other poles and zeros.
f = fZ - fP
= fZ1 - 6fP2 + fP3@
where
fZ1 = tan-1 1; fP2 = 90c; fP3 = tan-1 1
2
So,
f = tan-1 1 - :90c + tan-1 1 D
2
Therefore, we obtain the departure angle as
fD = !6180c + f@
fD = ! 108.4c
Hence, departure angle for pole P1 is + 108.4c and departure angle for pole
P2 is- 108.4c because P1 and P2 are complex conjugate.
SOL 1.2.4
It does not have any zero and have poles at s =- 4 and s =- 1 ! j1. So, the
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 84
Chap 1
G ^s h =
K
^s + 4h^s2 + 2s + 2h
K
= 3
s + 6s2 + 10s + 8
Therefore, we get the closed loop transfer function as
K
3
2
s
6
s
+
+ 10s + 8
T ^s h =
K
1+ 3
2
s + 6s + 10s + 8
K
= 3
2
s + 6s + 10s + 8 + K
The characteristics equation of the system is given as
s3 + 6s2 + 10s + 8 + K = 0
So, we have the Rouths array as
s3
10
s2
8+K
s1
52 - K
6
s0
8+K
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
6s2 + ^8 + 52h = 0
.
w
w
or
or
SOL 1.2.5
s2 =- 60 =- 10
6
s = ! j3.162
= 1 # 42 + 1 # 42 + 1
= 42 + 1 = 17 = 17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 85
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Correct answer is - 1.
Characteristic equation of given closed loop system is
s ^s + 1h^s + 2h + K = 0
K
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 1h^s + 2h
Since, the characteristic equation for a system is defined as
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
So, we get open loop transfer function of the system as
K
G ^s h H ^s h =
s ^s + 1h^s + 2h
Therefore, we have
Poles: s = 0 , s =- 1, s =- 2
Zeros: No zero
Thus, the centroid is obtained as
Sum of Re 6P @ - Sum of Re 6Z @
sA =
P-Z
^0 - 1 - 2h - ^0 h
=
=- 3 =- 1
3-0
3
SOL 1.2.8
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 86
Chap 1
1+
or
^- 1 + j h3 + 7 ^- 1 + j h2 + 12 ^- 1 + j h + K = 0
or
- 10 + K = 0
So,
K =+ 10
SOL 1.2.9
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
fD = !6180c + f@
where f is the net angle contribution at this pole due to all other poles and
zeros. So, we have
f = fZ + fZ - fP
1
where
f Z =-^90c + qh
1
and
fP = 90c
Therefore, we get
f =- 135c + 116.56c - 90c
=- 108.44c
Hence, angle of departure will be
fD = !6180c - 108.44c@
= !671.56c@
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 87
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
fA = !6180c - f@
where, f is the net angle contribution at this zero due to all other poles and
zeros. So, we have
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
f = fZ - fP - fP
1
where
fZ = 90c
fP = tan-1 2 = 45c
2
fP = tan-1 4 = 63.43c
2
1
fA = !6180c - f@
= !6180c + 18.43c@
= !6198.43c@
SOL 1.2.11
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
^s + 2h^s + 10h
10
The break away point is given by solution of
dK = 0
ds
Substituting equation (1) in the above expression, we have
^s + 2h + ^s + 10h = 0
Page 88
Chap 1
K =
or
...(1)
or
2s + 12 = 0
or
s =- 6
The point s = ^- 6, j0h is the break-away point. Therefore, root locus will be
as shown below.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
q1 = 135c
which is given by
or
or
135c = tan-1 a w k
-6
w =6
Hence, point p will be ^- 6 + j6h. So, the gain K at point p is
s + 2 s + 10
K =
10
s =- 6 + j6
- 4 + j6 4 + j6
=
= 5.2
10
SOL 1.2.12
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 89
Chap 1
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
G ^s h H ^s h =
K
=1
s ^s + 10h^s + 20h
or
K = s ^s + 10h^s + 20h
The break points of the system are given by solution of
dK = 0
ds
d s3 + 30s2 + 200s = 0
or
@
ds 6
or
or
So,
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
s =- 4.226
The value of K at point s 0 is given by
G ^s h H ^s h = 1 at s = s 0
K
or
=1
s s + 10 s + 20 s = s
s s + 10 s + 20
So,
K =
1
s=s
where s 0 =- 4.226 is break away point, given as
0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 90
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
SOL 1.2.15
1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0
K ^s2 + 4h
or
=0
1+
s ^s + 2h
^s2 + 2s h
or
K =- 2
s +4
The break points of the root locus are given by solution of
dK = 0
ds
or
o
.c
a
i
d
2
^s2 + 4h
i. n
=0
or
2s2 - 8s - 8 = 0
or
s2 - 4s - 4 = 0
So,
s = 4.82 , - 0.82
The root locus will be on real axis at any point, if total number of poles and
zeros are odd to the right of that point.
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 91
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 0.47
SOL 1.2.17
MP = e 1 - x
For K = 12.2 , damping ratio is x = 0.47 . So, we have
2
-0.47p
MP = e 1 - ^0.47h
= 0.187
SOL 1.2.18
Correct answer is - 1.
The overall transfer function of the system is
1
C ^s h
s ^s + 1h
=
1
R ^s h
1+
^as + 1h
s ^s + 1h
1
= 2
s + ^a + 1h s + 1
So, we have the characteristic equation as
s2 + ^a + 1h s + 1 = 0
or
s 2 + s + 1 + as = 0
or
=0
1 + 2 as
s +s+1
Comparing it to 1 + G ^s h H ^s h = 0 , we have the open loop transfer function
G ^ s h H ^ s h = 2 as
s +s+1
Also, we have
-^s2 + s + 1h
a =
s
The break points are given by solution of
da = 0
ds
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
So,
=0
s2
or
s2 - 1 = 0
or
s =! 1
The point s =+ 1 does not lie on root locus and s =- 1 lies on root locus.
Hence, break away point is s =- 1.
SOL 1.2.19
Correct answer is 1.
We know that, on the break away point system has multiple poles. If break
away point is on real axis, then multiple poles should be real and equal,
and in this case, system have critically damped response. Hence, value of
parameter a for critical damping will be equal to value of a at break away
point. For the given system, breakaway point is
s =- 1
So, the value of a at s =- 1 is obtained as
G ^s h H ^s h = 1
a s
or
=1
2
s + s + 1 s =- 1
^- 1h2 + ^- 1h + 1
a =
=1
^- 1h
i. n
SOL 1.2.20
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
and
SOL 1.2.21
3P = 9 & P = 3
K = P3
= ^3h3
= 27
s = s0
= ! 180
Since, we have
G ^s h H ^s h s =- 3 + j5 =
So,
G ^s h H ^s h
s =- 3 + j5
K
^- 3 + j5 + 1h^- 3 + j5 + 5h
K
=
2
+
j
5h^2 + j5h
^
=- tan-1 b 5 l - tan-1 b 5 l
-2
2
=- 180c + tan-1 5 - tan-1 5
2
2
=- 180c
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i.e. the given point satisfies angle criterion. Now, using magnitude condition,
we have
G ^s h H ^s h s =- 3 + j5 = 1
or
or
Thus,
Page 93
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
K
=1
^- 2 + j5h^2 + j5h
K
=1
4 + 25 4 + 25
K = 29
***********
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 1.3
Page 94
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
SOL 1.3.1
SOL 1.3.2
SOL 1.3.3
SOL 1.3.4
SOL 1.3.5
SOL 1.3.6
SOL 1.3.7
SOL 1.3.8
SOL 1.3.9
SOL 1.3.10
SOL 1.3.11
SOL 1.3.12
SOL 1.3.13
SOL 1.3.14
SOL 1.3.15
SOL 1.3.16
SOL 1.3.17
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 95
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
fA = 60c; q = 0
fA = 180c; q = 1
fA = 300c - 60c; q = 2
S real of poles - S real of zeros
sA
P-Z
"^- 2h + ^- 2h + ^- 1h + 0, - ^- 3h
=
4-1
=- 2
3
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 1.3.19
SOL 1.3.20
SOL 1.3.21
SOL 1.3.22
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
s4
s2
^K + 1h
s1
16 - 4K
5
s0
K+1
^K + 1h
i. n
o
.c
SOL 1.3.24
SOL 1.3.25
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
#OLP - #OLZ = 4 - 0 = 4
(2) There will be four separate root because the order of polynomial is four.
(3) Asymptotes will intersect at sA ,
sA =
^0 - 1 - 2 - 3h - ^0 h
=- 6 =- 3
2
4-0
4
SOL 1.3.26
SOL 1.3.27
SOL 1.3.28
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 1.3.29
SOL 1.3.30
SOL 1.3.31
Page 97
Chap 1
Root Locus Technique
***********
in
.
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Eighth Edition
GATE
Electromagnetics
Vol 10 of 10
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 590.00
To Our Parents
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GATE Electronics & Communications:
Electromagnetics :
Elements of vector calculus: divergence and curl; Gauss and Stokes theorems, Maxwells equations: differential
and integral forms. Wave equation, Poynting vector. Plane waves: propagation through various media; reflection
and refraction; phase and group velocity; skin depth. Transmission lines: characteristic impedance; impedance
transformation; Smith chart; impedance matching; S parameters, pulse excitation. Waveguides: modes in rectangular
waveguides; boundary conditions; cut-off frequencies; dispersion relations. Basics of propagation in dielectric
waveguide and optical fibers. Basics of Antennas: Dipole antennas; radiation pattern; antenna gain.
IES Electrical
EM Theory
Electric and magnetic fields. Gausss Law and Amperes Law. Fields in dielectrics, conductors and magnetic
materials. Maxwells equations. Time varying fields. Plane-Wave propagating in dielectric and conducting media.
Transmission lines.
**********
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
VECTOR ANALYSIS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.2
VECTOR QUANTITY
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1
1
1.2.1
Representation of a Vector
1.2.2
Unit Vector
1.3.1
Scaling of a Vector
1.3.2
Addition of Vectors
1.3.3
Position Vector
1.3.4
Distance Vector
MULTIPLICATION OF VECTORS 3
1.4.1
Scalar Product
1.4.2
1.4.3
Triple Product
1.4.4
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
3
4
5
6
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
11
1.6.1
Coordinate Conversion
11
1.6.2
1.6.3
Transformation of a Vector
12
13
1.7.1
13
1.7.2
13
1.7.3
13
1.8
INTEGRAL CALCULUS
13
1.9
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS
14
1.9.1
Gradient of a Scalar
14
1.9.2
Divergence of a Vector
15
1.9.3
Curl of a Vector
15
1.9.4
Laplacian Operator
16
11
1.10
INTEGRAL THEOREMS
17
1.10.1
Divergence theorem
17
1.10.2
Stokes Theorem
17
1.10.3
Helmholtzs Theorem
17
EXERCISE 1.1
18
EXERCISE 1.2
25
EXERCISE 1.3
29
EXERCISE 1.4
31
SOLUTIONS 1.1
35
SOLUTIONS 1.2
50
SOLUTIONS 1.3
61
SOLUTIONS 1.4
63
CHAPTER 2
ELECTROSTATIC FIELDS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
2.2
ELECTRIC CHARGE
67
2.2.1
Point Charge
67
2.2.2
Line Charge
67
2.2.3
Surface Charge
67
2.2.4
Volume Charge
68
2.3
2.4
COULOMBS LAW
67
68
2.3.1
2.3.2
Principle of Superposition
2.4.2
70
2.4.3
71
2.6
GAUSSS LAW
2.6.1
2.9
69
2.8
69
2.4.1
2.5
2.7
68
71
72
Gaussian Surface
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
69
72
73
2.7.1
Potential Difference
2.7.2
Potential Gradient 73
2.7.3
Equipotential Surfaces
73
73
74
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
ELECTRIC DIPOLE
75
74
74
74
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
EXERCISE 2.1
76
EXERCISE 2.2
84
EXERCISE 2.3
89
EXERCISE 2.4
91
SOLUTIONS 2.1
99
SOLUTIONS 2.2
114
SOLUTIONS 2.3
127
SOLUTIONS 2.4
129
CHAPTER 3
75
INTRODUCTION
3.2
3.3
CONTINUITY EQUATION
3.4
3.6
3.7
75
3.1
3.5
75
141
141
142
142
3.4.1
Electric Susceptibility
142
3.4.2
Dielectric Constant
142
3.4.3
143
3.5.1
143
3.5.2
144
3.5.3
144
CAPACITOR
144
3.6.1
Capacitance
145
3.6.2
3.7.1
Uniqueness Theorem
EXERCISE 3.1
147
EXERCISE 3.2
156
EXERCISE 3.3
161
EXERCISE 3.4
163
SOLUTIONS 3.1
172
SOLUTIONS 3.2
186
SOLUTIONS 3.3
200
SOLUTIONS 3.4
201
145
145
142
CHAPTER 4
MAGNETOSTATIC FIELDS
4.1
INTRODUCTION
4.2
213
4.2.1
Magnetic Flux
213
4.2.2
214
4.2.3
214
4.2.4
Relation between Magnetic Field Intensity (H) and Magnetic Flux Density (B)
4.3
213
BIOT-SAVARTS LAW
214
4.3.1
215
4.3.2
215
4.4
4.5
4.6
217
4.5.2
217
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
219
4.6.2
219
220
EXERCISE 4.2
226
EXERCISE 4.3
232
EXERCISE 4.4
235
SOLUTIONS 4.1
240
SOLUTIONS 4.2
254
SOLUTIONS 4.3
272
SOLUTIONS 4.4
274
CHAPTER 5
216
217
218
218
218
4.6.1
EXERCISE 4.1
5.1
INTRODUCTION
5.2
MAGNETIC FORCES
5.3
216
4.5.1
MAGNETIC POTENTIAL
214
281
281
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
281
282
282
282
282
5.4
MAGNETIC TORQUE
5.4.1
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
284
MAGNETIZATION IN MATERIALS
284
284
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
285
285
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
MAGNETIC ENERGY
5.7.2
EXERCISE 5.1
289
EXERCISE 5.2
300
EXERCISE 5.3
306
EXERCISE 5.4
308
SOLUTIONS 5.1
313
SOLUTIONS 5.2
331
SOLUTIONS 5.3
347
SOLUTIONS 5.4
349
CHAPTER 6
287
287
287
287
6.1
INTRODUCTION
6.2
355
6.2.1
355
6.2.2
356
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
287
287
5.7.1
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT
285
357
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
INDUCTANCE
355
357
357
357
357
6.5.1
Self Inductance
357
6.5.2
Mutual Inductance
358
6.6.1
6.6.2
359
284
6.6.3
6.7
361
363
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
EXERCISE 6.1
365
EXERCISE 6.2
374
EXERCISE 6.3
378
EXERCISE 6.4
381
SOLUTIONS 6.1
390
SOLUTIONS 6.2
404
SOLUTIONS 6.3
413
SOLUTIONS 6.4
416
CHAPTER 7
INTRODUCTION
7.2
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
364
425
425
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
426
7.3
7.4
7.6
363
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
7.1
7.5
363
426
7.4.1
428
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
Intrinsic Impedance
7.4.6
Loss Tangent
428
429
429
429
429
430
7.5.1
Attenuation Constant
430
7.5.2
Phase Constant
7.5.3
Propagation Constant
7.5.4
7.5.5
Intrinsic Impedance
7.5.6
430
430
431
431
7.6.1
Attenuation Constant
7.6.2
Phase Constant
432
431
431
431
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.6.3
Propagation Constant
432
7.6.4
7.6.5
Intrinsic Impedance
7.6.6
432
432
433
7.7.1
Attenuation Constant
433
7.7.2
Phase Constant
7.7.3
Propagation Constant
7.7.4
7.7.5
Intrinsic Impedance
7.7.6
433
433
434
434
7.8.1
Poyntings Theorem
7.8.2
434
434
434
WAVE POLARIZATION
436
7.9.1
Linear Polarization
436
7.9.2
Elliptical Polarization
436
7.9.3
Circular Polarization
436
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.11.1
7.11.2
438
439
439
7.12.1
7.12.2
440
440
7.13.1
Parallel Polarization
440
7.13.2
Perpendicular Polarization
441
7.14.1
Parallel Polarisation
7.14.2
Perpendicular Polarisation
EXERCISE 7.1
444
EXERCISE 7.2
451
EXERCISE 7.3
454
EXERCISE 7.4
459
SOLUTIONS 7.1
474
SOLUTIONS 7.2
489
SOLUTIONS 7.3
498
442
442
442
SOLUTIONS 7.4
CHAPTER 8
502
TRANSMISSION LINES
8.1
INTRODUCTION
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
525
8.2.1
Primary Constants
525
8.2.2
Secondary Constants
526
525
527
8.3.1
8.3.2
Reflection Coefficient
529
8.4.1
529
8.4.2
529
8.4.3
8.4.4
529
530
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.7
SMITH CHART
530
530
8.7.1
532
8.7.2
533
8.7.3
533
531
534
8.8.1
8.8.2
Bounce Diagram
537
EXERCISE 8.2
545
EXERCISE 8.3
549
EXERCISE 8.4
551
SOLUTIONS 8.1
567
SOLUTIONS 8.2
586
SOLUTIONS 8.3
597
SOLUTIONS 8.4
599
CHAPTER 9
WAVEGUIDES
INTRODUCTION
530
532
EXERCISE 8.1
9.1
529
8.5.1
8.6
8.8
528
623
535
535
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.3.1
TE Mode
624
9.3.2
TM Mode
625
9.3.3
TEM Mode
625
RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
626
TM Modes
626
9.4.2
TE Modes
628
9.4.3
CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE
630
9.5.1
TM Modes
631
9.5.2
TE Modes
632
WAVEGUIDE RESONATOR
TM Mode
633
9.6.2
TE Mode
633
9.6.3
Quality Factor
634
EXERCISE 9.2
640
EXERCISE 9.3
644
EXERCISE 9.4
646
SOLUTIONS 9.1
656
SOLUTIONS 9.2
664
SOLUTIONS 9.3
675
SOLUTIONS 9.4
677
CHAPTER 10
629
632
9.6.1
635
10.1
INTRODUCTION
10.2
ANTENNA BASICS
10.4
624
9.4.1
EXERCISE 9.1
10.3
623
687
687
10.2.1
Types of Antenna
10.2.2
10.2.3
Antenna Parameters
687
689
689
RADIATION FUNDAMENTALS
691
10.3.1
Concept of Radiation
691
10.3.2
Retarded Potentials
692
10.4.1
693
10.4.2
693
10.4.3
10.4.4
694
694
10.5
10.5.1
694
10.5.2
695
10.5.3
695
10.6
696
10.7
696
10.8
696
10.9
694
10.8.1
10.8.2
697
697
10.9.1
698
10.9.2
698
698
699
700
EXERCISE 10.1
701
EXERCISE 10.2
707
EXERCISE 10.3
710
EXERCISE 10.4
711
SOLUTIONS 10.1
719
SOLUTIONS 10.2
731
SOLUTIONS 10.3
740
SOLUTIONS 10.4
741
***********
696
698
CHAPTER 6
Page 355
Chap 6
6.1
INTRODUCTION
Maxwells equations are very popular and they are known as Electromagnetic
Field Equations. The main aim of this chapter is to provide sufficient
background and concepts on Maxwells equations. They include:
Faradays law of electromagnetic induction for three different cases:
time-varying magnetic field, moving conductor with static magnetic
field, and the general case of moving conductor with time-varying
magnetic field.
Lenzs law which gives direction of the induced current in the loop
associated with magnetic flux change.
Concept of self and mutual inductance
Maxwells equations for static and time varying fields in free space and
conductive media in differential and integral form
6.2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
6.2.1
# E : dL
...(6.2)
...(6.3)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.2.2
6.3
LENZS LAW
The negative sign in Faraday equation is due to Lenzs law which states that
the direction of emf induced opposes the cause producing it. To understand the
Lenzs law, consider the two conducting loops placed in magnetic fields with
increasing and decreasing flux densities respectively as shown in Figure 6.1.
i. n
(a)
o
.c
a
i
d
(b)
Figure 6.1: Determination of Direction of Induced Current in a Loop according to Lenzs Law
(a) B in Upward Direction Increasing with Time (b) B in Upward Direction Decreasing
with Time
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.4
Page 357
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
According to Faradays law, for a flux variation through a loop, there will
be induced emf in the loop. The variation of flux with time may be caused
in following three ways:
6.4.1
6.4.2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
#E
L
: dL =
# ^u # B h : dL
L
6.4.3
This is the general case of induced emf when a conducting loop is moving
in time varying magnetic field. Combining the above two results, total emf
induced is
Vemf = E : dL =- 2B : dS + ^u # B h : dL
L
S 2t
L
or,
Vemf = - 2B : dS + ^u # B h : dL
S 2t
L
4 2 4444 3
1 44
4 2 444 3 1 444
motional emf
transformer emf
Using Stokes theorem, we can write the above equation in differential form
as
d # E =-2B + d # ^u # B h
2t
6.5
INDUCTANCE
6.5.1
Self Inductance
Consider a circuit carrying a varying current which produces varying
magnetic field which in turn produces induced emf in the circuit to oppose
the change in flux. The emf induced is called emf of self-induction because
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
the change in flux is produced by the circuit itself. This phenomena is called
self-induction and the property of the circuit to produce self-induction is
known as self inductance.
i. n
o
.c
6.5.2
a
i
d
o
n
Mutual Inductance
.
w
w
F 12 =
#B
S1
: dS
We define the mutual inductance M12 as the ratio of the flux linkage on coil
1 to current I2 , i.e.
M12 = N1 F 12
I2
where N1 is the number turns in coil 1. Similarly, the mutual inductance M21
is defined as the ratio of flux linkage on coil 2 (produced by current in coil
1) to current I1 , i.e.
M21 = N2 F 21
I1
The unit of mutual inductance is Henry (H). If the medium surrounding
the circuits is linear, then
M12 = M21
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MAXWELLS EQUATIONS
The set of four equations which have become known as Maxwells equations
are those which are developed in the earlier chapters and associated with
them the name of other investigators. These equations describe the sources
and the field vectors in the broad fields to electrostatics, magnetostatics and
electro-magnetic induction.
6.6.1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
# D : dS
S
# r dv
(Integral form)
i. n
o
.c
d:B = 0
or,
# B : dS
S
=0
(Differential form)
(Integral form)
a
i
d
This is the Gauss law for static magnetic fields, which confirms the nonexistence of magnetic monopole. Table 6.1 summarizes the Maxwells
equation for time varying fields.
o
n
.
w
w
1.
2.
3.
Integral form
d # E = -2B
2t
2 B : dS
#
# E : dL = -2
t
Faradays law of
electromagnetic
induction
d # H = J + 2D
2t
# H : dL = # cJ +22Dt m : dS
Modified Amperes
circuital law
d : D = rv
# D : dS
4.
d:B = 0
# r dv
# B : dS = 0
S
6.6.2
Name
Gauss
law
Electrostatics
of
Gauss law of
Magnetostatic (nonexistence of magnetic
mono-pole)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
d#E = 0
1.
Name
# E : dL = 0
Faradays
law
of
electromagnetic induction
# H : dL = # J : dS
# D : dS = # r dv
# B : dS = 0
d#H = J
2.
d : D = rv
3.
d:B = 0
4.
6.6.3
Page 361
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
E = Re #Es e jwt D = Re #Ds e jwt B = Re #Bs e jwt -
...(6.8a)
...(6.8b)
...(6.8c)
jwt
...(6.8d)
H = Re #Hs e jwt
...(6.8e)
J = Re #Js e jwt
and
...(6.8f)
r v = Re #r vs e where Es, Ds, Bs, Hs, Js and r vs are the phasor forms of respective field
quantities. Using these relations, we can directly obtain the phasor form of
Maxwells equations as described below.
Maxwells First Equation: Faradays Law
...(6.9)
(Differential form)
# E : dL =- jw # B : dS
L
(Integral form)
...(6.10)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(Differential form)
# H : dL = # ^J + jwD h : dS
s
(Integral form)
...(6.11)
i. n
o
.c
# D : dS
s
ia
#r
d
o
vs
(Differential form)
(Integral form)
dv
n
.
w
w
d:B = 0
From equation (6.8c) we can obtain
...(6.12)
Hence,
or,
Re #4: Bs e jwt - = 0
4: Bs = 0
# B : dS
S
(Differential form)
=0
(Integral form)
1.
d # Es =- jwBs
Integral form
# E : dL = - jw # B : dS
Faradays law of
electromagnetic induction
# H : dL = # ^J + jwD h : dS
Modified
circuital law
2.
4# Hs = Js + jwDs
3.
4: Ds = r vs
d : Bs = 0
#r
# B : dS = 0
S
# D : dS
S
4.
Name
vs
dv
Amperes
Gauss
law
Electrostatics
of
Gauss
law
of
Magnetostatic
(nonexistence of magnetic
mono-pole)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.7.1
Page 363
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Table 6.4: Maxwells Equations for Time Varying Fields in Free Space
1.
2.
3.
Integral form
Name
d # E =-2B
2t
2 B : dS
#
# E : dL = -2
t
d # H = 2D
2t
# H : dL = # 22Dt : dS
d:D = 0
# D : dS = 0
# B : dS = 0
4.
d:B = 0
6.7.2
S.N. Differential
Form
1.
d#E = 0
Integral Form
# E : dL = 0
# H : dL = 0
# D : dS = 0
# B : dS = 0
2.
d#H = 0
Name
3.
d:D = 0
4.
d:B = 0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Thus, all the four Maxwells equation vanishes for static fields in free
space.
6.7.3
1.
Integral form
d # Es =- jwBs
# E : dL = - jw # B : dS
Faradays
law
of
electromagnetic induction
# H : dL = # jwD : dS
Modified
circuital law
# D : dS = 0
# B : dS = 0
2.
d # H s = jw D s
3.
d : Ds = 0
4.
d : Bs = 0
Name
Amperes
i. n
o
.c
***********
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.1
Page 365
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
MCQ 6.1.1
A perfect conducting sphere of radius r is such that its net charge resides
on the surface. At any time t , magnetic field B (r, t) inside the sphere will be
(A) 0
(B) uniform, independent of r
(C) uniform, independent of t
(D) uniform, independent of both r and t
MCQ 6.1.2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Assertion (A) : A small piece of bar magnet takes several seconds to emerge
at bottom when it is dropped down a vertical aluminum pipe where as an
identical unmagnetized piece takes a fraction of second to reach the bottom.
Reason (R) : When the bar magnet is dropped inside a conducting pipe,
force exerted on the magnet by induced eddy current is in upward direction.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is correct explanation of A.
(B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(C) A is true but R is false.
(D) A is false but R is true.
MCQ 6.1.4
Self inductance of a long solenoid having n turns per unit length will be
proportional to
(A) n
(B) 1/n
2
(C) n
(D) 1/n2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.5
A long straight wire carries a current I = I 0 cos (wt). If the current returns
along a coaxial conducting tube of radius r as shown in figure then magnetic
field and electric field inside the tube will be respectively.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Assertion (A) : Two coils are wound around a cylindrical core such that the
primary coil has N1 turns and the secondary coils has N2 turns as shown in
figure. If the same flux passes through every turn of both coils then the ratio
of emf induced in the two coils is
Vemf 2 = N2
Vemf 1
N1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.9
MCQ 6.1.10
Page 367
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.11
If the loop is pulled away from the straight wire at a velocity of 5 m/s then
the induced e.m.f. in the loop after 0.6 sec will be
(A) 5 mvolt
(B) 2.5 mvolt
(C) 25 mvolt
(D) 5 mvolt
MCQ 6.1.12
If the loop is pulled downward in the parallel direction to the straight wire,
such that distance between the loop and wire is always 3 m then the induced
e.m.f. in the loop at any time t will be
(A) linearly increasing with t
(B) always 0
(C) linearly decreasing with t
(D) always constant but not zero.
MCQ 6.1.13
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(A) VA = VB
(C) VA = RA
VB RB
(B) VA =- VB
(D) VA =- RA
VB
RB
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 6.1.14
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.1.15
MCQ 6.1.16
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 369
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.18
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 370
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
MCQ 6.1.19
MCQ 6.1.20
A current filament located on the x -axis in free space with in the interval
- 0.1 < x < 0.1 m carries current I (t) = 8t A in ax direction. If the retarded
vector potential at point P (0, 0, 2) be A (t) then the plot of A (t) versus time
will be
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.23
MCQ 6.1.24
Page 371
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
What will be the circulation of the induced electric field around the loop ?
16
(B) 8
(A)
x
x ^x + 2h
x ^x + 2h
8
(C)
(D)
16
x ^x + 2h
MCQ 6.1.25
MCQ 6.1.26
MCQ 6.1.27
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.28
Magnetic flux density, B = 0.1t az Tesla threads only the loop abcd lying in
the plane xy as shown in the figure.
V2
V3
(A) 66.7 mV
33.3 mV
66.7 mV
(B) 33.3 mV
66.7 mV
(C) 66.7 mV
66.7 mV
(D) 33.3 mV
66.7 mV
o
.c
i. n
33.3 mV
33.3 mV
66.7 mV
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.29
If the angular velocity, w = 2 rad/ sec then the induced e.m.f. in the loop
will be
(A) 2 sin q mV/m
(B) 2 cos q mV/m
(C) 4 cos q mV/m
(D) 4 sin q mV/m
MCQ 6.1.30
MCQ 6.1.31
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Consider the figure shown below. Let B = 10 cos 120pt Wb/m2 and assume
that the magnetic field produced by i (t) is negligible
MCQ 6.1.32
MCQ 6.1.33
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.2
Page 374
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
QUES 6.2.1
QUES 6.2.2
i. n
o
.c
QUES 6.2.3
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 6.2.4
QUES 6.2.5
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 6.2.7
QUES 6.2.8
Page 375
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
A magnetic core of uniform cross section having two coils (Primary and
secondary) wound on it as shown in figure. The no. of turns of primary
coil is 5000 and no. of turns of secondary coil is 3000. If a voltage source of
12 volt is connected across the primary coil then what will be the voltage (in
Volt) across the secondary coil ?
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 6.2.10
An infinitely long straight wire with a closed switch S carries a uniform current
I = 4 A as shown in figure. A square loop of side a = 2 m and resistance
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 376
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
QUES 6.2.11
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 6.2.12
QUES 6.2.13
In a certain region a test charge is moving with an angular velocity 2 rad/ sec
along a circular path of radius 2 m centred at origin in the x -y plane. If
the magnetic flux density in the region isB = 2az Wb/m2 then the electric
field viewed by an observer moving with the test charge is ____ V/m in
a r direction.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 377
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
QUES 6.2.15
QUES 6.2.16
QUES 6.2.17
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 6.2.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.3
Page 378
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
MCQ 6.3.1
Match List I with List II and select the correct answer using the codes given
below (Notations have their usual meaning)
List-I
a
1.
d : D = rv
Faradays law
2.
d:B = 0
Gausss law
3.
d # E =-2B
2t
4.
d # H = J + 2D
2t
Codes :
a
(A) 4
(B)
4
(C)
2
(D) 4
MCQ 6.3.2
List-II
b
3
1
3
3
c
2
3
1
1
d
1
2
4
2
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.3.3
MCQ 6.3.4
A closed surface S defines the boundary line of magnetic medium such that
the field intensity inside it is B . Total outward magnetic flux through the
closed surface will be
(A) B : S
(B) 0
(C) B # S
(D) none of these
MCQ 6.3.5
The total magnetic flux through a conducting loop having electric field
E = 0 inside it will be
(A) 0
(B) constant
(C) varying with time only
(D) varying with time and area of the surface both
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.3.7
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.3.9
(B) d # B = mJ
(D) d # B = 0
(B) J
(D) 2J/2t
MCQ 6.3.11
MCQ 6.3.12
MCQ 6.3.8
MCQ 6.3.10
Page 379
Chap 6
o
(B) E =- dV - A
(D) E =- dV - D
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.3.13
MCQ 6.3.14
If E is a vector, then d : d # E is
(A) 0
(C) does not exist
MCQ 6.3.15
MCQ 6.3.16
MCQ 6.3.17
(B) 1
(D) none of these
(B) B = H
m
(D) none of these
(B) s = 0
(D) none of these
o +J
(B) d # H = D
(D) none of these
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
***********
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.4
Page 381
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
MCQ 6.4.1
GATE 2009
MCQ 6.4.2
GATE 2008
MCQ 6.4.3
GATE 2007
MCQ 6.4.4
GATE 2003
MCQ 6.4.5
GATE 1998
MCQ 6.4.6
GATE 1998
MCQ 6.4.7
IES EC 2012
MCQ 6.4.8
IES EC 2011
y
A magnetic field in air is measured to be B = B 0 c 2 x 2 ay - 2
ax
x +y
x + y2 m
What current distribution leads to this field ?
[Hint : The algebra is trivial in cylindrical coordinates.]
(A) J = B 0 z c 2 1 2 m, r ! 0
(B) J =- B 0 z c 2 2 2 m, r ! 0
m0 x + y
m0 x + y
(C) J = 0, r ! 0
(D) J = B 0 z c 2 1 2 m, r ! 0
m0 x + y
For static electric and magnetic fields in an inhomogeneous source-free
medium, which of the following represents the correct form of Maxwells
equations ?
(A) d : E = 0 , d # B = 0
(B) d : E = 0 , d : B = 0
(C) d # E = 0 , d # B = 0
(D) d # E = 0 , d : B = 0
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(B) Ampere/meter
(D) Ampere-meter
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.9
IES EC 2011
Assuming that each loop is stationary and time varying magnetic field B
, induces current I , which of the configurations in the figures are correct ?
(A) 1, 2, 3 and 4
(C) 2 and 4 only
i. n
MCQ 6.4.10
IES EC 2011
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.4.11
IES EC 2009
MCQ 6.4.12
IES EC 2009
MCQ 6.4.13
IES EC 2009
MCQ 6.4.14
IES EC 2009
A single turn loop is situated in air, with a uniform magnetic field normal to
its plane. The area of the loop is 5 m2 and the rate of charge of flux density
is 2 Wb/m2 /s . What is the emf appearing at the terminals of the loop ?
(A) - 5 V
(B) - 2 V
(C) - 0.4 V
(D) - 10 V
Which of the following equations results from the circuital form of Amperes law ?
(A) d # E =-2B
(B) d : B = 0
2t
(C) d : D = r
(D) d # H = J + 2D
2t
Assertion (A) : Capacitance of a solid conducting spherical body of radius
a is given by 4pe0 a in free space.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.16
IES EC 2006
MCQ 6.4.17
IES EC 2006
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Match List I (Electromagnetic Law) with List II (Different Form) and select
the correct answer using the code given below the lists :
a.
b.
c.
d.
List-II
Amperes law
1.
4: D = rv
Faradays law
2.
4: J =-2h
2t
Gauss law
3.
4# H = J + 2D
2t
Current
4.
4# E =-2B
2t
Codes :
a
(A) 1
(B)
3
(C)
1
(D) 3
IES EC 2004
Two conducting thin coils X and Y (identical except for a thin cut in coil
Y ) are placed in a uniform magnetic field which is decreasing at a constant
rate. If the plane of the coils is perpendicular to the field lines, which of the
following statement is correct ? As a result, emf is induced in
(A) both the coils
(B)
coil Y only
(C) coil X only
(D) none of the two coils
List-I
MCQ 6.4.18
Page 383
Chap 6
b
2
4
4
2
c
3
1
3
1
d
4
2
2
4
Two metal rings 1 and 2 are placed in a uniform magnetic field which is
decreasing with time with their planes perpendicular to the field. If the rings
are identical except that ring 2 has a thin air gap in it, which one of the
following statements is correct ?
(A) No e.m.f is induced in ring 1
(B) An e.m.f is induced in both the rings
(C) Equal Joule heating occurs in both the rings
(D) Joule heating does not occur in either ring.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.19
IES EC 2003
Which one of the following Maxwells equations gives the basic idea of
radiation ?
d # H = 2D/2t
4
d # E = 2B/2t
d:D = r
3
(C)
d:D = 0
(B)
(A)
(D)
d # E =- 2B/2t
4
d : D =- 2B/2t
d:B = r
4
d # H = ^2D/2t h
MCQ 6.4.20
IES EC 2001
(A) d # H = 2D + J
2t
(B) d # E = 2H
2t
(C) d : D = r
(D) d : B = 0
MCQ 6.4.21
IES EC 2001
Match List I (Maxwell equation) with List II (Description) and select the
correct answer :
List I
a.
b.
# B : dS = 0
# D : dS = #v rv dv
c.
B $ dS
# E : dl =- # 2
2t
d.
J)
: dS
# H : dl = # 2(D2+
t
a
i
d
.
w
w
1.
The mmf around a closed path is equal to the conduction current plus
the time derivative of the electric displacement current through any
surface bounded by the path.
2.
The emf around a closed path is equal to the time derivative is equal
to the time derivative of the magnetic displacement through any
surface bounded by the path.
3.
4.
The net magnetic flux emerging through any closed surface is zero.
Codes :
a
(A) 1
(B)
4
(C)
4
(D) 1
IES EE 2012
o
.c
o
n
List II
MCQ 6.4.22
i. n
b
3
3
2
2
c
2
2
3
3
d
4
1
1
4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.24
IES EE 2009
MCQ 6.4.25
IES EE 2009
(B) d # H = Jc
(C) d # H = 2D
2t
(D) d # H = D
IES EE 2009
MCQ 6.4.27
IES EE 2008
Magnetic field intensity is H = 3ax + 7yay + 2xaz A/m. What is the current
density J A/m2 ?
(B) - 7az
(A) - 2ay
(C) 3ax
(D) 12ay
A circular loop placed perpendicular to a uniform sinusoidal magnetic field
of frequency w1 is revolved about an axis through its diameter at an angular
velocity w 2 rad/sec (w 2 < w1) as shown in the figure below. What are the
frequencies for the e.m.f induced in the loop ?
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) w1 and w 2
(C) w 2, w1 - w 2 and w 2
MCQ 6.4.26
Page 385
Chap 6
MCQ 6.4.28
IES EE 2006
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.29
IES EE 2007
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.4.30
IES EE 2007
i. n
Which one of the following equations is not Maxwells equation for a static
electromagnetic field in a linear homogeneous medium ?
o
.c
(B) d # D = v0
(A) d : B = 0
(C)
MCQ 6.4.31
IES EE 2004
#c B : dl = m0 I
Match List I with List II and select the correct answer using the codes given
below :
List II
Continuity equation
1. d H = J + 2D
#
2t
Amperes law
2.
Displacement current
3. d E =-2B
#
2t
Faradays law
4.
Codes :
a
(A) 4
(B)
4
(C)
2
(D) 2
IES EE 2002
o
n
.
w
w
List I
MCQ 6.4.32
a
i
d
(D) d2 A = m0 J
b
3
1
3
1
c
2
2
4
4
J = 2D
2t
2r
d # J =- v
2t
d
1
3
1
3
The magnetic flux through each turn of a 100 turn coil is (t3 - 2t) milliWebers where t is in seconds. The induced e.m.f at t = 2 s is
(A) 1 V
(B) - 1 V
(C) 0.4 V
(D) - 0.4 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
List II
Page 387
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
1. d : A = 0
d#A ! 0
b
2. d : A ! 0
d#A = 0
c
d
3. d : A ! 0
4. d : A = 0
Codes :
a
(A) 4
(B)
4
(C)
2
(D) 2
MCQ 6.4.34
IES EE 2003
b
2
2
4
4
c
3
1
3
1
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V =-
IES EE 2002
dfm
dt
#l x : dl = #s (d # x) : ds
MCQ 6.4.36
# D : ds = #v rdv
IES EE 2003
d#A = 0
d
1
3
1
3
MCQ 6.4.35
d#A ! 0
1.
2.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.37
IES EE 2002
MCQ 6.4.38
IES EE 2002
For linear isotropic materials, both E and H have the time dependence e jwt
and regions of interest are free of charge. The value of d # H is given by
(A) sE
(B) jweE
(C) sE + jweE
(D) sE - jweE
Which of the following equations is/are not Maxwells equations(s) ?
2r
(A) d : J =- v
(B) d : D = rv
2t
(C) d : E =-2B
(D) # H : dl = # b sE + e2E l : ds
2t
2t
s
Select the correct answer using the codes given below :
(A) 2 and 4
(B) 1 alone
(C) 1 and 3
(D) 1 and 4
MCQ 6.4.39
IES EE 2001
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.4.40
Given that d # H = J + 2D
2t
IES EE 2001
MCQ 6.4.41
IES EE 2001
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Consider coils C1, C2, C 3 and C 4 (shown in the given figures) which are placed
in the time-varying electric field E (t) and electric field produced by the coils
C l2, C l3 and C l4 carrying time varying current I (t) respectively :
Page 389
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
a.
List II
1. d : D = r
Gausss law
b. Amperes law
2. d E =-2B
#
2t
c.
3.
P = E#H
4.
F = q ^E + v # B h
Faradays law
d. Poynting vector
5. d H = J + 2D
#
c
2t
Codes :
a
(A) 1
(B)
3
(C)
1
(D) 3
b
2
5
5
2
c
4
2
2
4
d
3
1
3
1
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.1
Page 390
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.1.1
SOL 6.1.2
i. n
o
.c
o
n
a
i
d
.
w
w
Vab =-
# E : dl
a
Thus, the positive terminal of voltage will be a and Vab will be positive.
SOL 6.1.3
Suppose the current I in the magnet flows counter clockwise (viewed from
above) as shown in figure. So near the ends of pipe, its field points upward.
A ring of pipe below the magnet experiences an increasing upward flux as
the magnet approaches and hence by Lenzs law a current will be induced in
it such as to produce downward flux.
Thus, Iind must flow clockwise which is opposite to the current in the magnet.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 391
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
F = LI
So comparing it with equation (1) we get,
L = m0 n2 Ip2 l
and as for a given solenoid, radius r and length l is constant therefore
L \ n2
SOL 6.1.5
# B : dS
where
a " radius of solenoid
Induced emf in a loop placed in a magnetic field is defined as
Vemf =- dF
dt
where F is the total magnetic flux passing through the loop. Since the
resistance R is looped over the solenoid so total flux through the loop will
be equal to the total flux through the solenoid and therefore the induced emf
in the loop of resistance will be
Vemf =- pa2 m0 n dI
dt
Since current I flowing in the solenoid is constant so, the induced emf is
Vemf = 0
and therefore the induced current in the loop will be zero.
SOL 6.1.6
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
SOL 6.1.8
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
( E = E 0 cos wt )
D = eE = eE 0 cos wt
Therefore the displacement current density in the medium is
Jd = 2D =- weE 0 sin wt
2t
.
w
w
Jc = sE = sE 0 cos wt
So, the ratio of amplitudes of conduction current density and displacement
current density is
Jc
= s
we
Jd
SOL 6.1.9
d : (eE) = 0
E : (de) + e (d : E) = 0
de . 0 &4 e . 0
e
(given)
d:E . 0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.11
Page 393
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
F =
# B : dS
S
m0 I r + a 1
(area of the square loop is dS = adr )
(adr)
r
2p r
m Ia
r+a
= 0 ln b
r l
2p
The induced emf due to the change in flux (when pulled away) is given as
m Ia
r+a
Vemf =- dF =- 0 d ;ln b
r lE
2p dt
dt
dr 1 dr
m Ia
Therefore,
Vemf =- 0 c 1
2p r + a dt r dt m
dr
Given
= velocity of loop = 5 m/s
dt
and since the loop is currently located at 3 m distance from the straight
wire, so after 0.6 sec it will be at
(v " velocity of the loop )
r = 3 + (0.6) # v
So,
Vemf
= 3 + 0.6 # 5 = 6 m
m
(30) # 2 1
1
=- 0 #
: 8 (5) - 6 (5)D
2p
(a = 2 m, I = 30 A )
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.13
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
# B : dS
rails
Now the induced emf in a loop placed in magnetic field is defined as
Vemf =- dF
dt
where F is the total magnetic flux passing through the loop. Therefore the
induced emf in the square loop is
( F = Blx )
Vemf =- d (Blx) =- Bl dx
dt
dt
Since from the given figure, we have
l =5m
B = 2T
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 395
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
# B : dS
S
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 396
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
or,
So, at t = 0
and
Solving it we get
i2 = M I1 e-^R/Lht
L
i. n
o
.c
Solving it we get
i2 =- M I1 e-^R/Lh(t - T)
L
for t > T
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.1.18
# B : dS
S
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 397
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
# 3 # 10 cos ^3 # 10 t - 0.2x ha
3
mr = 2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
time as
I (t) = 8t A
So, the retarded vector potential at the point P will be given as
m0 I ^t - R/c h
ax dx
A=
4p R
where R is the distance of any point on the filamentary current from P as
shown in the figure and c is the velocity of waves in free space. So, we have
Therefore,
= 8 # 10-7 t 8ln ^x +
-7
x2 + 4 hB-0.1 - 8 # 10 8 6x @-0.01.1
3 # 10
0.1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
NOTE :
Time varying potential is usually called the retarded potential.
SOL 6.1.21
F = q ^E + v # B h
So, putting the given three forces and their corresponding velocities in above
equation we get the following relations
(1)
q ^ay + az h = q ^E + ax # B h
(2)
qay = q ^E + ay # B h
(3)
q ^2ay + az h = q ^E + az # B h
Subtracting equation (2) from (1) we get
(4)
az = ^ax - ay h # B
and subtracting equation (1) from (3) we get
(5)
ay = ^az - ax h # B
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 399
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
B x + By = 1
and
Bz = 0
Again by substituting B = Bx ax + By ay + Bz az in eq (5), we get
ay = B x ay - By a x - By a z + B z ay
So, comparing the x, y and z components of the two sides we get
Bx + Bz = 1
and
By = 0
as calculated above Bz = 0 , therefore Bx = 1
Thus, the magnetic flux density in the region is
(Bx = 1, By = Bz = 0 )
B = ax Wb/m2
SOL 6.1.22
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
B = ax Wb/m2
So, putting it in Lorentz force equation we get
or,
F = q ^E + V # B h
q ^ay + az h = q ^E + ax # ax h
SOL 6.1.23
V = y ^x - ct h volt
and retarded vector potential,
A = y a x - t k ax Wb/m
c
Now the magnetic flux density in the medium is given as
B = d#A
2A
=- y az = at - x k az Tesla
c
2y
(1)
(3)
=-^x - ct h ay - yax + yax = ^ct - x h ay
So, the electric flux density in the medium is
( e0 is the permittivity of the medium)
D = e0 E
(4)
= e0 ^ct - x h ay C/m2
Now we determine the condition for the field to satisfy all the four Maxwells
equation.
(a)
d : D = rv
or,
(from equation (4))
rv = d : 6e0 ^ct - x h ay@
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 400
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
e0 a
m0 y
1 )
m0 e0
J =0
d # E =-2B
2t
2Ey
Now
a =- az
d#E =
2x z
2B = a
z
2t
So, it already satisfies Maxwells equation. Thus, by combining all the results
we get the two required conditions as J = 0 and rv = 0 for the field to satisfy
Maxwells equation.
(d)
i. n
o
.c
SOL 6.1.24
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
B =- 2/x az
So the total magnetic flux passing through the loop is given as
y+2
x+2
2
F = B : dS =
b- x az l : ^- dxdyaz h
x
y
x
+
2
= b 2 ln
2 = 4 ln b x + 2 l
x l^ h
x
Therefore, the circulation of induced electric field in the loop is
E : dl =- dF =- d ;4 ln b x + 2 lE
x
dt
dt
C
d x+2
=- 4
x + 2 dt b x l
b x l
=- 4x b- 22 dx l
x + 2 x dt
=
SOL 6.1.25
8
^2 h = 16
x ^x + 2h
x ^x + 2h
dx
b dt = v = 2ax l
# B : dS = 0
So, the induced electric field circulation for the region r < 4 m is given as
E : dl =- dF = 0
dt
C
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
or,
SOL 6.1.26
for r < 4 m
Page 401
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
At any distance r from origin in the region 4 < r < 5 m , the circulation of
induced electric field is given as
E : dl =- dF =- d b B : dS l
dt
dt
C
=- d 82 sin wt ^pr2 - p42hB
dt
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
#
# B : dS
0
= 0+
B : dS +
# ^2 sin wt ha
5
# B : dS
4
: dS
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 402
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.1.28
i. n
or,
SOL 6.1.29
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
F =
# B : dS
= ^B h^S h cos q
So,
SOL 6.1.30
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.31
( R = 40 mW )
Page 403
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
( q = wt )
=- B 0 S cos 2wt
Thus, the maximum value of induced emf is
Vemf = B 0 Sw
SOL 6.1.32
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
=- p ^10 # 10-2h2 # ^120ph^- 10 sin 120pt h
SOL 6.1.33
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.2
Page 404
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.2.1
Correct answer is 0.
As the conducting loop is falling freely So, the flux through loop will remain
constant. Therefore, the voltage induced in the loop will be zero.
SOL 6.2.2
Correct answer is - 4 .
The magnetic flux density passing through the loop is given as
B = 4z3 t2 ax
Since the flux density is directed normal to the plane x = 0 so the total
magnetic flux passing through the square loop located in the plane x = 0 is
F =
# B : dS
# #
y=0 z=0
(dS = (dydz) ax )
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(dS = adran )
where dr is width of the strip of loop at a distance r from the straight wire.
Thus,
3 m I dr
m0 (5)
m0 I
3
0
F =
b 2p l r = 2p ln b 2 l = 2p ln (1.5)
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
# J dt + C
= # 20 cos ^1.5 # 10 t h a dt + C
D =
Page 405
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
(C " constant)
As there is no D.C. field present in the medium so, we get C = 0 and thus,
20 sin ^1.5 # 108 t h
D =
ay = 1.33 # 10-7 sin ^1.5 # 108 t h ay
8
1.5 # 10
= 133.3 sin ^1.5 # 108 t h ay nC/m2
Since, from the given problem we have the flux density
D = D 0 sin ^1.5 # 108 t h ay nC/m2
So, we get
D 0 = 133.3
SOL 6.2.5
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V1 =- N1 dF
dt
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 406
Chap 6
Again
SOL 6.2.8
So,
SOL 6.2.9
^15ph2 + b2 = w2 p0 e0
w = 6p # 109
9 2
^15ph2 + b2 = c 6p # 108 m
3 # 10
2
2
^15ph + b = 400p2
b2 = 175p2 & b = ! 41.6 rad/m
b = 41.6 rad/m
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
F =
# B : dS
= Blx
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(R = 10W )
Page 407
Chap 6
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
-7
= 4 # 4p # 10 ln (2)
4p
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.2.12
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.2.13
Correct answer is 8.
Let the test charge be q coulomb So the force presence of experienced by the
test charge in the presence of magnetic field is
F = q ^v # B h
and the force experienced can be written in terms of the electric field
intensity as
F = qE
Where E is field viewed by observer moving with test charge.
Putting it in Eq. (i)
qE = q ^v # B h
E = ^wrafh # ^2az h
where w is angular velocity and r is radius of circular loop.
= ^2 h^2 h^2 h a r = 8a r V/m
SOL 6.2.14
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
# B : dS
= # (8x a ) (20 # 10
F =
-2
Page 409
Chap 6
dxaz )
1.6 8t ^1 + 0.4t2hB
=
3
Therefore, the induced e.m.f. in the loop is given as
Vemf =- dF =- 1.6 # 3 ^t + 0.4t3h2 # (1 + 1.2t2)
3
dt
3
(t = 0.4 sec )
Vemf =- 1.6 6^0.4h + ^0.4h4@ # 61 + (1.2) (0.4) 2@
=- 0.35 volt
Since the voltmeter is connected in same manner as the direction of induced
emf (determined by Lenzs law).
So the voltmeter reading will be
2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
0.12 = t ^1 + 0.4t2h
or,
t = 0.1193 sec
As calculated in previous question, the induced emf in the loop at a particular
time t is
Vemf =-^1.6h6t + 0.4t3@2 ^1 + 1.2t2h
where C is a constant.
D = - b sin ^1010 t - bx h dt + C
Since no D.C. field is present in the medium so, we get C = 0 and therefore,
D = b10 cos ^1010 t - bx h ay C/m2
10
and the electric field intensity in the medium is given as
b
E =D =
cos ^1010t - bx h ay (e = 0.12 nF/m )
e
0.12 # 10-9 # 1010
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
2
=- b sin ^1010t - bx h az
1.2
b2
10
10 cos ^10 t - bx h a z
(1.2) # 10
We can also determine the value of magnetic flux density as :
=
B = mH
= (3 # 10-5) cos ^1010 t - bx h az
Comparing the results of equation (1) and (2) we get,
b2
= 3 # 10-5
(1.2) # 1010
b2 = 3.6 # 105
b = ! 600 rad/m
SOL 6.2.17
(1)
(2)
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
E = E 0 cos ^wt - bx h az
We get,
w = 6p # 109
Now in phasor form, the electric field intensity is
.
w
w
(1)
Es = 5 sin ^10py h e-jbx az
From Maxwells equation we get the magnetic field intensity as
j 2Esz
Hs =- 1 ^d # Es h =
a - 2Esz a
jwm0
wm0 < 2y x 2x yF
j
=
50p cos ^10py h e-jbx ax + j5b sin ^10py h ay@ e-jbx
wm0 6
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
b =
Page 411
Chap 6
Correct answer is 7.
Let the point change located at origin be Q and the current I is flowing out
of the page through the closed triangular path as shown in the figure.
As the current I flows away from the point charge along the wire, the net
charge at origin will change with increasing time and given as
dQ
=- I
dt
So the electric field intensity will also vary through the surface and for the
varying field circulation of magnetic field intensity around the triangular
loop is defined as
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
= 6Id@enc + 6Ic@enc
where 6Ic@enc is the actual flow of charge called enclosed conduction current
and 6Id@enc is the current due to the varying field called enclosed displacement
current which is given as
d
d D : dS
(1)
^e0 E h : dS = dt
6Id@enc = dt
S
S
From symmetry the total electric flux passing through the triangular surface
is
Q
D : dS =
8
S
d Q = 1 dQ =- I
So,
(from equation (1))
6Id@enc = dt
b 8 l 8 dt
8
# H : dl
whereas
6Ic@enc = I
So, the net circulation of the magnetic field intensity around the closed
triangular loop is
# H : dl
C
= 6Id@enc + 6Ic@enc
=- I + I = 7 ^8 h = 7 A
8
8
SOL 6.2.19
(I = 8 A )
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
and
w = 60 # 2p = 377 rad/ sec (In one revolution 2p radian
is covered)
So, the r.m.s. value of the induced voltage is
1 V
1 B Sw
emf =
0
6Vemf@r.m.s =
2
2
= 1 ^0.25 # 64 # 10-4 # 377h
2
= 0.4265
Since the loop has 50 turns so net induced voltage will be 50 times the
calculated value.
i.e.
6Vemf@r.m.s = 50 # ^0.4265h
= 21.33 volt
***********
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.3
Page 413
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.3.1
SOL 6.3.2
i.e.
H : dl = Ienc
So, for the constant current, magnetic field intensity will be constant i.e.
magnetostatic field is caused by steady currents.
SOL 6.3.3
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
and since the magnetic flux density is equal to the curl of magnetic vector
potential
i.e.
B = d#A
So, putting it in equation (1), we get
d # E =- 2 ^d # Ah
2t
or
d # E = d # b- 2 A l
2t
Therefore,
E =-2A
2t
SOL 6.3.4
# B : dS
S
# B : dS
S
# (d : B) dv = 0
v
(Stokes Theorem)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 414
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.3.6
So,
(B = 0 , E = 0 )
J =0
Since the net current density inside the superconductor is zero so all the
current must be confined at the surface of the wire.
SOL 6.3.7
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.3.8
Since, the magnetic field is non-uniform so the change in flux will be caused
by it and the induced emf due to it is called transformer emf.
Again the field is in ay direction and the loop is rotating about z -axis so
flux through the loop will also vary due to the motion of the loop. This
causes the emf which is called motion emf. Thus, total induced voltage in
the rotating loop is caused by the combination of both the transformer and
motion emf.
SOL 6.3.9
SOL 6.3.10
SOL 6.3.11
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.3.13
SOL 6.3.14
SOL 6.3.15
SOL 6.3.16
SOL 6.3.17
Page 415
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
***********
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.4
Page 416
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.4.1
SOL 6.4.2
i. n
o
.c
(since H is constant)
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
d:B = 0
d : E = rv /e
2B
b 2t = 0 l
2D
b 2t = 0 l
d#E = 0
d#H = J
SOL 6.4.3
SOL 6.4.4
Maxwell Equations
##S ^d # H h : dS
##S `J + 22Dt j : dS
Integral form
# H : dl
D : dS
##S bJ +2
2t l
Stokes Theorem
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
or,
#l H $ dl
= I enclosed
#l H $ dl
Page 417
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
#S J : dS
#S ^d # H h $ dS
#S J : dS
d#H = J
Then, it is modified using continuity equation as
d # H = J + 2D
2t
SOL 6.4.6
SOL 6.4.7
SOL 6.4.8
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
9 =- lt2
at time, t = 3 s , we have
9 =- l ^3h2
l =- 1 Wb/s2
SOL 6.4.9
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.11
SOL 6.4.12
i. n
o
.c
S = 5 m2
Rate of change of flux density,
2B = 2 Wb/m2 /S
2t
So, the emf in the loop is
Vemf =- 2 B : dS
2t
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.4.13
.
w
w
= ^5 h^- 2h =- 10 V
# H : dl
# ^d # H h : dS
= Ienc
=
# JdS
d#H = J
SOL 6.4.14
(free space)
d # H = jweE + sE = jweE + J
^J = sE h
So A and R both are true individually but R is not the correct explanation
of A.
SOL 6.4.15
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.17
Faraday law
^b " 4h
^c " 1h
d : D = rv
2r
d : J =2t
Gauss law
Current continuity
SOL 6.4.18
^a " 3h
d # H = J + 2D
2t
d # E = 2B
2t
Amperes law
Page 419
Chap 6
^d " 2h
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.4.19
SOL 6.4.20
SOL 6.4.21
d:D = r
d:B = 0
a.
B : dS = 0
The surface integral of magnetic flux density over the closed surface is zero
or in other words, net outward magnetic flux through any closed surface is
zero. ^a " 4h
b.
# D : dS
# r dv
v
Total outward electric flux through any closed surface is equal to the charge
enclosed in the region.
^b " 3h
c.
E : dl =- 2B dS
2t
i.e. The line integral of the electric field intensity around a closed path is
equal to the surface integral of the time derivative of magnetic flux density
^c " 2h
d.
H : dS = b2D + J l da
2t
i.e. The line integral of magnetic field intensity around a closed path is equal
to the surface integral of sum of the current density and time derivative of
electric flux density.
^d " 1h
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.22
SOL 6.4.23
SOL 6.4.24
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
= ax ^0 h - ay ^2 - 0h + az ^0 h =- 2ay
SOL 6.4.25
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.4.26
SOL 6.4.27
SOL 6.4.28
d2 V = 0
Which is Laplacian equation.
SOL 6.4.29
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 421
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
SOL 6.4.31
SOL 6.4.32
2r
d # J =- v
2t
d # H = J + 2D
2t
J = 2D
2t
d # E =-2B
2t
^a " 4h
^b " 1h
^c " 2h
^d " 3h
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
=- 100 ^3t2 - 2h
=- 100 _3 ^2 h2 - 2i =- 1000 mV
=- 1 V
SOL 6.4.33
(at t = 2 s )
^a " 4h
^b " 2h
and
d#E = 0
A steady magnetic field in a current carrying conductor have
d:B = 0
^c " 1h
d # B = m0 J ! 0
A time varying electric field in a charged medium with time varying magnetic
field have
d # E =-2B ! 0
^d " 3h
2t
r
d:E = v ! 0
e
SOL 6.4.34
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.35
# ^d # E h : dS
# E : dl
(1)
SOL 6.4.36
SOL 6.4.37
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
SOL 6.4.38
SOL 6.4.39
o
n
.
w
w
d # B = m0 J
d # ^d # Ah = m0 J
d ^d : Ah - d2A = m0 J
For static field (DC),
d:A = 0
therefore we have,
d2A =- m0 J
So, both A and R are true and R is correct explanation of A.
w
SOL 6.4.40
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.42
SOL 6.4.43
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Amperes law
Faradays law
Poynting vector
d:D = r
d # H = Jc + 2D
2t
d # E =-2B
2t
P = E#H
Page 423
Chap 6
Time Varying Fields and
Maxwell Equations
^a " 1h
^b " 5h
^c " 2h
^d " 3h
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Eighth Edition
GATE
Network Analysis
Vol 3 of 10
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 690.00
To Our Parents
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GATE Electronics & Communications
Networks:
Network graphs: matrices associated with graphs; incidence, fundamental cut set and fundamental circuit matrices.
Solution methods: nodal and mesh analysis. Network theorems: superposition, Thevenin and Nortons maximum
power transfer, Wye-Delta transformation. Steady state sinusoidal analysis using phasors. Linear constant coefficient
differential equations; time domain analysis of simple RLC circuits, Solution of network equations using Laplace
transform: frequency domain analysis of RLC circuits. 2-port network parameters: driving point and transfer
functions. State equations for networks.
Network Theory
Network analysis techniques; Network theorems, transient response, steady state sinusoidal response; Network
graphs and their applications in network analysis; Tellegens theorem. Two port networks; Z, Y, h and transmission
parameters. Combination of two ports, analysis of common two ports. Network functions : parts of network
functions, obtaining a network function from a given part. Transmission criteria : delay and rise time, Elmores and
other definitions effect of cascading. Elements of network synthesis.
**********
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
BASIC CONCEPTS
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
Charge
Current
Voltage
Power
Energy
1
1
2
3
4
CIRCUIT ELEMENTS 4
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.4
SOURCES
1.4.1
1.4.2
Independent Sources
Dependent Sources
EXERCISE 1.1
EXERCISE 1.2
18
SOLUTIONS 1.1
23
SOLUTIONS 1.2
30
CHAPTER 2
5
6
BASIC LAWS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
2.2
37
2.3
39
2.4
KIRCHHOFFS LAW
2.4.1
2.4.2
37
40
40
41
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
5
5
5
41
42
44
45
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.11
EXERCISE 2.2
67
SOLUTIONS 2.1
78
SOLUTIONS 2.2
101
CHAPTER 3
GRAPH THEORY
3.1
INTRODUCTION
127
3.2
NETWORK GRAPH
127
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
129
3.3.1
130
INCIDENCE MATRIX
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
TIE-SET
131
132
133
Tie-Set Matrix
134
Tie-Set Matrix and KVL
134
Tie-Set Matrix and Branch Currents
CUT-SET
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
135
136
EXERCISE 3.1
140
EXERCISE 3.2
149
SOLUTIONS 3.1
151
SOLUTIONS 3.2
156
CHAPTER 4
127
128
131
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.6
46
NON-IDEAL SOURCES 48
49
3.4
46
EXERCISE 2.1
3.3
46
4.1
INTRODUCTION
159
4.2
NODAL ANALYSIS
159
4.3
MESH ANALYSIS
161
139
4.4
EXERCISE 4.1
164
EXERCISE 4.2
173
SOLUTIONS 4.1
181
SOLUTIONS 4.2
192
CHAPTER 5
CIRCUIT THEOREMS
5.1
INTRODUCTION
5.2
LINEARITY
5.3
SUPERPOSITION
5.4
SOURCE TRANSFORMATION
5.4.1
5.5
211
211
212
213
THEVENINS THEOREM
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
163
214
NORTONS THEOREM
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
214
216
217
218
5.7
5.8
5.9
RECIPROCITY THEOREM
5.9.1
5.9.2
221
5.10
SUBSTITUTION THEOREM
222
5.11
MILLMANS THEOREM
223
5.12
TELLEGENS THEOREM
223
EXERCISE 5.1
224
EXERCISE 5.2
239
SOLUTIONS 5.1
246
SOLUTIONS 5.2
272
CHAPTER 6
6.1
6.2
297
6.2.1
6.2.2
221
221
CAPACITOR
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
219
Capacitors in Series
Capacitors in Parallel
299
301
299
297
219
6.3
INDUCTOR
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.4
DUALITY
307
EXERCISE 6.2
322
SOLUTIONS 6.1
328
SOLUTIONS 6.2
347
CHAPTER 7
303
304
305
EXERCISE 6.1
7.1
INTRODUCTION
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
359
Source-Free RC Circuit
Source-Free RL circuit
359
359
362
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.8
364
365
Complete Response :
367
Complete Response in terms of Initial and Final Conditions
368
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.7
302
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.5
301
Complete Response
369
Complete Response in terms of Initial and Final Conditions
370
7.7.1
7.7.2
370
EXERCISE 7.1
373
EXERCISE 7.2
392
SOLUTIONS 7.1
397
SOLUTIONS 7.2
452
CHAPTER 8
370
372
8.1
INTRODUCTION
469
8.2
469
8.3
472
8.4
8.5
475
475
8.6
8.7
EXERCISE 8.1
478
EXERCISE 8.2
491
SOLUTIONS 8.1
495
SOLUTIONS 8.2
527
CHAPTER 9
476
477
9.1
INTRODUCTION
9.2
CHARACTERISTICS OF SINUSOID
9.3
PHASORS
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.5
Admittance
548
548
548
549
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.8.4
9.8.5
9.9
546
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.8
544
545
545
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.7
541
543
Resistor
Inductor
Capacitor
9.5.1
9.6
541
EXERCISE 9.1
556
EXERCISE 9.2
579
SOLUTIONS 9.1
583
SOLUTIONS 9.2
618
CHAPTER 10
552
Nodal Analysis
552
Mesh Analysis
552
Superposition Theorem
553
Source Transformation
553
Thevenin and Norton Equivalent Circuits
PHASOR DIAGRAMS
549
550
553
554
AC POWER ANALYSIS
10.1
INTRODUCTION
627
10.2
INSTANTANEOUS POWER
10.3
AVERAGE POWER
10.4
627
628
629
10.5
COMPLEX POWER
10.5.1
630
10.6
POWER FACTOR
10.7
632
10.8
AC POWER CONSERVATION
636
10.9
636
EXERCISE 10.1
638
EXERCISE 10.2
648
SOLUTIONS 10.1
653
SOLUTIONS 10.2
669
11.1
INTRODUCTION
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.3
683
683
Y -connected Load
T-connected Load
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.4
634
10.7.1
CHAPTER 11
631
683
686
688
688
689
Balanced Y -Y Connection
Balanced Y -T Connection
Balanced T-T Connection
Balanced T -Y connection
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
689
691
692
693
11.5
11.6
EXERCISE 11.1
697
EXERCISE 11.2
706
SOLUTIONS 11.1
709
SOLUTIONS 11.2
722
CHAPTER 12
694
12.1
INTRODUCTION
12.2
MUTUAL INDUCTANCE
12.3
DOT CONVENTION
12.4
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.6
729
729
730
732
732
733
734
731
12.7
12.7.1
12.8
Coefficient of Coupling
737
739
12.9.1
740
Reflected Impedance
EXERCISE 12.1
742
EXERCISE 12.2
751
SOLUTIONS 12.1
755
SOLUTIONS 12.2
768
CHAPTER 13
INTRODUCTION
13.2
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
777
13.2.1
778
777
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.4
737
738
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
13.1
13.3
736
12.8.1
12.8.2
12.9
735
Series Resonance
Parallel Resonance
PASSIVE FILTERS
13.4.1
13.4.2
13.4.3
13.4.4
778
784
788
788
789
790
791
13.5
13.6
SCALING
13.6.1
13.6.2
13.6.3
793
Magnitude Scaling
793
Frequency Scaling
793
Magnitude and Frequency Scaling
EXERCISE 13.1
795
EXERCISE 13.2
804
SOLUTIONS 13.1
807
SOLUTIONS 13.2
821
CHAPTER 14
INTRODUCTION
14.2
14.3
827
827
14.3.1
794
14.1
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
792
829
829
830
14.4
14.4.1
14.5
14.5.1
14.5.2
14.5.3
14.6
14.7
14.7.1
836
EXERCISE 14.2
850
SOLUTIONS 14.1
853
SOLUTIONS 14.2
880
INTRODUCTION
15.2
IMPEDANCE PARAMETERS
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
834
834
835
887
887
Equivalent Network
895
Input Impedance of a Terminated Two-port Networks in Terms of Hybrid Parameters
Inverse Hybrid Parameters
896
Input Impedance of a Terminated Two-port Networks in Terms of ABCD Parameters
15.7
15.8
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
Cascade Connection
EXERCISE 15.1
904
EXERCISE 15.2
920
SOLUTIONS 15.1
924
SOLUTIONS 15.2
955
895
897
15.6
15.8.1
15.8.2
15.8.3
893
894
TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
15.5.1
889
891
HYBRID PARAMETERS
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
15.5
831
832
833
s -DOMAIN
ADMITTANCE PARAMETERS
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.4
831
15.1
15.3
831
EXERCISE 14.1
CHAPTER 15
830
898
900
900
901
902
***********
899
898
CHAPTER 5
Page 211
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
CIRCUIT THEOREMS
5.1
INTRODUCTION
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
LINEARITY
Additivity Property
The additivity property requires that the response to a sum of inputs is the
sum of the responses to each input applied separately. Using the voltagecurrent relationship of a resistor, if
(Voltage due to current I1 )
V1 = I1 R
and
(Voltage due to current I2 )
V2 = I2 R
then, applying current (I1 + I2) gives
V = (I1 + I2) R = I1 R + I2 R
= V1 + V2
These two properties defining a linear system can be combined into a single
statement as
For any linear resistive circuit, any output voltage or current, denoted by
the variable y , is related linearly to the independent sources(inputs), i.e.,
y = a1 x1 + a2 x2 + ... + an xn
where x1, x2 .... xn are the voltage and current values of the independent
sources in the circuit and a1 through am are properly dimensioned constants.
Thus, a linear circuit is one whose output is linearly related (or directly
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
proportional) to its input. For example, consider the linear circuit shown
in figure 5.2.1. It is excited by an input voltage source Vs , and the current
through load R is taken as output(response).
Circuit Theorems
5.3
i. n
SUPERPOSITION
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
M E T H O D O L O G Y
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOURCE TRANSFORMATION
Page 213
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1.
2.
Source conversion are equivalent at their external terminals only i.e. the
voltage-current relationship at their external terminals remains same.
The two circuits in figure 5.4.3a and 5.4.3b are equivalent, provided
they have the same voltage-current relation at terminals a -b
Fig. 5.4.3 An example of source transformation (a) Circuit with a voltage source (b)
Equivalent circuit when the voltage source is transformed into current sources
3.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 214
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
5.4.1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
5.5
o
n
.
w
w
THEVENINS THEOREM
It states that any network composed of ideal voltage and current sources,
and of linear resistors, may be represented by an equivalent circuit consisting
of an ideal voltage source, VTh , in series with an equivalent resistance, RTh
as illustrated in the figure 5.5.1.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Thevenins Voltage
Page 215
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
Figure 5.5.2 illustrates that the open-circuit voltage, Voc , and the
Thevenin voltage, VTh , must be the same because in the circuit consisting of
VTh and RTh , the voltage Voc must equal VTh , since no current flows through RTh
and therefore the voltage across RTh is zero. Kirchhoffs voltage law confirms
that
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VTh = RTh (0) + Voc = Voc
5.5.2
Thevenins Resistance
Thevenin resistance is the input or equivalent resistance at the open circuit
terminals a, b when all independent sources are set to zero(voltage sources
replaced by short circuits and current sources replaced by open circuits).
We consider the following cases where Thevenin resistance RTh is to be
determined.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
NOTE :
We may use Vtest = 1 V or Itest = 1 A .
M E T H O D O L O G Y
5.5.3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 217
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
Fig. 5.5.5 A Circuit with a Load and its Equivalent Thevenin Circuit
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
IL =
VTh
RTh + RL
5.6
RL V
RTh + RL Th
NORTONS THEOREM
Any network composed of ideal voltage and current sources, and of linear
resistors, may be represented by an equivalent circuit consisting of an
ideal current source, IN , in parallel with an equivalent resistance, RN as
illustrated in figure 5.6.1.
5.6.1
Nortons Current
The Norton equivalent current is equal to the short-circuit current that
would flow when the load replaced by a short circuit. Therefore, it is also
called short circuit current Isc .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Figure 5.6.2 illustrates that if we replace the load by a short circuit, then
current flowing through this short circuit will be same as Norton current IN
IN = Isc
1.
2.
3.
4.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
5.6.2
o
n
.
w
w
Nortons Resistance
RN = RTh
5.6.3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Fig. 5.6.4 A circuit with a Load and its Equivalent Norton Circuit
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
5.8
with Thevenin
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Circuit Theorems
VTh
RL + RTh
(5.8.2)
2
V Th
RL
(RL + RTh) 2
(5.8.3)
To find the value of RL that maximizes the expression for PL (assuming that
VTh and RTh are fixed), we write
dPL = 0
dRL
i. n
or
o
.c
RL = RTh
a
i
d
RL = RTh
o
n
Pmax =
.
w
w
2
2
V Th
RTh = V Th
2
4
R
(RTh + RTh)
Th
(5.8.4)
Pmax = V Th
4RL
or,
2
V Th
RL
(RL + Rs) 2
1. Remove the load RL and find the Thevenin equivalent voltage VTh and
resistance RTh for the remainder of the circuit.
2. Select RL = RTh , for maximum power transfer.
3. The maximum average power transfer can be calculated using
2
Pmax = V Th
/4RTh .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
RECIPROCITY THEOREM
The reciprocity theorem is a theorem which can only be used with single
source circuits (either voltage or current source). The theorem states the
following
5.9.1
Page 221
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(5.9.1)
When applying the reciprocity theorem for a voltage source, the following
steps must be followed:
1. The voltage source is replaced by a short circuit in the original
location.
2. The polarity of the voltage source in the new location have the same
correspondence with branch current, in each position, otherwise a ve sign appears in the expression (5.9.1).
This can be explained in a better way through following example.
5.9.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Again, the ratio of voltage and current remains constant. Consider the
network shown in figure 5.9.2a and 5.9.2b. Using reciprocity theorem we my
write
V1 = V2
I1
I2
(5.9.2)
When applying the reciprocity theorem for a current source, the following
conditions must be met:
1. The current source is replaced by an open circuit in the original
location.
2. The direction of the current source in the new location have the same
correspondence with voltage polarity, in each position, otherwise a ve sign appears in the expression (5.9.2).
5.10 SUBSTITUTION THEOREM
If the voltage across and the current through any branch of a dc bilateral
network are known, this branch can be replaced by any combination of
elements that will maintain the same voltage across and current through
the chosen branch.
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
The voltage Vab and the current I in the circuit are given as
Vab = c 6 m 10 = 6 V
6+4
I = 10 = 1 A
6+4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Also consider that the response of the remainder of the circuit of figure
5.10.1 is unchanged by substituting any one of the equivalent branches.
Page 223
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Mathematically
Veq = V1 G1 + V2 G2 + V3 G3 + V4 G4 + . . . + Vn Gn
G1 + G2 + G3 + G4 + . . . + Gn
1
Req = 1 =
Geq G1 + G2 + G3 + ... + Gn
where conductances
G1 = 1 , G2 = 1 , G3 = 1 , G4 = 1 , f Gn = 1
R1
R2
R3
R4
Rn
In terms of resistances
Veq =
1
Req = 1 =
Geq 1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3 + ... + 1/Rn
Tellegens theorem states that the sum of the power dissipations in a lumped
network at any instant is always zero. This is supported by Kirchhoffs
voltage and current laws. Tellegens theorem is valid for any lumped network
which may be linear or non-linear, passive or active, time-varying or timeinvariant.
For a network with n branches, the power summation equation is,
k=n
/V I
k k
=0
k=1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 5.1
Page 224
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
MCQ 5.1.1
The linear network in the figure contains resistors and dependent sources
only. When Vs = 10 V , the power supplied by the voltage source is 40 W.
What will be the power supplied by the source if Vs = 5 V ?
(A) 20 W
(B) 10 W
(C) 40 W
(D) can not be determined
MCQ 5.1.2
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
w
MCQ 5.1.3
1 A , 2.5 V
0.5 A, 2 V
0.5 A, 50 V
2 A, 1.25 V
For the circuit shown in figure below, some measurements are made and
listed in the table.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
In the circuit below, the voltage drop across the resistance R2 will be equal
to
Page 225
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
(A) 46 volt
(C) 22 volt
MCQ 5.1.5
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) 8 A, 8 A, - 4 A
(C) 4 A, 4 A, - 1 A
MCQ 5.1.6
(B) 38 volt
(D) 14 volt
(B) 12 A, 12 A, - 5 A
(D) 2 A, 2 A, - 4 A
(A) 6 A, 1 A
(C) 3 A, 1 A
(B) 9 A, 6 A
(D) 3 A, 4 A
MCQ 5.1.7
MCQ 5.1.8
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.9
Circuit Theorems
(A) 72 A
(C) 2 A
MCQ 5.1.10
(B) 1 A
(D) 4 A
i. n
(A) absorbs 36 W
(B) delivers 4 W
(C) absorbs 100 W
(D) delivers 36 W
MCQ 5.1.11
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 5.1.12
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 227
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
MCQ 5.1.13
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 5.1.14
For the circuit shown in the figure the Thevenin voltage and resistance seen
from the terminal a -b are respectively
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
34 V, 0 W
20 V , 24 W
14 V, 0 W
- 14 V , 24 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.15
Circuit Theorems
(A) 10 V, 18 W
(C) 10 V, 18.67 W
MCQ 5.1.16
(B) 2 V, 18 W
(D) 2 V, 18.67 W
The value of RTh and VTh such that the circuit of figure (B) is the Thevenin
equivalent circuit of the circuit shown in figure (A), will be equal to
i. n
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 5.1.17
RTh = 6 W , VTh = 4 V
RTh = 6 W , VTh = 28 V
RTh = 2 W , VTh = 24 V
RTh = 10 W , VTh = 14 V
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
What values of RTh and VTh will cause the circuit of figure (B) to be the
equivalent circuit of figure (A) ?
(A) 2.4 W, - 24 V
(C) 10 W, 24 V
(B) 3 W, 16 V
(D) 10 W, - 24 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The value of Thevenin voltage across terminals a -b of figure (A) and figure
(B) respectively are
(A) 30 V, 36 V
(B) 28 V, - 12 V
(C) 18 V, 12 V
(D) 30 V, - 12 V
MCQ 5.1.19
MCQ 5.1.20
MCQ 5.1.21
MCQ 5.1.22
For the circuit shown in the figure, the Thevenins voltage and resistance
looking into a -b are
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) 2 V, 3 W
(C) 6 V, - 9 W
MCQ 5.1.23
Page 229
Chap 5
(B) 2 V, 2 W
(D) 6 V, - 3 W
For the following circuit, values of voltage V for different values of R are
given in the table.
The Thevenin voltage and resistance of the unknown circuit are respectively.
(A) 14 V, 4 W
(B) 4 V, 1 W
(C) 14 V, 6 W
(D) 10 V, 2 W
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.24
In the circuit shown below, the Norton equivalent current and resistance
with respect to terminal a -b is
Circuit Theorems
(A) 176 A , 0 W
(B) 2 A, 24 W
(C) - 76 A , 24 W
(D) - 2 A , 24 W
MCQ 5.1.25
The Norton equivalent circuit for the circuit shown in figure is given by
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 5.1.26
What are the values of equivalent Norton current source (IN ) and equivalent
resistance (RN ) across the load terminal of the circuit shown in figure ?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 5.1.27
IN
10 A
10 A
3.33 A
6.66 A
RN
2W
9W
9W
2W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 231
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 5.1.29
The Norton equivalent circuit of the given network with respect to the
terminal a -b, is
MCQ 5.1.30
In the circuit below, if RL is fixed and Rs is variable then for what value of
Rs power dissipated in RL will be maximum ?
(A) RS = RL
(C) RS = RL /2
(B) RS = 0
(D) RS = 2RL
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.31
Circuit Theorems
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 5.1.32
RL = 12 W , Pmax = 12 W
RL = 3 W , Pmax = 96 W
RL = 3 W , Pmax = 48 W
RL = 12 W , Pmax = 24 W
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(A) 2 A, 2 A
(B) - 2 A , 2 A
(C) 2 A, - 2 A
(D) - 2 A , - 2 A
w
MCQ 5.1.33
(A) 40 mA
(B) - 20 mA
(C) 20 mA
(D) R1 , R2 and R 3 must be known
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 233
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
(A) 2 V
(C) 4 V
MCQ 5.1.35
(B) - 2 V
(D) R1 , R2 and R 3 must be known
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A)100 mA
(C) 233.34 mA
(B) 10 mA
(D) none of these
MCQ 5.1.36
MCQ 5.1.37
(A) 23 , 23 , 13
(C) 12 , 12 , 13
(B) 13 , 13 , 1003
(D) 13 , 23 , 1003
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.38
Circuit Theorems
For the linear network shown below, V -I characteristic is also given in the
figure. The value of Norton equivalent current and resistance respectively
are
(A) 3 A, 2 W
(C) 6 A, 0.5 W
MCQ 5.1.39
(B) 6 W, 2 W
(D) 3 A, 0.5 W
In the following circuit a network and its Thevenin and Norton equivalent
are given.
o
.c
MCQ 5.1.40
a
i
d
VTh
RTh
(A)
4V
2W
(B)
4V
(C)
8V
(D)
8V
IN
RN
2A
2W
2W
2A
3W
1.2 W
30
3
1.2 W
5W
8
5
o
n
.
w
w
i. n
A
A
5W
For the following circuit the value of equivalent Norton current IN and
resistance RN are
(A) 2 A, 20 W
(C) 0 A, 20 W
MCQ 5.1.41
(B) 2 A, - 20 W
(D) 0 A, - 20 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 235
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
(C) Ib = 1.5Ia
(D) Ib = Ia
MCQ 5.1.42
MCQ 5.1.43
MCQ 5.1.44
In the circuit shown in fig (A) if current I1 = 2.5 A then current I2 and I 3 in
fig (B) and (C) respectively are
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A) 5 A, 10 A
(C) 5 A, - 10 A
MCQ 5.1.45
(B) - 5 A , 10 A
(D) - 5 A , - 10 A
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
(A) 2, 20
(C) 0.5, 4
MCQ 5.1.46
(B) 2, 8
(D) 0.5, 16
For the following network the V -I curve with respect to terminals a -b, is
given by
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 5.1.47
(A) equal to P
(C) between P and 4P
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.49
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 5.1.51
4 V, 48 W
24 V, 12 W
24 V, 24 W
12 V, 12 W
(A) - 10 V , 2 W
(C) - 10 V , - 2 W
(B) 10 V, 2 W
(D) none of these
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 5.1.52
In the circuit given below, viewed from a -b, the circuit can be reduced to an
equivalent circuit as
Circuit Theorems
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 5.1.53
i. n
(A) 7V = 200I + 54
(C) V = 200I + 54
MCQ 5.1.54
o
.c
a
i
d
(B) V = 100I + 36
(D) V = 50I + 54
In the following circuit the value of open circuit voltage and Thevenin
resistance at terminals a, b are
o
n
.
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 5.2
Page 239
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
QUES 5.2.1
QUES 5.2.2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 5.2.3
In the circuit below, the voltage V across the 40 W resistor would be equal
to ____ Volts.
QUES 5.2.4
QUES 5.2.5
QUES 5.2.6
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 5.2.7
QUES 5.2.8
What is the value of current I in the circuit shown below (in Amp) ?
i. n
o
.c
QUES 5.2.9
a
i
d
o
n
How much power is being dissipated by the 4 kW resistor in the network (in
mW) ?
.
w
w
w
QUES 5.2.10
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 5.2.11
QUES 5.2.12
QUES 5.2.13
In the circuit given below, what is the value of current I (in Amp) through
6 W resistor
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 5.2.14
QUES 5.2.15
QUES 5.2.16
QUES 5.2.17
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 5.2.18
QUES 5.2.19
i. n
QUES 5.2.20
o
.c
For the circuit of figure, some measurements were made at the terminals a -b
and given in the table below.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
QUES 5.2.21
QUES 5.2.22
In the circuit shown below, the maximum power that can be delivered to the
load RL is equal to _____ mW.
QUES 5.2.23
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 243
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
QUES 5.2.25
QUES 5.2.26
For the following circuit, what is the value of current I (in Amp) ?
QUES 5.2.27
QUES 5.2.28
In the circuit shown below, what is the value of current I (in Amps) ?
QUES 5.2.29
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 5.2.30
In the circuit shown, what value of RL (in W ) maximizes the power delivered
to RL ?
QUES 5.2.31
The V -I relation for the circuit below is plotted in the figure. The maximum
power that can be transferred to the load RL will be ______ mW
QUES 5.2.32
Circuit Theorems
QUES 5.2.33
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
The maximum power that can be transferred to the load resistor RL from
the current source in the figure is ____ watts.
QUES 5.2.34
QUES 5.2.35
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 245
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
QUES 5.2.37
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
QUES 5.2.38
For the circuit shown in figure below the value of RTh is ____W .
QUES 5.2.39
10 kW
30 kW
3.6 mW
4.8 mW
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 5.1
Page 246
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.1.1
Vs = 10 V , P = 40 W
Is = P = 40 = 4 A
Vs 10
For,
So,
Now,
Vsl = 5 V , so Isl= 2 A
New value of the power supplied by source is
Psl = VslIsl= 5 # 2 = 10 W
i. n
(From linearity)
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
2.5 = (ILl) 2 # 10
ILl = 0.5 A
Vs = Vsl = 100
IL
ILl
So,
Vsl = 100ILl= 100 # 0.5 = 50 V
Thus required values are
ILl = 0.5 A , Vsl= 50 V
SOL 5.1.3
Option (D ) is correct.
From linearity,
IL = AVs + BIs ,
From the table
2 = 14A + 6B
6 = 18A + 2B
Solving equation (1) & (2)
A = 0.4 , B =- 0.6
So,
SOL 5.1.4
IL = 0.4Vs - 0.6Is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 247
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
8 (16)
24 + 8
=- 4 V
Due to 5 A source only : (Short circuit both the 16 V and 32 V sources)
Let voltage across R2 due to 5 A source only is V2 .
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V2 = (24 W || 16 W || 16 W) # 5
= 6 # 5 = 30 volt
Due to 32 V source only : (Short circuit 16 V source and open circuit 5 A
source)
Let voltage across R2 due to 32 V source only is V3
V = V1 + V2 + V3 =- 4 + 30 + 12 = 38 volt
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
The problem may be solved by applying a node equation at the top node.
SOL 5.1.5
12 W || 6 W = 4 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
o
.c
i. n
4 (30) = 12 A
4+6
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
3 (5) =- 1 A
12 + 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
I1 = 3 A , I 2 = 1 A
Page 249
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.1.7
SOL 5.1.8
SOL 5.1.9
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
I = 6 + 8 = 14 = 2 A
3+4
7
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
Try to solve the problem by obtaining Thevenin equivalent for right half of
the circuit.
SOL 5.1.10
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
SOL 5.1.12
SOL 5.1.13
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 5.1.14
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
RTh = 24 W
SOL 5.1.15
20 (10) = 4 volt
20 + 30
V2 = 15 (10) = 6 volt
15 + 10
V1 =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 252
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
Thevenin Resistance :
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
So,
SOL 5.1.17
VTh = 4 V , RTh = 6 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
VTh =
6 (- 40) =- 24 volt
6+4
Thevenin Resistance :
RTh = 6 W || 4 W = 6 # 4 = 2.4 W
6+4
SOL 5.1.18
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VTh = Va - Vb
Va = 24 V
Vb = 6 (- 6) =- 4 V
6+3
(Voltage division)
VTh = 24 - (- 4) = 28 V
For the circuit of figure (B), using source transformation
VTh =- 12 V
SOL 5.1.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
RTh = Rab = 6 W || 3 W = 2 W
For the circuit of fig (B), as obtained in previous solution.
RTh = 3 W
SOL 5.1.20
i. n
o
.c
The current source connected in parallel with load does not affect Thevenin
equivalent circuit. Thus, Thevenin equivalent circuit will contain its usual
form of a voltage source in series with a resistor.
SOL 5.1.21
SOL 5.1.22
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(VTh = Vx )
- 2VTh + VTh + 6 = 0
VTh = 6 volt
Thevenin Resistance :
Open circuit voltage VTh
RTh =
=
Isc
Short circuit current
To obtain Thevenin resistance, first we find short circuit current through
a -b
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Since dependent source is present in the circuit, we put a test source across
a -b to obtain Thevenins equivalent.
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
We have
...(1)
Itest = Vtest - Vx
3
3Itest = Vtest - Vx
Vx = Vtest - 3Itest
Put Vx into equation (1)
2Vtest - (Vtest - 3Itest) = 6
2Vtest - Vtest + 3Itest = 6
Vtest = 6 - 3Itest
For Thevenins equivalent circuit
...(2)
Vtest - VTh = I
test
RTh
Vtest = VTh + RTh Itest
Comparing equation (2) and (3)
VTh = 6 V , RTh =- 3 W
...(3)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 5.1.23
Circuit Theorems
R
R + RTh l
...(1)
...(2)
i. n
6 + 2RTh = 8 + RTh
RTh = 2 W
Substituting RTh into equation (1)
6 = VTh b 3 l or VTh = 10 V
3+2
SOL 5.1.24
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
RN = 24 W
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 257
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
IN =
3 (10)
3+6
(Current division)
= 3.33 A
Nortons equivalent resistance
RN = 6 + 3 = 9 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 5.1.27
Circuit Theorems
i. n
The output current from the network is equal to the series connected current
source only, so IN = Is . Thus, effect of all other component in the network
does not change IN .
In this case Thevenins equivalent is not feasible because of the series
connected current source.
SOL 5.1.29
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
RN = Rab = 6 || (3 + 3) = 6 || 6 = 3 W
So, Norton equivalent will be
Page 259
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.1.30
V = Vs b
RL
Rs + R L l
Power absorbed by RL
2
(V) 2
= V s RL 2
RL
(Rs + RL)
From above expression, it is known that power is maximum when Rs = 0
PL =
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
NOTE :
Do not get confused with maximum power transfer theorem. According to maximum power
transfer theorem if RL is variable and Rs is fixed then power dissipated by RL is maximum
when RL = Rs .
SOL 5.1.31
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 260
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.1.32
RL = RTh = 3 W
Value of maximum power
(24) 2
(V ) 2
Pmax = Th =
= 48 W
4#3
4RL
Option (D) is correct.
This can be solved by reciprocity theorem. But we have to take care that the
polarity of voltage source have the same correspondence with branch current
in each of the circuit.
In figure (B) and figure (C), polarity of voltage source is reversed with
respect to direction of branch current so
V1 =-V2 =-V3
I1
I2
I3
o
.c
I2 = I 3 =- 2 A
SOL 5.1.33
i. n
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 5.1.34
.
w
w
So,
SOL 5.1.35
V2 = 2 volt
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 261
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
I =
SOL 5.1.36
28.8 = 100 mA
96 + 192
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Open circuit voltage = V1
SOL 5.1.37
50 (V ) = 1 V
(using voltage division)
100 + 50 1
3 1
so,
A=1
3
Due to source V2 only : (Open circuit source I 3 and short circuit source V1 )
V =
50 (V ) = 1 V
(Using voltage division)
100 + 50 2
3 2
So,
B =1
3
Due to source I 3 only : (short circuit sources V1 and V2 )
V =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 262
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
So,
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
IN + I = V
RN
I = V - IN
RN
From the given graph, the equation of line
So,
i. n
(General form)
o
.c
I = 2V - 6
Comparing with general form
1 = 2 or R = 0.5 W
N
RN
a
i
d
IN = 6 A
SOL 5.1.39
o
n
.
w
w
VTh = 4 + ^2 # 2h = 4 + 4 = 8 V
Thevenin Resistance:
RTh = 2 + 3 = 5 W = RN
Norton Current:
SOL 5.1.40
IN = VTh = 8 A
5
RTh
Option (C) is correct.
Norton current, IN = 0 because there is no independent source present in
the circuit.
To obtain Norton resistance we put a 1 A test source across the load terminal
as shown in figure.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 5.1.41
Vtest - 5 ^1 h - 30I1 = 0
Vtest - 5 - 30 ^0.5h = 0
Vtest - 5 - 15 = 0
RN = Vtest = 20 W
1
Option (C) is correct.
In circuit (b) transforming the 3 A source in to 18 V source all source are
1.5 times of that in circuit (a) as shown in figure.
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VTh
R + RTh
From the table,
2 = VTh
3 + RTh
1.6 = VTh
5 + RTh
Dividing equation (1) and (2), we get
2 = 5 + RTh
1.6
3 + RTh
I =
...(1)
...(2)
6 + 2RTh = 8 + 1.6RTh
0.4RTh = 2
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 264
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
VTh = 2 (8) = 16 V
SOL 5.1.43
I =
We have,
VTh = 16 V , RTh = 5 W
16 = 1
5+R
I =
16 = 5 + R
R = 11 W
SOL 5.1.44
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
I2 =- 5 A
I 3 = 10 A
SOL 5.1.45
V1
12 + V1 - V3
V3
VTh - V2 - V3
VTh
(V2 = 2 # 1 = 2 V)
VTh
= 6#1 = 6V
=0
= 12 + 6 = 18 V
=0
= V2 + V3
= 2 + 18 = 20 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Thevenin Resistance :
Page 265
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
RTh = 1 + 1 = 2 W
Now, the circuit becomes as
I = V - VTh
RTh
so
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V = RTh I + VTh
A = RTh = 2 W
B = VTh = 20 V
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Norton Resistance :
Circuit Theorems
RN = 4 W
Now, the circuit becomes as
IN = V + I
RN
4 =V +I
4
i. n
or
16 = V + 4I
V =- 4I + 16
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
SOL 5.1.47
(Single network N )
P = b VTh l R
RTh + R
2
2
Pl = c VThR m R = 4 b VTh
R (Two N are added)
l
2R + RTh
R+ 2
Thus P < Pl < 4P
2
Th
SOL 5.1.48
P1 and I =
2
R
P2
R
I = I1 ! I2 = P1 !
R
P2
R
I 2 R = ( P1 ! P2 ) 2
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 267
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
40 || 60
(20) = 24 # 20 = 12 V
40
(40 || 60) + 16
Current entering terminal a -b is
I = V = 12 = 200 mA
R 60
In fig(B), to maintain same voltage V = 12 V current through 240 W resistor
must be
IR = 12 = 50 mA
240
Using KCL at terminal a , as shown
V =
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
I = I R + IS
200 = 50 + Is
Is = 150 mA ,
SOL 5.1.50
down wards
I3 = 0
Writing mesh equations
Mesh 1:
36 - 12 (I1 - I2) - 6 (I1 - I 3) = 0
36 - 12I1 + 12I2 - 6I1 = 0
3I1 - 2I2 = 6
Mesh 2: - 24I2 - 20 (I2 - I 3) - 12 (I2 - I1) = 0
(a -b is open circuit)
(I 3 = 0)
...(1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 268
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
Mesh 3:
(I 3 = 0)
...(2)
Thevenin Resistance :
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
RTh = (20 + 4) || 24 W = 24 W || 24 W = 12 W
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
VTh can be obtained by writing nodal equation at node a and at center node.
SOL 5.1.51
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V = VTh b
So,
SOL 5.1.52
R
R + RL l
V = VTh =- 10 volt
R = RTh =- 2 W
RTh = Vtest
Itest
For the super node
V1 - Vtest = 2000Ix
V1 - Vtest = 2000 b V1 l
4000
V1 = V or V = 2V
test
1
test
2
Applying KCL to the super node
^Ix = V1 /4000h
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 270
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
(V1 = 2Vtest)
o
.c
Vx = 2VTh - 2Vx
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
i. n
2
bVx = 3 VTh l
RTh = Vtest
Itest
KCL at the top node
Vx + I = Vtest
test
20 + 30
40
Vx + I = Vtest
test
50
40
Vx = 30 (Vtest) = 3 Vtest
30 + 20
5
...(1)
(using voltage division)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 271
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
I = V - VTh = V - 54
200
RTh
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V = 200I + 54
SOL 5.1.54
Vtest = Vx , Itest = Ix
Writing loop equation for the circuit
...(1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 5.2
Page 272
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.2.1
Correct answer is 3.
We solve this problem using principal of linearity.
i. n
I 3 = V3 = 6 = 2 A
3
3
o
.c
I2 = I3 + I
= 2+1 = 3A
V1 = (1) I2 + V3
= 3+6 = 9V
ia
d
o
I1 = V1 = 9 = 3 A
6
6 2
Applying principal of linearity
For Vs = V0 ,
I1 = 3 A
2
So for Vs = 2V0 ,
I1 = 3 # 2 = 3 A
2
Correct answer is 3.
We solve this problem using principal of linearity.
n
.
w
w
SOL 5.2.2
I =V = 1 = 1A
1
1
V2 = 2I + (1) I = 3 V
I2 = V2 = 3 = 1 A
6
6 2
I1 = I 2 + I
= 1+1 = 3 A
2
2
Applying principal of superposition
When Is = I 0 , and V = 1 V ,
(using KVL)
(using KCL)
I1 = 3 A
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
I1 = 3 # 2 = 3 A
2
So, if Is = 2I 0 ,
SOL 5.2.3
Page 273
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
The problem may be solved by transforming both the current sources into
equivalent voltage sources and then applying voltage division.
SOL 5.2.4
Correct answer is 5.
Using super position, we obtain I .
Due to 10 V source only : (Open circuit 5 A source)
I1 = 10 = 5 A
2
Due to 5 A source only : (Short circuit 10 V source)
I2 = 0
I = I1 + I 2 = 5 + 0 = 5 A
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
We can see that voltage source is in parallel with resistor and current source
so voltage across parallel branches will be 10 V and I = 10/2 = 5 A
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 5.2.5
Circuit Theorems
6 = 0.5 A
6+6
Due to 2 A source only : (Short circuit 6 V source)
I1 =
I2 =
6 (- 2)
6+6
o
.c
i. n
a
i
d
=- 1 A
I = I1 + I2 = 0.5 - 1 =- 0.5 A
o
n
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
.
w
w
This problem may be solved by using a single KVL equation around the
outer loop.
SOL 5.2.6
Correct answer is 4.
Applying superposition,
Due to 24 V Source Only : (Open circuit 2 A and short circuit 20 V source)
I1 = 24 = 3 A
8
Due to 20 V source only : (Short circuit 24 V and open circuit 2 A source)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
So
(Due to short circuit)
I2 = 0
Due to 2 A source only : (Short circuit 24 V and 20 V sources)
Page 275
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
I3 =
4 (2)
4+4
= 1A
So
I = I1 + I 2 + I 3 = 3 + 0 + 1 = 4 A
Alternate Method: We can see that current in the middle 4 W resistor is
I - 2 , therefore I can be obtained by applying KVL in the bottom left mesh.
SOL 5.2.7
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Correct answer is 0.
V1 = V2 = 0
Vo = 0
SOL 5.2.8
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Circuit Theorems
12 - 8I = 0
I = 12 = 1.5 A
8
Correct answer is 2.25 .
We apply source transformation as follows.
Transforming 3 mA source into equivalent voltage source and 18 V source
into equivalent current source.
SOL 5.2.9
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
P4 kW
SOL 5.2.10
6+6
= 3 mA
2+8+4+2 4
2
= I 2 (4 # 103) = b 3 l # 4 = 2.25 mW
4
I =
Correct answer is 3.
Set all independent sources to zero (i.e. open circuit current sources and
short circuit voltage sources) to obtain RTh
RTh = 12 W || 4 W = 3 W
SOL 5.2.11
(5 + 1)
(12) = 6 (12) = 7.2 A
6+4
(5 + 1) + (3 + 1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
V1 = I1 # 1 = 7.2 V
(3 + 1)
I2 =
(12) = 4.8 A
(3 + 1) + (5 + 1)
V2 = 5I2 = 5 # 4.8 = 24 V
VTh + V1 - V2 = 0
VTh = V2 - V1 = 24 - 7.2 = 16.8 V
SOL 5.2.12
Page 277
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
(KVL)
Correct answer is 7.
We obtain Thevenins resistance across a -b and then use source transformation
of Thevenins circuit to obtain equivalent Norton circuit.
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
RTh = (5 + 1) || (3 + 1) = 6 || 4 = 2.4 W
Thevenins equivalent is
Norton equivalent
SOL 5.2.13
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 278
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
RTh = 12 W
so, circuit becomes as
i. n
o
.c
VTh = - 9 =- 9 =- 0.5 A
18
RTh + 6 12 + 6
I =
a
i
d
Note: The problem can be solved easily by a single node equation. Take the
nodes connecting the top 4 W, 3 V and 4 W as supernode and apply KCL.
SOL 5.2.14
Correct answer is 0.
We obtain Thevenins equivalent across R.
Thevenin Voltage : (Open circuit voltage)
o
n
.
w
w
Applying KVL
Thevenin Resistance :
RTh = VTh
Isc
Ix = 0
So dependent source also becomes zero.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Isc = 18 = 3 A
6
Thevenin resistance,
RTh = VTh = 2 W
3
Isc
Now, the circuit becomes as
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
2 =3
2+R
3
2 = 2 + 3R
R =0
I =
SOL 5.2.15
Here,
VTh = 5.4 V ,
For maximum power transfer
RTh = 60 W
R = RTh = 60 W
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Thevenin voltage (open circuit voltage) may be obtained using node voltage
method also.
SOL 5.2.16
Correct answer is 3.
First we obtain equivalent voltage and resistance across terminal a -b using
Millmans theorem.
i. n
o
.c
60
20
- 15
+ ^- 120
15 h + 5
Vab =
=- 24 V
1
1
1
15 + 15 + 5
Rab = 1 11 1 = 3 W
15 + 15 + 5
So, the circuit is reduced as
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 5.2.17
I = 24 = 3 A
3+5
Correct answer is 6.
Set all independent sources to zero as shown,
RTh = 6 W
SOL 5.2.18
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
V2 = 4I = 4 V
I 2 = I + I1
= 1 + V2 = 1 + 4 = 4 A
12 3
4+8
Circuit Theorems
V3 = 3I2 + V2
= 3# 4 +4 = 8V
3
(Using KVL)
Is = I 3 + I 2
= V3 + I2 = 8 + 4 = 4 A
3
3 3
SOL 5.2.19
Page 281
Chap 5
(Using KCL)
Applying superposition
When Is = 4 A , I = 1 A
But actually Is = 2 A , So I = 1 # 2 = 0.5 A
4
Correct answer is - 1.
Solving with superposition,
Due to 6 V Source Only : (Open Circuit 2 mA source)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
6
= 6 = 0.6 mA
6 + 6 || 12 6 + 4
I1 = 6 (Is) = 6 # 0.6 = 0.2 mA (Using current division)
6 + 12
18
Due to 2 mA source only : (Short circuit 6 V source) :
Is =
Combining resistances,
6 kW || 6 kW = 3 kW
3 kW + 6 kW = 9 kW
I2 =
9 (- 2) =- 1.2 mA
9+6
I = I1 + I 2
= 0.2 - 1.2 =- 1 mA
(Current division)
(Using superposition)
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
Correct answer is 4.
We find Thevenin equivalent across a -b.
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
VTh
RTh + RL
From the data given in table
10 = VTh
RTh + 2
6 = VTh
RTh + 10
Dividing equation (1) and (2), we get
10 = RTh + 10
6
RTh + 2
IL =
10RTh + 20 = 6RTh + 60
4RTh = 40 & RTh = 10 W
Substituting RTh into equation (1)
10 = VTh
10 + 2
For RL = 20 W ,
SOL 5.2.21
...(1)
...(2)
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
Correct answer is 4.
.
w
w
RTh = Vtest
Itest
Using KVL,
Vtest - 4Itest - 2Itest - kVx - 4Itest = 0
Vtest - 10Itest - k (- 2Itest) = 0
(Vx =- 2Itest )
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 283
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
8 = 2k or k = 4
SOL 5.2.22
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VTh =
2 (24)
2+2
= 12 V
Thevenin Resistance :
RTh = 1 + 2 || 2 = 1 + 1 = 2 kW
Circuit becomes as
RL
V
RTh + RL Th
For maximum power transfer RL = RTh
VL = VTh # RTh = VTh
2
2RTh
So maximum power absorbed by RL
VL =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Pmax
SOL 5.2.23
2
2
(12) 2
V
V
Th
L
=
= 18 mW
=
=
4#2
RL 4RTh
...(1)
...(2)
i. n
a
i
d
o
.c
2
2
(30) # 100
= 22.5 kW
Pmax = I s Rs =
4
4
SOL 5.2.24
o
n
Correct answer is 6.
If we solve this circuit directly by nodal analysis, then we have to deal with
three variables. We can replace the left most and write most circuit by their
Thevenin equivalent as shown below.
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
V1 + 4 + V1 + V1 - 12 = 0
2
6
3
3V1 - 12 + V1 + 2V1 - 24 = 0
6V1 = 36
V1 = 6 V
SOL 5.2.25
Page 285
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 286
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
I = 12 + 72 + Vs
19 + 9
Vs = (28 # I) - 12 - 72 = (28 # 5) - 12 - 72 = 56 V
SOL 5.2.26
i. n
o
.c
Applying KVL
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
I = I1 + I 2
= 2 - 3 = 1 = 0.5 A
2 2
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Vx = 16Isc
KCL at the top left node
V - Vx /2
24 = Vx + x
6
8
24 = Vx + Vx
6 16
Vx = 1152 V
11
Isc = Vx = 1152 = 72 A
16 11 # 16 11
RTh = Voc = 72
72 = 11 W
Isc
11
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 288
Chap 5
6I + 8I - Vx - Vtest = 0
2
14I - 6I - Vtest = 0
2
Circuit Theorems
(KVL)
Vx = 6Itest (Using Ohms law)
11I = Vtest
RTh = Vtest = 11 W
Itest
Correct answer is 4.
We solve this problem using linearity and assumption that I = 1 A .
So
SOL 5.2.28
V1 = 4I + 2I
=6V
I 2 = I1 + I
= V1 + I = 6 + 1 = 2.5 A
4
4
i. n
o
.c
ia
V2 = 4I2 + V1
= 4 (2.5) + 6 = 16 V
Is + I 3 = I 2
n
.
w
w
d
o
Is -
(Using KCL)
(Using KVL)
(Using KCL)
V2 = I
2
4 + 12
Is = 16 + 2.5 = 3.5 A
16
When Is = 3.5 A ,
But Is = 14 A , so
SOL 5.2.29
(Using KVL)
I = 1A
I = .1 # 14 = 4 A
3.5
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
VTh - 1 # I 3 - 1 # I2 = 0
VTh - (- 2) - (- 6) = 0
VTh + 2 + 6 = 0
VTh =- 8 V
Page 289
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
Thevenin Resistance :
RTh = 1 + 1 = 2 W
circuit becomes as
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
I = 12 - VTh =
RTh
Power supplied by 12 V source
12 - (- 8)
= 10 A
2
P12 V = 10 # 12 = 120 W
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 290
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
...(1)
Also,
Vtest + Vx = 0
so
Vx =- Vtest
Substituting Vx =- Vtest into equation (1)
Vtest + Vtest - 2 (- Vtest) = I
test
2k
1k
Correct answer is 4.
Redrawing the circuit in Thevenin equivalent form
I = VTh - V
RTh
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
or,
V =- RTh I + VTh
From the given graph
(General form)
o
n
V =- 4I + 8
So, by comparing
RTh = 4 kW , VTh = 8 V
For maximum power transfer RL = RTh
Maximum power absorbed by RL
.
w
w
SOL 5.2.32
2
(8)
Pmax = VTh =
= 4 mW
4#4
4RTh
Correct answer is 3.
To fine out Thevenin equivalent of the circuit put a test source between
node a and b,
RTh = Vtest
Itest
Writing node equation at V1
V1 - aIx + V1 = I
x
1
1
2V1 = ^1 + ah Ix
Ix is the branch current in 1 W resistor given as
Ix = Vtest - V1
1
...(1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
V1 = Vtest - Ix
Substituting V1 into equation (1)
2 ^Vtest - Ix h = ^1 + ah Ix
Page 291
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
2Vtest = ^3 + ah Ix
2Vtest = ^3 + ah Itest
RTh = Vtest = 3 + a = 3
2
Itest
^Ix = Itest h
3+a = 6
a = 3W
SOL 5.2.33
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
VTh = Va - Vb
Rotating the circuit, makes it simple
I1 =
Similarly,
340 (40) = 34 A
340 + 60
Va = 20I1 = 20 # 34 = 680 V
60
I2 =
(40) = 6 A
60 + 340
(Current division)
(Ohms Law)
(Current division)
(Ohms Law)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 292
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
I = 36 - 12 = 3 A
6+2
Power supplied by 36 V source
P36 V = 3 # 36 = 108 W
SOL 5.2.35
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Vs = (27 + 1.5) (4 W || 2 W)
= 28.5 # 4
3
= 38 V
Correct answer is 9.
First, we find current I in the 4 W resistors using superposition.
Due to 18 V source only : (Open circuit 4 A and short circuit 12 V source)
I1 = 18 = 4.5 A
4
Due to 12 V source only : (Open circuit 4 A and short circuit 18 V source)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 294
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
I3 = 0
So,
I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
= 4.5 - 3 + 0
= 1.5 A
Power dissipated in 4 W resistor
i. n
P4 W = I 2 (4) = (1.5) 2 # 4 = 9 W
Alternate Method: Let current in 4 W resistor is I , then by applying KVL
around the outer loop
18 - 12 - 4I = 0
I = 6 = 1.5 A
4
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Correct answer is - 10 .
Using, Thevenin equivalent circuit
Thevenin Voltage : (Open Circuit Voltage)
Ix =- 4 A
Writing KVL in bottom right mesh
- 24 - (1) Ix - VTh = 0
VTh =- 24 + 4 =- 20 V
Thevenin Resistance :
open circuit voltage Voc
RTh =
=
short circuit current Isc
Voc = VTh =- 20 V
Isc is obtained as follows
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Ix =- 24 =- 24 A
1
Ix + 4 = Isc
- 24 + 4 = Isc
Isc =- 20 A
RTh = - 20 = 1 W
- 20
The circuit is as shown below
(using KCL)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
V =
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
Note that current in bottom right most 1 W resistor is ^Ix + 4h, so applying
KVL around the bottom right mesh,
- 24 - Ix - ^Ix + 4h = 0
Ix =- 14 A
So,
V = 1 # ^Ix + 4h =- 14 + 4 =- 10 V
SOL 5.2.38
Ix = 1 A, Vx = Vtest
Writing mesh equation for bottom right mesh.
Vtest = 100 (1 - 2Ix ) + 300 (1 - 2Ix - 0.01Vx ) + 800
= 100 V
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 296
Chap 5
Circuit Theorems
SOL 5.2.39
...(1)
...(2)
Dividing equation (1) and (2), we get RTh = 30 kW . Maximum power will be
transferred when RL = RTh = 30 kW .
***********
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Eighth Edition
GATE
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP 690.00
Acknowledgements
We would like to express our sincere thanks to all the co-authors, editors, and reviewers for their efforts in
making this project successful. We would also like to thank Team NODIA for providing professional support for
this project through all phases of its development. At last, we express our gratitude to God and our Family for
providing moral support and motivation.
We wish you good luck !
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
SYLLABUS
GATE Electronics & Communications:
Definitions and properties of Laplace transform, continuous-time and discrete-time Fourier series, continuous-time
and discrete-time Fourier Transform, DFT and FFT, z-transform. Sampling theorem. Linear Time-Invariant (LTI)
Systems: definitions and properties; causality, stability, impulse response, convolution, poles and zeros, parallel and
cascade structure, frequency response, group delay, phase delay. Signal transmission through LTI systems.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
SIGNAL-CLASSIFICATION
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
5
5
5
Addition of Signals
Multiplication of Signals
Amplitude Scaling of Signals
Time-Scaling
5
Time-Shifting
6
Time-Reversal/Folding 7
Amplitude Inverted Signals
1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.6
1
2
8
8
9
EXERCISE 1.1
16
EXERCISE 1.2
41
EXERCISE 1.3
44
EXERCISE 1.4
49
SOLUTIONS 1.1
56
SOLUTIONS 1.2
79
SOLUTIONS 1.3
84
SOLUTIONS 1.4
85
13
15
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
93
2.2.1
2.2.2
95
95
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.5
CORRELATION
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.7
2.8
103
109
EXERCISE 2.1
114
EXERCISE 2.2
133
EXERCISE 2.3
135
EXERCISE 2.4
138
SOLUTIONS 2.1
149
SOLUTIONS 2.2
179
SOLUTIONS 2.3
186
SOLUTIONS 2.4
187
CHAPTER 3
3.1
103
103
Cross-Correlation
103
Auto-Correlation
105
Correlation and Convolution
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
112
109
110
111
3.1.1
101
101
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
100
203
94
3.2
SIGNAL CLASSIFICATION
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
204
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
207
Addition of DT Signals
208
Multiplication of DT Signal
208
Amplitude scaling of DT Signals
208
Time-Scaling of DT Signals
208
Time-Shifting of DT Signals
209
Time-Reversal (folding) of DT signals
Inverted DT Signals
211
3.4
3.5
212
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
212
213
213
214
214
3.6
EXERCISE 3.2
241
EXERCISE 3.3
244
EXERCISE 3.4
247
SOLUTIONS 3.1
249
SOLUTIONS 3.2
273
SOLUTIONS 3.3
281
SOLUTIONS 3.4
282
CHAPTER 4
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
211
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.2
210
EXERCISE 3.1
4.1
204
292
287
286
215
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.5
293
294
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
293
Systems in Parallel
System in Cascade
CORRELATION
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
295
295
296
Cross-Correlation
296
Auto-Correlation
296
Properties of Correlation
297
Relationship Between Correlation and Convolution 299
Methods to Solve Correlation 299
4.7
DECONVOLUTION
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
EXERCISE 4.1
304
EXERCISE 4.2
317
EXERCISE 4.3
320
EXERCISE 4.4
323
SOLUTIONS 4.1
329
SOLUTIONS 4.2
353
SOLUTIONS 4.3
361
SOLUTIONS 4.4
362
5.1
300
CHAPTER 5
5.3
REGION OF CONVERGENCE
375
375
376
5.4.1
5.4.2
302
375
5.4
301
303
5.2
5.3.1
5.3.2
300
INTRODUCTION
5.1.1
5.1.2
295
376
382
292
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.11
5.5.12
5.5.13
5.6
Linearity 384
Time Scaling
384
Time Shifting
385
Shifting in the s -domain(Frequency Shifting)
Time Differentiation
386
Time Integration
387
Differentiation in the s -domain
388
Conjugation Property
389
Time Convolution
389
s -Domain Convolution 390
Initial value Theorem
390
Final Value Theorem
391
Time Reversal Property 391
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.7
395
395
395
396
396
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
EXERCISE 5.1
404
EXERCISE 5.2
417
EXERCISE 5.3
422
EXERCISE 5.4
426
SOLUTIONS 5.1
442
SOLUTIONS 5.2
461
SOLUTIONS 5.3
473
SOLUTIONS 5.4
474
CHAPTER 6
6.1
393
394
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.9
393
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.8
386
THE Z-TRANSFORM
INTRODUCTION
6.1.1
397
399
493
493
397
394
6.1.2
6.2
EXISTENCE OF
6.3
REGION OF CONVERGENCE
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.9
500
z -TRANSFORM
494
503
503
Linearity 503
Time Shifting
504
Time Reversal
505
Differentiation in the z -domain
Scaling in z -Domain
506
Time Scaling
506
Time Differencing
507
Time Convolution
508
Conjugation Property
508
Initial Value Theorem
509
Final Value Theorem
509
506
z -TRANSFORM
514
514
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.8.4
515
516
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN
EXERCISE 6.1
520
EXERCISE 6.2
536
EXERCISE 6.3
538
EXERCISE 6.4
541
SOLUTIONS 6.1
554
SOLUTIONS 6.2
580
SOLUTIONS 6.3
586
SOLUTIONS 6.4
587
511
511
512
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.8
494
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.7
z -TRANSFORM
PROPERTIES OF
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.5.9
6.5.10
6.5.11
494
THE INVERSE
6.4.1
6.4.2
z -TRANSFORM
494
518
z -TRANSFORM
513
CHAPTER 7
7.1
DEFINITION 607
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
7.3.11
7.3.12
7.3.13
7.3.14
7.3.15
7.3.16
7.4
7.5
610
611
612
Linearity 612
Time Shifting
612
Conjugation and Conjugate Symmetry
Time Scaling
613
Differentiation in Time-Domain
614
Integration in Time-Domain
614
Differentiation in Frequency Domain 615
Frequency Shifting
615
Duality Property
615
Time Convolution
616
Frequency Convolution 616
Area Under x (t)
617
Area Under X (jw)
617
Parsevals Energy Theorem
618
Time Reversal
618
Other Symmetry Properties
619
612
620
7.4.1
7.4.2
620
EXERCISE 7.1
622
EXERCISE 7.2
634
EXERCISE 7.3
641
EXERCISE 7.4
645
SOLUTIONS 7.1
658
SOLUTIONS 7.2
672
SOLUTIONS 7.3
688
SOLUTIONS 7.4
689
CHAPTER 8
8.1
608
DEFINITION 705
621
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
705
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
8.3.12
8.3.13
8.4
706
Linearity
707
Periodicity
707
Time Shifting
708
Frequency Shifting
708
Time Reversal
708
Time Scaling
709
Differentiation in Frequency Domain 710
Conjugation and Conjugate Symmetry
Convolution in Time Domain 711
Convolution in Frequency Domain
Time Differencing
712
Time Accumulation
712
Parsevals Theorem
713
Transfer Function & Impulse Response
Response of LTI DT system using DTFT
8.6
8.6.1
EXERCISE 8.1
724
EXERCISE 8.2
735
EXERCISE 8.3
739
EXERCISE 8.4
742
SOLUTIONS 8.1
746
SOLUTIONS 8.2
760
SOLUTIONS 8.3
769
716
716
Linearity 716
Periodicity
717
Conjugation and Conjugate Symmetry
Circular Time Shifting 718
Circular Frequency Shift
719
Circular Convolution
719
Multiplication
720
Parsevals Theorem
721
Other Symmetry Properties
721
722
714
714
714
715
PROPERTIES OF DFT
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.7.5
8.7.6
8.7.7
8.7.8
8.7.9
8.8
711
Z -TRANSFORM
8.5
8.7
710
8.4.1
8.4.2
707
717
715
SOLUTIONS 8.4
CHAPTER 9
9.1
770
INTRODUCTION TO CTFS
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
775
775
778
9.2
780
9.3
780
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.3.8
9.3.9
9.3.10
9.3.11
Linearity 780
Time Shifting
781
Time Reversal Property
781
Time Scaling
782
Multiplication
782
Conjugation and Conjugate Symmetry
Differentiation Property 783
Integration in Time-Domain
784
Convolution Property
784
Parsevals Theorem
785
Frequency Shifting
786
783
9.4
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.6
787
787
787
EXERCISE 9.1
790
EXERCISE 9.2
804
EXERCISE 9.3
806
EXERCISE 9.4
811
SOLUTIONS 9.1
824
SOLUTIONS 9.2
840
SOLUTIONS 9.3
844
SOLUTIONS 9.4
845
CHAPTER 10
10.1
DEFINITION
861
10.2
10.3
PROPERTIES OF DTFS
861
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
862
862
Linearity 862
Periodicity
Time-Shifting
861
788
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3.6
10.3.7
10.3.8
10.3.9
10.3.10
10.3.11
10.3.12
10.3.13
EXERCISE 10.1
870
EXERCISE 10.2
880
EXERCISE 10.3
882
EXERCISE 10.4
884
SOLUTIONS 10.1
886
SOLUTIONS 10.2
898
SOLUTIONS 10.3
903
SOLUTIONS 10.4
904
864
CHAPTER 11
11.1
905
11.2
905
11.3
905
11.4
11.5
ALIASING
11.6
SIGNAL RECONSTRUCTION
11.7
907
907
EXERCISE 11.1
911
EXERCISE 11.2
919
EXERCISE 11.3
922
EXERCISE 11.4
925
SOLUTIONS 11.1
928
SOLUTIONS 11.2
937
SOLUTIONS 11.3
941
SOLUTIONS 11.4
942
908
909
***********
CHAPTER 6
Page 493
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
THE Z-TRANSFORM
6.1
INTRODUCTION
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
NOTE :
The properties of z -transform are similar to those of the Laplace transform.
6.1.1
/ x [n] z
-n
(6.1.1)
n =- 3
X (z)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.1.2
The Z-Transform
X (z) =
/ x [ n] z
-n
(6.1.2)
n=0
NOTE :
For causal signals and systems, the unilateral and bilateral z -transform are the same.
6.2
EXISTENCE OF
-TRANSFORM
/ x [ n] z
X [z] =
-n
n =- 3
The z -transform exists when the infinite sum in above equation converges.
For this summation to be converged x [n] z-n must be absolutely summable.
i. n
Substituting z = re jW
3
/ x [n] (re
X [z] =
/ {x [n] r
X [z] =
} e-jWn
o
n
/ x [ n] r
.
w
w
n =- 3
-n
a
i
d
n =- 3
o
.c
n =- 3
or,
6.3
jW -n
-n
13
(6.2.1)
REGION OF CONVERGENCE
The existence of z -transform is given from equation (6.2.1). The values of r for
which x [n] r-n is absolutely summable is referred to as region of convergence.
Since,z = re jW so r = z . Therefore we conclude that the range of values of
the variable z for which the sum in equation (6.1.1) converges is called the
region of convergence. This can be explained through the following examples.
w
6.3.1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Now, the zeros of X (z) are roots of numerator that is z = 0 and poles are
roots of equation (z - 2) (z - 3) = 0 which are given as z = 2 and z = 3 . The
poles and zeros of X (z) are shown in pole-zero plot of figure 6.3.1.
Page 495
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
6.3.2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Properties of ROC
The ROC is a concentric ring in the z -plane centered about the origin.
PROOF :
Put z = re jW
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
3
X (z) converges for those values of z for which x [n] r-n is absolutely summbable
that is
3
n =- 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
PROPERTY 3
o
.c
N2
i. n
a
i
d
/ x [n] z-n
n = N1
o
n
.
w
w
NOTE :
Both N1 and N 2 can be either positive or negative.
PROPERTY 4
PROOF :
A sequence which is zero prior to some finite time is called the right-sided
sequence. Consider a right-sided sequence x [n] shown in figure 6.3.2b; that is;
x [n] = 0 for n < N1 .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
Page 497
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
<3
n = N1
(6.3.1)
x [n] z-n =
n = N1
n = N1
3
(6.3.2)
x [n] r 0-n a z k
r0
n=N
From equation (6.3.1) we know that x [n] r 0-n is absolutely summable.
Let, it is bounded by some value Mx , then equation (6.3.2) becomes as
3
3
(6.3.3)
/ x [n] z-n # Mx / a rz0 k-n
n=N
n=N
The right hand side of above equation converges only if
z > 1 or z > r
0
r0
Thus, we conclude that if the circle z = r0 is in the ROC, then all
values of z for which z > r0 will also be in the ROC. The ROC of a rightsided sequence is illustrated in figure 6.3.2c.
=
-n
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1
PROPERTY 5
A sequence which is zero after some finite time interval is called a leftsided signal. Consider a left-sided signal x [n] shown in figure 6.3.2d; that is
x [n] = 0 for n > N2 .
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ x [n] z-n
or
<3
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
(6.3.4)
/
n =- 3
i. n
o
.c
(6.3.5)
x [n] z-n =
n =- 3
N2
n =- 3
N2
ia
d
o
(6.3.6)
x [n] r 0-n a r 0 k
z
n =- 3
From equation (6.3.4), we know that x [n] r 0-n is absolutely summable. Let it
is bounded by some value Mx , then equation (6.3.6) becomes as
=
n
.
w
w
N2
x [n] z-n # Mx
n =- 3
N2
n =- 3
r0 n
az k
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
PROOF :
A sequence which is defined for infinite extent for both n > 0 and n < 0 is
called two-sided sequence. A two-sided signal x [n] is shown in figure 6.3.2f.
Page 499
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
For any time N 0 , a two-sided sequence can be divided into sum of leftsided and right-sided sequences as shown in figure 6.3.2g.
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Figure 6.3.2g A Two Sided Sequence Divided into Sum of a Left - Sided and Right - Sided
Sequence
The z -transform of x [n] converges for the values of z for which the
transform of both xR [n] and xL [n] converges. From property 4, the ROC of a
right-sided sequence is a region which is bounded on the inside by a circle and
extending outward to infinity i.e. | z | > r1 . From property 5, the ROC of a left
sided sequence is bounded on the outside by a circle and extending inward to
zero i.e. | z | < r2 . So the ROC of combined signal includes intersection of both
ROCs which is ring in the z -plane.
The ROC for the right-sided sequence xR [n], the left-sequence xL [n] and
their combination which is a two sided sequence x [n] are shown in figure
6.3.2h.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Figure 6.3.2h ROC of a left-sided sequence, a right-sided sequence and two sided sequence
PROPERTY 7
i. n
PROOF :
The exponential DT signals also have rational z -transform and the poles of
X (z) determines the boundaries of ROC.
o
.c
PROPERTY 8
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
PROOF :
PROPERTY 9
PROOF :
THE INVERSE
-TRANSFORM
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
DT sequence x [n]
d [ n]
1.
2.
d [n - n 0]
3.
u [n]
an u [n]
4.
n-1
5.
6.
7.
u [n - 1]
z -transform
1
Page 501
Chap 6
ROC
The Z-Transform
entire z -plane
z-n
entire
z -plane,
except z = 0
1 = z
1 - z-1 z - 1
z >1
1
z
-1 = z - a
1 - az
z > a
z-1 = 1
1 - az-1 z - a
z > a
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
nu [n]
na u [ n]
z-1
z
=
(1 - z-1) 2 (z - 1) 2
z >1
az-1
az
-1 2 =
(z - a) 2
(1 - az )
z >a
1 - z-1 cos W 0
or
1 - 2z-1 cos W 0 + z-2
8.
z [z - cos W0]
z - 2z cos W0 + 1
z >1
z-1 sin W0
or
1 - 2z-1 cos W0 + z-2
9.
z sin W0
z2 - 2z cos W0 + 1
z >1
1 - az-1 cos W0
1 - 2az-1 cos W0 + a2 z-2
10.
z [z - a cos W0]
or 2
z - 2az cos W0 + a2
z > a
az-1 sin W0
1 - 2az-1 cos W0 + a2 z-2
11.
or
az sin W0
z - 2az cos W0 + a2
z >a
A + Bz-1
1 + 2gz-1 + a2 z-2
12.
z (Az + B)
2
z + 2g z + g 2
z # a (a)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 502
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
6.4.1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(6.4.1)
Ai = (z - pi) X (z) z = p
(6.4.2)
i
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.4.2
Page 503
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
/ x [ n] z
X (z) =
-n
n =- 3
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
x [n] = {...x [- 2], x [- 1], x [0], x [1], x [2], ...}
6.5
PROPERTIES OF
-TRANSFORM
6.5.1
Linearity
X1 (z),
with ROC: R1
x 2 [ n]
X2 (z),
with ROC: R2
Let
and
PROOF :
The z -transform of signal {ax1 [n] + bx2 [n]} is given by equation (6.1.1) as
follows
3
n =- 3
3
=a
/ x [n] z
1
-n
-n
+b
n =- 3
/ x [n] z
2
-n
n =- 3
ROC : Since, the z -transform X1 (z) is finite within the specified ROC, R1 .
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 504
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
NOTE :
In certain cases, due to the interaction between x1 [n] and x 2 [n], which may lead to cancellation
of certain terms, the overall ROC may be larger than the intersection of the two regions.
On the other hand, if there is no common region between R1 and R 2 , the z-transform of
ax1 [n] + bx 2 [n] does not exist.
6.5.2
Time Shifting
For the bilateral z -transform
x [n]
X (z),
x [n - n 0]
z-n X (z),
If
then
with ROC Rx
and
x [n + n 0]
zn X (z),
with ROC : Rx except for the possible deletion or addition of z = 0 or
z = 3.
Z
i. n
PROOF :
o
.c
/ x [n - n ] z
a
i
d
Z {x [n - n 0]} =
n =- 3
-n
o
n
Z {x [n - n 0]} =
.
w
w
/ x [a] z
- (n 0 + a)
a =- 3
3
/ x [a] z
-n 0 - a
= z-n
/ x [a] z
a =- 3
-a
a =- 3
ROC : The ROC of shifted signals is altered because of the terms zn or z-n ,
which affects the roots of the denominator in X (z).
0
z -TRANSFORM
x [n]
X (z),
x [n - n 0]
z-n e X (z) +
x [n + n 0]
zn e X (z) 0
with ROC Rx
n0
/ x [- m] z
m=1
n0 - 1
/ x [m] z
-m
o,
o,
m=0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ x [n - n ] z
Page 505
Chap 6
-n
n=0
Z {x [n - n 0]} =
The Z-Transform
/ x [n - n ] z
-n n 0 -n 0
z z
n=0
= z-n
/ x [n - n ] z
- (n - n 0)
n=0
Substituting n - n 0 = a
Limits; when n " 0, a " - n 0
when n " + 3, a " + 3
Now, Z {x [n - n 0]} = z-n
= z-n
or,
or,
Z {x [n - n 0]} = z-n
/ x [a] z
-a
a =- n 0
-1
/ x [a] z
a =- n 0
3
/ x [a] z
+ z-n
-a
-a
+ z-n
/ x [a] z
-a
a=0
-1
0
/ x [a] z
-a
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Z {x [n - n 0]} = z-n
a=0
3
/ x [a] z
-a
+ z-n
a =- n 0
n0
a=0
/ x [- a] z
a=1
Changing the variables as a " n and a " m in first and second summation
respectively
Z {x [n - n 0]} = z-n
/ x [n] z
-n
+ z-n
n=0
n0
/ x [- m] z
m=1
n0
/ x [- m] z
m=1
z e X (z) n0
n0 - 1
/ x [m] z
-m
m=0
6.5.3
Time Reversal
x [- n]
If
then
for bilateral z -transform.
X (z),
X b 1 l,
z
with ROC : Rx
with ROC : 1/Rx
PROOF :
/ x [ - n] z
Z {x [- n]} =
-n
n =- 3
-3
/ x [ k] z
k=3
Hence,
x [- n]
Xb 1 l
z
/ x [k] (z
k =- 3
-1 -k
= Xb 1 l
z
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
6.5.4
The Z-Transform
If
X (z),
dX (z)
Z
then
,
nx [n]
-z
dz
For both unilateral and bilateral z -transforms.
x [n]
with ROC : Rx
with ROC : Rx
PROOF :
/ x [ n] z
X (z) =
-n
n =- 3
6.5.5
o
.c
i. n
a
i
d
o
n
Scaling in z -Domain
.
w
w
X (z),
Z
then
a n x [n]
X a z k,
a
for both unilateral and bilateral transform.
x [n]
with ROC : Rx
with ROC : a Rx
PROOF :
/ a x [n] z
Z {an x [n]} =
-n
n =- 3
/ x [n] [a
-1
z] -n
n =- 3
a x [n]
Xa z k
a
ROC : If z is a point in the ROC of X (z) then the point a z is in the ROC
of X (z/a).
n
6.5.6
Time Scaling
As we discussed in Chapter 2, there are two types of scaling in the DT
domain decimation(compression) and interpolation(expansion).
Time Compression
Since the decimation (compression) of DT signals is an irreversible process
(because some data may lost), therefore the z -transform of x [n] and its
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 507
Chap 6
Time Expansion
In the discrete time domain, time expansion of sequence x [n] is defined as
x [n/k] if n is a multiple of integer k
(6.5.1)
x k [ n] = )
0
otherwise
Time-scaling property of z -transform is derived only for time expansion
which is given as
If
then
x [n]
X (z),
x k [ n]
Xk (z) = X (zk ),
The Z-Transform
with ROC : Rx
with ROC : (Rx ) 1/k
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Z {xk [n]} =
/ x [n] z
k
-n
n=0
= x [n/k]
= x [0],
= x [1]
= x [2]
Z {xk [n]} = x [0] + x [1] z-k + x [2] z-2k + x [3] z-3k + ...
=
/ x [n] (z )
k -n
= X (zk )
n=0
NOTE :
k
Time expansion of a DT sequence by a factor of k corresponds to replacing z as z in its z
-transform.
6.5.7
Time Differencing
If
x [n]
X (z),
with ROC : Rx
-1
then
x [ n ] - x [ n - 1]
(1 - z ) X (z), with the ROC
: Rx except for the possible deletion of z = 0 , for both unilateral and
bilateral transform.
Z
PROOF :
/ {x [n] - x [n - 1]} z
-n
n =- 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
n =- 3
The Z-Transform
/ x [ n - 1] z
x [n] z-n -
-n
n =- 3
/ x [ n] z
Z {x [n] - x [n - 1]} =
=
-n
n =- 3
3
/ x [r] z
- (r + 1)
r =- 3
/ x [ n] z
-n
/ x [r] z
- z-1
n =- 3
-r
r =- 3
-1
= X (z) - z X (z)
Hence, x [n] - x [n - 1]
6.5.8
(1 - z-1) X (z)
Time Convolution
Time convolution property states that convolution of two sequence in time
domain corresponds to multiplication in z -domain.
Let
x 1 [ n]
X1 (z),
ROC : R1
and
x 2 [ n]
X2 (z),
ROC : R2
i. n
X1 (z) X2 (z),
ROC : at least R1 + R2
o
.c
a
i
d
PROOF :
o
n
x 1 [ n] * x 2 [ n] =
.
w
w
/ x [k] x [n - k]
1
k =- 3
x 1 [ n] * x 2 [ n]
/ / x [k ] x [n - k ] z
-n
n =- 3 k =- 3
/ x [k ] / x [n - k ] z
-n
k =- 3
n =- 3
or
6.5.9
x [n ] * x 2 [n ]
x [n ] * x 2 [n ]
x 1 [ n] * x 2 [ n]
/ x [k ] / x [a] z
1
k =- 3
3
- (a + k)
a =- 3
/ x [k] z
1
-k
k =- 3
oe
/ x [a] z
-a
a =- 3
X1 (z) X2 (z)
Conjugation Property
x [n]
X (z),
with ROC : Rx
then
x [n]
X (z ),
with ROC : Rx
X (z) = X )(z ))
If
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
PROOF :
Page 509
Chap 6
/ 6x [n] (z )
3
x)[n] z-n =
n =- 3
) -n )
(6.5.2)
The Z-Transform
n =- 3
/ x [ n] z
-n
n =- 3
/ [ x [ n] z
-n )
n =- 3
/ 6x [n] (z )
3
) -n
(6.5.3)
n =- 3
(6.5.4)
x)[n] = x [n], so
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Z {x)[n]} =
/ x [ n] z
-n
= X (z)
(6.5.5)
n =- 3
If
x [n]
then initial-value theorem states that,
X (z),
with ROC : Rx
The initial-value theorem is valid only for the unilateral Lapalce transform
PROOF :
/ x [ n] z
-n
n=0
z"3
z"3
X (z),
with ROC : Rx
Final value theorem is applicable if X (z) has no poles outside the unit
circle. This theorem can be applied to either the unilateral or bilateral z
-transform.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
PROOF :
= lim
Z {x [n + 1]} - Z {x [n]}
(6.5.6)
/ {x [n + 1] - x [n]} z
-n
k"3
n=0
x [ n + 1]
zn e X (z) 0
z e X (z) -
n0 - 1
/ x [m] z
m=0
0
-m
/ x [m] z
-m
m=0
x [ n + 1]
z ^X (z) - x [0]h
Put above transformation in the equation (6.5.6)
Z
/ (x [n + 1] - x [n]) z
/ (x [n + 1] - x [n]) z
-n
k"3
n=0
k
-n
k"3
n=0
i. n
/ x [n + 1] - x [n]
k"3
n=0
o
.c
lim (z - 1) X [z] - x [0] = lim {(x [1] - x [0]) + (x [2] - x [1]) + (x [3] - x [2]) + ...
z"1
k"3
... + (x [k + 1] - x [k])
a
i
d
o
n
Summary of Properties
.
w
w
Let,
x [n]
X (z),
with ROC Rx
x 1 [ n]
X1 (z),
with ROC R1
x 2 [ n]
X2 (z),
with ROC R2
z -transform
Properties
Time domain
z -transform
ROC
Linearity
Time shifting
(bilateral or
non-causal)
x [n - n 0]
z-n X (z)
x [n + n 0]
zn X (z)
at least R1 + R2
Rx except for the
possible
deletion
or
addition
of
z = 0 or z = 3
z-n ^X (z)
0
x [n - n 0]
Time shifting
(unilateral or
causal)
n0
/ x [- m] z
m=1
zn ^X (z)
0
x [n + n 0]
n0 - 1
/ x [m] z
-m
m=0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Time domain
z -transform
Time reversal
x [- n]
Xb 1 l
z
Differentiation
in z domain
nx [n]
-z
Scaling in z
domain
a n x [n]
Xa z k
a
Time scaling
(expansion)
Page 511
Chap 6
ROC
The Z-Transform
Time
differencing
1/Rx
dX (z)
dz
Rx
a Rx
(Rx ) 1/k
-1
x [n] - x [n - 1] (1 - z ) X (z)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Time
convolution
x 1 [ n] * x 2 [ n]
X1 (z) X2 (z)
at least R1 + R2
Conjugations
x [n]
X (z )
Rx
provided
for n < 0
x [n] = 0
provided
exists
x [3]
Initial-value
theorem
z"3
x [3]
= lim x [n]
Final-value
theorem
n"3
= lim (z - 1) X (z)
z"1
6.6
z -TRANSFORM
The z -transform is very useful tool in the analysis of discrete LTI system. As
the Laplace transform is used in solving differential equations which describe
continuous LTI systems, the z -transform is used to solve difference equation
which describe the discrete LTI systems.
Similar to Laplace transform, for CT domain, the z -transform gives
transfer function of the LTI discrete systems which is the ratio of the z
-transform of the output variable to the z -transform of the input variable.
These applications are discussed as follows
6.6.1
/ a y [n - k ] = / b x [n - k ]
k
k=0
k=0
(6.6.1)
= bM x [n - M] + bM - 1 x [n - (M - 1)] + ..... + b1 x [n - 1] + b0 x [n]
where, N is order of the system.
Z
The time-shift property of z -transform x [n - n 0]
z-n X (z), is used
to solve the above difference equation which converts it into an algebraic
equation. By taking z -transform of above equation
0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 512
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
-N
M-1
Y (z)
= bM z N + bM - 1 zN - 1 + ..... + b1 + b 0
X (z)
+ ..... + a1 + a 0
aN z + aN - 1 z
this equation can be solved for Y (z) to find the response y [n].The solution or
total response y [n] consists of two parts as discussed below.
NOTE :
The zero input response is also called the natural response of the system and it is denoted
as y N [n].
i. n
o
.c
The zero-state response yzs [n] is the response of the system due to input
signal and with zero initial conditions. The zero-state response is obtained
from the difference equation (6.6.1) governing the system for specific input
signal x [n] for n $ 0 and with zero initial conditions.
Substituting y [n] = yzs [n] in equation (6.6.1) we get,
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Taking z -transform of the above equation with zero initial conditions for
output (i.e., y [- 1] = y [- 2] ... = 0 we can form an equation for Yzs (z).
The zero-state response yzs [n] is given by inverse z -transform of Yzs (z).
NOTE :
The zero state response is also called the forced response of the system and it is denoted as
y F [n].
Total Response
The total response y [n] is the response of the system due to input signal and
initial output. The total response can be obtained in following two ways :
Taking z -transform of equation (6.6.1) with non-zero initial conditions
for both input and output, and then substituting for X (z) we can form
an equation for Y (z). The total response y [n] is given by inverse Laplace
transform of Y (s).
Alternatively, that total response y [n] is given by sum of zero-input
response yzi [n] and zero-state response yzs [n].
Therefore total response,
y [n] = yzi [n] + yzs [n]
6.6.2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
y [n] of the discrete time system is given by convolution sum of input and
impulse response as
y [n] = x [n] * h [n]
By applying convolution property of z -transform we obtain
Page 513
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
6.7.1
Causality
6.7.2
Stability
An LTI discrete-time system is said to be BIBO stable if the impulse response
h [n] is summable. That is
3
h [ n] < 3
n =- 3
/ h [n] z
-n
n =- 3
jW
/ h [n] e
n =- 3
3
#
=
-jWn
/ h [n] e
n =- 3
3
-jWn
h [ n] < 3
n =- 3
which is the condition for the stability. Thus we can conclude that
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The Z-Transform
An LTI system is stable if the ROC of its system function H (z) contains
the unit circle z = 1
6.7.3
An LTI discrete time system with the rational system function H (z) is
said to be both causal and stable if all the poles of H (z) lies inside the
unit circle.
6.8
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Elements
of Block
diagram
s -domain Representation
Adder
Constant
multiplier
Unit delay
element
Unit
advance
element
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The different types of structures for realizing discrete time systems are same
as we discussed for the continuous-time system in the previous chapter.
6.8.1
Page 515
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Figure 6.8.1a General structure of direct form-realization
For example consider a discrete LTI system which has the following
impulse response
Y (z) 1 + 2z-1 + 2z-2
H (z) =
=
X (z) 1 + 4z-1 + 3z-2
Y (z) + 4z-1 Y (z) + 3z-2 Y (z) = 1X (z) + 2z-1 X (z) + 2z-2 X (z)
Comparing with standard form of equation (6.8.1), we get a1 = 4 , a2 = 3
and b 0 = 1, b1 = 2 , b2 = 2 . Now put these values in general structure of Direct
form-I realization we get
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Figure 6.8.1b
6.8.2
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 517
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Figure 6.8.2b
6.8.3
Cascade Form
The transfer function H (z) of a discrete time system can be expressed as
a product of several transfer functions. Each of these transfer functions is
realized in direct form-I or direct form II realization and then they are
cascaded.
Consider a system with transfer function
(b + bk1 z-1 + bk2 z-2) (bm0 + bm1 z-1 + bm2 z-2)
H (z) = k0
(1 + ak1 z-1 + ak2 z-2) (1 + am1 z-1 + am2 z-2)
= H1 (z) H2 (z)
-1
-2
where
H1 (z) = bk0 + bk1 z-1 + bk2 z-2
1 + ak1 z + ak2 z
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 518
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
6.8.4
i. n
Parallel Form
o
.c
The transfer function H (z) of a discrete time system can be expressed as the
sum of several transfer functions using partial fractions. Then the individual
transfer functions are realized in direct form I or direct form II realization
and connected in parallel for the realization of H (z). Let us consider the
transfer function
c1
c2
cN
H (z) = c +
-1 +
-1 + ......
1 - p1 z
1 - pz z
1 - pn z-1
Now each factor in the system is realized in direct form II and connected
in parallel as shown in figure 6.8.4.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
6.9
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN
s-PLANE &
-PLANE
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 519
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
/ x (nT) d (t - nT)
n =- 3
where x (nT) are sampled value of x (t) which equals the DT sequence x [n].
Taking the Laplace transform of xs (t) , we have
X (s) = L {xs (t)} =
=
/ x (nT) L {d (t - nT)}
n =- 3
3
/ X (nT) e
-nTs
(6.9.1)
n =- 3
/ x [ n] z
-n
(6.9.2)
n =- 3
sT
x [n] = x (nT)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.1
Page 520
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.1
MCQ 6.1.2
MCQ 6.1.3
2z ,
2z - 1
-1
(D) 2z ,
z-1
z <1
2
z >1
2
i. n
n
n
Consider a discrete-time signal x [n] = b 1 l u [n] + b 1 l u [- n - 1]. The ROC
3
2
of its z -transform is
(B) z < 1
(A) 3 < z < 2
2
(C) z > 1
(D) 1 < z < 1
3
3
2
o
.c
MCQ 6.1.4
a
i
d
o
n
For a signal x [n] = [an + a-n] u [n], the ROC of its z -transform would be
(A) z > min e a , 1 o
a
(C) z > max e a , 1 o
a
MCQ 6.1.5
.
w
w
(B) z > a
(D) z < a
Match List I (discrete time sequence) with List II (z -transform) and choose
the correct answer using the codes given below the lists:
List-I (Discrete Time Sequence)
List-II (z -Transform)
P.
u [n - 2]
1.
1
,
z-2 (1 - z-1)
Q.
- u [- n - 3]
2.
- z-1 ,
1 - z-1
R.
u [n + 4]
3.
1
,
z-4 (1 - z-1)
S.
u [- n]
4.
z-2 ,
1 - z-1
Codes :
P
(A) 1
(B)
2
(C)
4
(D) 4
Q
4
4
1
2
R
2
1
3
3
z <1
z <1
z >1
z >1
S
3
3
2
1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.7
Page 521
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
Consider the pole zero diagram of an LTI system shown in the figure which
corresponds to transfer function H (z).
Match List I (The impulse response) with List II (ROC which corresponds to
above diagram) and choose the correct answer using the codes given below:
{Given that H (1) = 1}
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
List-I (Impulse Response)
P.
List-II (ROC)
1.
2.
z >3
3.
z <2
4.
Q. (- 4) 2 u [n] + (- 6) 3 u [- n - 1]
R. (4) 2 u [- n - 1] + (- 6) 3 u [- n - 1]
S.
4 (2) u [- n - 1] + (- 6) 3 u [n]
Codes :
P
(A) 4
(B)
2
(C)
1
(D) 2
MCQ 6.1.8
Q
1
1
4
4
R
3
3
2
3
2< z <3
S
2
4
3
1
(D) d [n] + (n - 1) !
MCQ 6.1.10
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.11
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.12
MCQ 6.1.13
(D) [2 (3) n + (- 1) n] u [- n - 1]
z5
8z2 - 2z - 1
(D) 5 1 4
8z - 2z - z3
(B)
(A)
MCQ 6.1.14
Let x1 [n], x2 [n] and x 3 [n] be three discrete time signals and X1 (z), X2 (z) and
X 3 (z) are their z -transform respectively given as
z2
,
X1 (z) =
(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
z
X2 (z) =
(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
1
and
X 3 (z) =
(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
Then x1 [n], x2 [n] and x 3 [n] are related as
(A) x1 [n - 2] = x2 [n - 1] = x 3 [n]
(B) x1 [n + 2] = x2 [n + 1] = x 3 [n]
(C) x1 [n] = x2 [n - 1] = x 3 [n - 2]
(D) x1 [n + 1] = x2 [n - 1] = x 3 [n]
i. n
o
.c
MCQ 6.1.15
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
The z -transform of the discrete time signal x [n] shown in the figure is
z-k
1 - z-1
-k
(C) 1 - z-1
1-z
(A)
MCQ 6.1.16
MCQ 6.1.17
z-k
1 + z-1
-k
(D) 1 + z-1
1-z
(B)
X (z) =
(A)
z2 , 1
z-1 z-1
(B)
1 , z2
z-1 z-1
(C)
1 , z
z-1 z-1
(D)
z , z2
z-1 z-1
z . The z
z-1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 523
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.18
Match List I (Discrete time sequence) with List II (z -transform) and select
the correct answer using the codes given below the lists.
List-I (Discrete time sequence)
P.
n (- 1) n u [n]
1.
Q.
- nu [- n - 1]
2.
1
, ROC : z > 1
(1 + z-1)
R. (- 1) n u [n]
3.
S.
4.
nu [n]
Q
1
3
1
4
R
2
2
4
1
S
3
1
2
3
MCQ 6.1.20
MCQ 6.1.21
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Codes :
P
(A) 4
(B)
4
(C)
3
(D) 2
MCQ 6.1.19
List-II (z -transform)
Let X (z) be the z -transform of a causal signal x [n] = an u [n] with ROC : z > a .
Match the discrete sequences S1, S2, S 3 and S 4 with ROC of their z -transforms
R1, R2 and R 3 .
Sequences
ROC
S 1 : x [ n - 2]
R1 :
z >a
S 2 : x [ n + 2]
R2 :
z <a
S 3 : x [- n]
R3 :
z <1
a
S 4 : (- 1) n x [n]
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.22
The Z-Transform
Consider a discrete time signal x [n] = an u [n] and its z -transform X (z).
Match List I (discrete signals) with List II (z -transform) and select the
correct answer using the codes given below:
List-I (Discrete time signal)
List-II (z -transform)
P.
x [n/2]
1.
z-2 X (z)
Q.
x [ n - 2] u [ n - 2 ]
2.
X (z2)
R. x [n + 2] u [n]
3.
X (z/b 2)
S.
4.
a2 X (z)
b 2n x [n]
Codes :
P
(A) 1
(B)
2
(C)
1
(D) 2
Q
2
4
4
1
R
4
1
2
4
S
3
3
3
3
MCQ 6.1.23
MCQ 6.1.24
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
4z
(z - 1) (8z2 - 2z - 1)
4z2
(C)
(z + 1) (8z2 - 2z - 1)
(A)
MCQ 6.1.25
4z (z - 1)
8z2 - 2z - 1
4z (z + 1)
(D) 2
8z - 2z - 1
(B)
(A) {- 2, - 4, 3, 6, 9}
(C) {9, 6, 3, - 4, - 2}
-
MCQ 6.1.26
MCQ 6.1.27
If x [n]
(B) {- 2, 4, - 3, 12, 0, 9}
(D) {- 3, 6, 7, 4, 6}
-
(A) x)[n]
X )(- z)
(B) x)[n]
- X)(z)
(C) x)[n]
X)(z))
(D) x)[n]
X)(- z))
n+1
(D) 5 b 1 l , n $ 0
2 2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Consider a causal system with impulse response h [n] = (2) n u [n]. If x [n] is
the input and y [n] is the output to this system, then which of the following
difference equation describes the system ?
(A) y [n] + 2y [n + 1] = x [n]
(B) y [n] - 2y [n - 1] = x [n]
(C) y [n] + 2y [n - 1] = x [n]
(D) y [n] - 1 y [n - 1] = x [n]
2
MCQ 6.1.29
MCQ 6.1.30
MCQ 6.1.31
Page 525
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n
(B) ;2 - b 1 l E u [n]
2
MCQ 6.1.32
MCQ 6.1.33
MCQ 6.1.34
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.35
The Z-Transform
If h [n] denotes the impulse response of a causal system, then which of the
following system is not stable?
n
(B) h [n] = 1 d [n]
(A) h [n] = n b 1 l u [n]
3
3
(C) h [n] = d [n] - b- 1 l u [n]
3
n
MCQ 6.1.36
A causal system with input x [n] and output y [n] has the following relationship
y [n] + 3y [n - 1] + 2y [n - 2] = 2x [n] + 3x [n - 1]
The system is
(A) stable
(C) marginally stable
MCQ 6.1.37
(B) unstable
(D) none of these
i. n
MCQ 6.1.38
o
.c
a
i
d
Match List I (system transfer function) with List II (property of system) and
choose the correct answer using the codes given below
o
n
.
w
w
P. H (z) =
z3
, ROC : z > 1.2
(z - 1.2) 3
1.
Q. H (z) =
z2
, ROC : z < 1.2
(z - 1.2) 3
2.
R. H (z) =
z4
, ROC : z < 0.8
(z - 0.8) 3
3.
S. H (z) =
z3
, ROC : z > 0.8
(z - 0.8) 3
4.
Codes :
P
(A) 4
(B)
1
(C)
3
(D) 3
MCQ 6.1.39
Q
2
4
1
2
R
1
2
2
1
S
3
3
4
4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.41
MCQ 6.1.42
MCQ 6.1.43
Consider three stable LTI systems S1, S2 and S 3 whose transfer functions are
z- 1
S1 : H (z) = 2 1 2 3
2z + 2 z - 16
S2 : H (z) = 2 -3 z 1+-12 4
-3z - 2z + 3 +z
1 + 12 z-2 - 43 z-1
S 3 : H (z) = -1
z ^1 - 13 z-1h^1 - 12 z-1h
Which of the above systems is/are causal?
(A) S1 only
(B) S1 and S2
(C) S1 and S 3
(D) S1, S2 and S 3
The z -transform of d [n - k], k > 0 is
(A) zk , z > 0
(C) zk , z ! 0
(B) zk , z ! 0
(D) zk , all z
MCQ 6.1.46
MCQ 6.1.47
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1 ,
1 - z-1
z ,
(C)
1 - z-1
MCQ 6.1.45
Page 527
Chap 6
MCQ 6.1.44
1 ,
1 - z-1
z ,
(D)
1 - z-1
z >1
(B)
z <1
n
The z -transform of b 1 l (u [n] - u [n - 5]) is
4
5
5
z - (0.25)
(B)
(A) 4
, z > 0.25
z (z - 0.25)
z5 - (0.25) 5
(C) 3
(D)
, z < 0.25
z (z - 0.25)
n
The z -transform of b 1 l u [- n] is
4
(A) 4z , z > 1
4z - 1
4
1 , z >1
(C)
1 - 4z
4
The z -transform of 3n u [- n - 1] is
(A) z , z > 3
3-z
(C) 3 , z > 3
3-z
z >1
z5 - (0.25) 5
, z > 0. 5
z 4 (z - 0.25)
z5 - (0.25) 5
, all z
z 4 (z - 0.25)
4z ,
4z - 1
1 ,
(D)
1 - 4z
(B)
z <1
z <1
4
z <1
4
z , z <3
3-z
(D) 3 , z < 3
3-z
(B)
n
The z -transform of b 2 l is
3
- 5z
(A)
, -3 < z <-2
2
3
(2z - 3) (3z - 2)
- 5z
(B)
, 2< z <3
2
(2z - 3) (3z - 2) 3
5z
(C)
, 2< z <2
3
(2z - 3) (3z - 2) 3
5z
(D)
, -3 < z <-2
2
3
(2z - 3) (3z - 2)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.48
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.49
z (2z - 1)
,
2 (z2 - z + 1)
z (1 - 2z)
(D)
,
2 (z2 - z + 1)
(B)
z >1
z >1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.1.50
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.1.51
2z + 4z + 5 + 7z + z ,
2z-2 + 4z-1 + 5 + 7z + z3,
2z-2 + 4z-1 + 5 + 7z + z3,
2z2 + 4z + 5 + 7z-1 + z-3,
z!3
z!3
0< z <3
0< z <3
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.1.53
MCQ 6.1.55
o
.c
i. n
z2 - 3z , 1 < z < 2 is
2
z2 + 32 z - 1
1
(B) - n u [n] - 2n + 1 u [n + 1]
2
(D) 1n u [n] - 2-n - 1 u [- n - 1]
2
3z2 - 14 z
, z > 4 is
z2 - 16
(B) : 49 4n + 47 4nD u [n]
32
32
(D) 49 4n u [n] + 47 (- 4) n u [- n]
32
32
4
3
2
The time signal corresponding to 2z - 22z - 2z , z > 1 is
z -1
n
(A) 2d [n - 2] + [1 - (- 1) ] u [n - 2]
(B) 2d [n + 2] + [1 - (- 1) n] u [n + 2]
(C) 2d [n + 2] + [(- 1) n - 1] u [n + 2]
(D) 2d [n - 2] + [(- 1) n - 1] u [n - 2]
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.56
/ k1 z-k,
10
k=5
10
(A) / 1 d [n + k]
k
k=5
(C)
z > 0 is
(B)
10
/ k1 d [- n + k]
(D)
k=5
10
/ k1 d [n - k]
The Z-Transform
k=5
10
/ k1 d [- n - k]
k=5
MCQ 6.1.57
MCQ 6.1.58
MCQ 6.1.59
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
2-n,
(A) *
0,
2-n,
(C) *
0,
MCQ 6.1.60
Page 529
Chap 6
n even and n $ 0
otherwise
n odd, n > 0
n even
1 -2
4
1- z
z > 1 is
2
2n
(B) b 1 l u [n]
4
1
,
1 - 14 z-2
z < 1 is
2
(A) - / 22 (k + 1) d [- n - 2 (k + 1)]
k=0
3
(B) - / 22 (k + 1) d [- n + 2 (k + 1)]
k=0
3
(C) - / 22 (k + 1) d [n + 2 (k + 1)]
k=0
3
(D) - / 22 (k + 1) d [n - 2 (k + 1)]
k=0
MCQ 6.1.61
MCQ 6.1.62
(- 1) k - 1
d [n - k ]
k
(B)
(- 1) k - 1
d [n + k ]
k
(C)
(- 1) k
d [n - k ]
k
(D)
(- 1) k
d [n + k ]
k
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 530
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
x2 [n] =- 2n u [n - 1] - 1n u [n]
3
x 3 [n] =- 2n u [n - 1] + 1n u [- n - 1]
3
Correct solution is
(A) x1 [n]
(B) x2 [n]
(C) x 3 [n]
(D) All three
MCQ 6.1.63
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.1.64
R1
x 1 [ n]
x 2 [ n]
x 1 [ n]
x 3 [ n]
R2
x 2 [ n]
x 3 [ n]
x 3 [ n]
x 2 [ n]
R3
x 3 [ n]
x 1 [ n]
x 2 [ n]
x 1 [ n]
1 + 76 z-1
-1
-1
^1 - 12 z h^1 + 13 z h
For three different ROC consider there different solution of signal x [n] :
n
(a) z > 1 , x [n] = ; n1- 1 - b - 1 l E u [n]
2
3
2
n
(b) z < 1 , x [n] = ; -n -11 + b - 1 l E u [- n + 1]
3
3
2
n
(c) 1 < z < 1 , x [n] =- n1- 1 u [- n - 1] - b - 1 l u [n]
3
2
3
2
Correct solution are
(A) (a) and (b)
(B) (a) and (c)
(C) (b) and (c)
(D) (a), (b), (c)
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.66
1 u [n] + u [- n + 1]
2n - 1
If x [n] is right-sided, X (z) has a signal pole and x [0] = 2, x [2] = 1 , then x [n]
2
is
u [ - n]
2n - 1
u [ - n]
(C) n + 1
2
u [n]
2n - 1
u [ - n]
(D) a n + 1
2
(B)
(A)
MCQ 6.1.67
The Z-Transform
(B) 1n u [n] - (- 1) n u [- n - 1]
2
(D) 1n u [n] + u [- n + 1]
2
1
n
n - 1 u [n] - (- 1) u [- n - 1]
Page 531
Chap 6
n
n
The z -transform of b 1 l u [n] + b 1 l u [- n - 1] is
2
4
1
1
(A)
, 1< z <1
2
1 - 12 z-1 1 - 14 z-1 4
1
1
(B)
+
, 1< z <1
2
1 - 12 z-1 1 - 14 z-1 4
1
1
(C)
z >1
1 -1 1 -1 ,
2
1- 2z
1- 4z
(D) None of the above
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.1.69
z2 ,
z2 - 16
z <4
MCQ 6.1.70
MCQ 6.1.71
- 32z2
(z2 - 16) 2
(D) 2- 32z 2
(z - 16)
(B)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.72
MCQ 6.1.73
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.75
MCQ 6.1.76
X (z)
n
(B) b- 3 l n2 u [n]
2
n
(C) b 3 l n2 u [n]
2
(D) 6n n2 u [n]
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.1.77
2
-2
The time signal corresponding to b z - z l X (z) is
2
(A) 1 (x [n + 2] - x [n - 2])
2
(C) 1 x [n - 2] - x [n + 2])
2
(B) x [n + 2] - x [n - 2]
(D) x [n - 2] - x [n + 2]
MCQ 6.1.78
MCQ 6.1.79
n
n
(B) 1 ;5 b 1 l + 2 b - 1 l E u [n]
3 2
4
n
n
(D) 1 ;5 b 1 l + 2 b 1 l E u [n]
3 2
4
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 533
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.1.81
A system has impulse response h [n] = ( 12 ) n u [n]. The output y [n] to the input
x [n] is given by y [n] = 2d [n - 4]. The input x [n] is
(A) 2d [- n - 4] - d [- n - 5]
(B) 2d [n + 4] - d [n + 5]
(C) 2d [- n + 4] - d [- n + 5]
(D) 2d [n - 4] - d [n - 5]
MCQ 6.1.82
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
y [n] = x [n] - x [n - 2] + x [n - 4] - x [n - 6]
The impulse response of system is
(A) d [n] - 2d [n + 2] + 4d [n + 4] - 6d [n + 6]
(B) d [n] + 2d [n - 2] - 4d [n - 4] + 6d [n - 6]
(C) d [n] - d [n - 2] + d [n - 4] - d [n - 6]
(D) d [n] - d [n + 2] + d [n + 4] - d [n + 6]
MCQ 6.1.83
MCQ 6.1.84
MCQ 6.1.85
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.1.86
The Z-Transform
2 - 32 z-1
The z -transform function of a stable system is H (z) =
.
(1 - 2z-1) (1 + 12 z-1)
The impulse response h [n] is
(B) - 2n u [- n - 1] + b - 1 l u [n]
2
n
(D) 2n u [n] - b 1 l u [n]
2
(A) 2n u [- n + 1] - b 1 l u [n]
2
n
(C) - 2n u [- n - 1] - b - 1 l u [n]
2
n
MCQ 6.1.87
2
The transfer function of a causal system is H (z) = 2 5z
. The impulse
z -z-6
response is
z (3z - 2)
The transfer function of a system is given by H (z) = 2
. The system
z - z - 14
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.1.89
o
.c
a
i
d
3
The z -transform of a signal x [n] is X (z) =
. If X (z) converges
1 - 103 z-1 + z-2
on the unit circle, x [n] is
1
o
n
u [ n] - 3
.
w
w
(A) -
n+3
u [- n - 1]
8
3n - 1 (8)
n+3
(C) n -11 u [n] - 3 u [- n]
(8)
3 (8)
MCQ 6.1.90
n+3
u [ n] - 3 u [ - n]
n-1
(8)
3 (8)
n+3
(D) - n -11 u [n] - 3 u [- n]
(8)
3 (8)
(B)
MCQ 6.1.91
i. n
4z-1 ,
-1 2
^1 - 14 z h
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 535
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
(A) 2^
- 2h
(1 + (- 1) n) u [n] + 1 d [n]
2
n
(B) 2 (1 + (- 1) n) u [n] + 1 d [n]
2
2
n
(D) 2 [1 + (- 1) n] u [n] - 1 d [n]
2
2
The system diagram for the transfer function H (z) = 2 z
. is shown
z +z+1
below.
(C) 2^
MCQ 6.1.93
n
2
n
2
- 2h
(1 + (- 1) n) u [n] - 1 d [n]
2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.2
Page 536
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
QUES 6.2.1
QUES 6.2.2
QUES 6.2.3
QUES 6.2.4
QUES 6.2.5
QUES 6.2.6
QUES 6.2.7
QUES 6.2.8
o
.c
-2
Let x [n]
X (z) be a z -transform pair, where X (z) = z . What will be
z-3
the value of x [5] ?
Z
a
i
d
kz k
The z -transform of a discrete time sequence y [n] = n [n + 1] u [n] is
(z - 1) k + 1
such that the value of k is _______
o
n
.
w
w
A signal x [n] has the following z -transform X (z) = log (1 - 2z), ROC : z <
. Let the signal be
n
x [n] 1 b 1 l u [ a - n]
n 2
what is the value of a in the expression ?
QUES 6.2.9
i. n
-9
The inverse z -transform of a function X (z) = z
is an - k u [n - k ] where
z-a
the value of k is _______
Let x [n]
defined as
1
2
if n is even
if n is odd
QUES 6.2.11
QUES 6.2.12
QUES 6.2.13
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
QUES 6.2.14
The signal x [n] = (0.5) u [n] is when applied to a digital filter, it yields the
following output y [n] = d [n] - 2d [n - 1]. If impulse response of the filter is
h [n], then what will be the value of sample h [1] ?
QUES 6.2.15
The transfer function for the system realization shown in the figure will be
k (z + 1) - 1
such that the value of k is _______
z-2
QUES 6.2.16
Page 537
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n
h1 [n] = d [n] + 1 d [n - 1] and h2 [n] = b 1 l u [n]
2
2
If an input x [n] = cos (np) is applied, then output y [n] = k cos np where the
constant k is _______
where,
QUES 6.2.17
The block diagram of a discrete time system is shown in the figure below
QUES 6.2.19
QUES 6.2.20
QUES 6.2.21
QUES 6.2.22
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.3
Page 538
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.3.1
MCQ 6.3.2
/ x [ n] z
(B)
n=0
3
/ x [ n] z
(D)
(C)
x [ n] z n
n=0
3
(B)
-n
i. n
-n
a
i
d
(D)
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
3
/ x [ n] z
-n
n =- 3
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
3
o
n
.
w
w
(C)
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
MCQ 6.3.6
/ x [ n] z
o
.c
/ x [ n] z
n=0
MCQ 6.3.5
n=0
3
MCQ 6.3.4
-n
n =- 3
n =- 3
MCQ 6.3.3
/ x [ n] z
-n
(B)
(D)
/ x [ n] z
n=0
3
/ x [ n] z
-n
n=0
The ROC of z -transform X (z) is defined as the range of values of z for which
X (z)
(A) zero
(B) diverges
(C) converges
(D) none
MCQ 6.3.7
MCQ 6.3.8
MCQ 6.3.9
(B) 1s
(D) none
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Let x [n]
X (z) be a z -transform pair. If x [n] = d [n], then the ROC of
X (z) is
(A) z < 1
(B) z > 1
(C) entire z -plane
(D) none of the above
Z
MCQ 6.3.11
MCQ 6.3.12
The
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.3.13
Page 539
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.3.14
MCQ 6.3.15
MCQ 6.3.16
Let x [n]
X (z), then unilateral z -transform of sequence x1 [n] = x [n - 1]
will be
(A) X1 (z) = z-1 X (z) + x [0]
(B) X1 (z) = z-1 X (z) - x [1]
(C) X1 (z) = z-1 X (z) - x [- 1]
(D) X1 (z) = z-1 X [z] + x [- 1]
MCQ 6.3.17
Let x [n]
(A) zX (z)
(C) z-n X (z)
0
MCQ 6.3.18
MCQ 6.3.19
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.3.20
If x [n] and y [n] are two discrete time sequences, then the z -transform of
correlation of the sequences x [n] and y [n] is
(A) X (z-1) Y (z-1)
(B) X (z) Y (z-1)
(C) X (z) * Y (z)
(D) X * (z) Y * (z-1)
MCQ 6.3.21
The Z-Transform
z"3
z"0
MCQ 6.3.22
MCQ 6.3.23
Which of the following schemes of system realization uses separate delays for
input and output samples ?
(A) parallel form
(B) cascade form
(C) direct form-I
(D) direct form-II
MCQ 6.3.24
MCQ 6.3.25
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.3.26
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
EXERCISE 6.4
Page 541
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.4.1
IES EC 2007
1
1-z
(D) X (z) = 1
z-a
(A) X (z) =
(B) X (z) =
MCQ 6.4.2
GATE EC 1998
(A) z - 1
z
(C)
/ d [n - k] is
k=0
z
(z - 1) 2
(B)
z
z-1
(D)
(z - 1) 2
z
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
MCQ 6.4.3
GATE EC 1999
z
z - aT
z
(C)
z - a-T
MCQ 6.4.4
GATE EE 2006
(A)
z
z + aT
z
(D)
z + a-T
(B)
/
/
(C) y3 [n] ) Y3 (z) = / n3=- 3 2 - n z - n
MCQ 6.4.5
IES E & T 1994
MCQ 6.4.6
IES EC 2002
MCQ 6.4.7
IES EC 2006
denotes
)
Which one of the following is the region of convergence (ROC) for the
sequence x [n] = bn u [n] + b-n u [- n - 1]; b < 1 ?
(A) Region z < 1
(B) Annular strip in the region b > z > 1
b
(C) Region z > 1
(D) Annular strip in the region b < z < 1
b
Assertion (A) : The signals an u [n] and - an u [- n - 1] have the same z
-transform, z/ (z - a).
Reason (R) : The Reason of Convergence (ROC) for an u [n] is z > a ,
whereas the ROC for an u [- n - 1] is z < a .
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false but R is true
Which one of the following is the correct statement ?
The region of convergence of z -transform of x [n] consists of the values of z
for which x [n] r-n is
(A) absolutely integrable
(B) absolutely summable
(C) unity
(D) < 1
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.8
GATE EC 2009
MCQ 6.4.9
GATE EC 2005
MCQ 6.4.10
GATE IN 2008
MCQ 6.4.11
GATE EC 2001
MCQ 6.4.12
IES EC 2005
n
n
The ROC of z -transform of the sequence x [n] = b 1 l u [n] - b 1 l u [- n - 1] is
3
2
(A) 1 < z < 1
(B) z > 1
3
2
2
(C) z < 1
(D) 2 < z < 3
3
The region of convergence of z - transform of the sequence
5 n
6 n
b 6 l u [n] - b 5 l u [- n - 1] must be
(A) z < 5
(B) z > 5
6
6
(C) 5 < z < 6
(D) 6 < z < 3
6
5
5
The region of convergence of the z -transform of the discrete-time signal
x [n] = 2n u [n] will be
(A) z > 2
(B) z < 2
(C) z > 1
(D) z < 1
2
2
i. n
o
.c
Match List I (Discrete Time signal) with List II (Transform) and select the
correct answer using the codes given below the lists :
List I
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
2.
z - cos wT
z - 2z cos wT + 1
C. sin wt, t = 0, T, 2T
3.
z
z-1
4.
z sin wT
z - 2z cos wT + 1
Codes :
A
(A) 2
(B)
3
(C)
2
(D) 3
IES EC 2006
MCQ 6.4.14
IES E & T 1997
1. 1
w
MCQ 6.4.13
List II
B
4
1
1
4
C
1
4
4
1
D
3
2
3
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1
with z > 1, then what is the corresponding x [n] ?
1 - z-1
(B) en
(D) d (n)
Page 543
Chap 6
MCQ 6.4.15
If X (z) is
IES EC 2008
(A) e-n
(C) u [n]
MCQ 6.4.16
GATE EC 2007
MCQ 6.4.17
GATE EE 2005
MCQ 6.4.18
IES EC 2002
-1
If u (t) is the unit step and d (t) is the unit impulse function, the inverse z
-transform of F (z) = z +1 1 for k > 0 is
(A) (- 1) k d (k)
(B) d (k) - (- 1) k
(C) (- 1) k u (k)
(D) u (k) - (- 1) k
5
^2z - 6 h
1
1
^z - 2 h^z - 3 h
Match List I (The sequences) with List II (The region of convergence ) and
select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists :
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
List I
IES EC 2005
MCQ 6.4.20
GATE EE 2008
List II
2.
z < (1/3)
3.
D. - [(1/2) n + (1/3) n] u [- n - 1]
4.
z > 1/2
Codes :
A
(A) 4
(B)
1
(C)
4
(D) 1
MCQ 6.4.19
B
2
3
3
2
C
1
4
1
4
D
3
2
2
3
(C) nan
MCQ 6.4.21
GATE IN 2004
The Z-Transform
1
2
3
+
, a and b < 1 with the ROC specified as
1 - az-1 1 - bz-1
a < z < b , then x [0] of the corresponding sequence is given by
(B) 5
(A) 1
3
6
(C) 1
(D) 1
2
6
Given X (z) =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.22
The Z-Transform
IES EC 2002
MCQ 6.4.23
GATE EC 2010
MCQ 6.4.24
GATE IN 2003
MCQ 6.4.25
GATE EC 2006
MCQ 6.4.26
IES EC 2000
-3
If X (z) = z + z-1 then x [n] series has
z+z
(A) alternate 0s
(C) alternate 2s
Consider the z -transform x (z) = 5z2 + 4z-1 + 3; 0 < z < 3. The inverse z
- transform x [n] is
(A) 5d [n + 2] + 3d [n] + 4d [n - 1]
(B) 5d [n - 2] + 3d [n] + 4d [n + 1]
(C) 5u [n + 2] + 3u [n] + 4u [n - 1]
(D) 5u [n - 2] + 3u [n] + 4u [n + 1]
The sequence x [n] whose z -transform is X (z) = e1/z is
(B) 1 u [- n]
(A) 1 u [n]
n!
- n!
1
(C) (- 1) n 1 u [n]
(D)
u [- n - 1]
n!
- (n + 1) !
If the region of convergence of x1 [n] + x2 [n] is 1 < z < 2 then the region of
3
3
convergence of x1 [n] - x2 [n] includes
(A) 1 < z < 3
(B) 2 < z < 3
3
3
(C) 3 < z < 3
(D) 1 < z < 2
2
3
3
Match List I with List II and select the correct answer using the codes given
below the lists :
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
List I
o
n
A. an u [n]
.
w
w
B. - an u [- n - 1]
n
C. - na u [- n - 1]
D. nan u [n]
Codes :
A
(A) 2
(B)
1
(C)
1
(D) 2
MCQ 6.4.27
IES EC 2007
(B) alternate 1s
(D) alternate - 1s
B
4
3
4
3
C
3
4
3
4
List II
1.
az-1
, ROC : z > a
(1 - az-1) 2
2.
1
, ROC : z > a
(1 - az-1)
3.
1
, ROC : z < | a
(1 - az-1)
4.
az-1
, ROC : z < | a
(1 - az-1) 2
D
1
2
2
1
MCQ 6.4.28
IES E & T 1997
Given that F (z) and G (z) are the one-sided z -transforms of discrete time
functions f (nT) and g (nT), the z -transform of / f (kT) g (nT - kT) is given
by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Match List-I (x [n]) with List-II (X (z)) and select the correct answer using
the codes given below the Lists:
Page 545
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
List-I
A.
a n u [ n]
1.
az
(z - a) 2
B.
an - 2 u [n - 2]
2.
ze-j
ze-j - a
C.
e jn an
3.
z
z-a
D.
nan u [n]
4.
z-1
z-a
Codes :
A
(A) 3
(B)
2
(C)
3
(D) 1
MCQ 6.4.30
IES EC 2005
List-II
B
2
3
4
4
C
4
4
2
2
D
1
1
1
3
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
The output y [n] of a discrete time LTI system is related to the input x [n] as
given below :
y [n] =
/ x [k ]
k=0
MCQ 6.4.31
IES EC 2010
Which one of the following correctly relates the z -transform of the input and
output, denoted by X (z) and Y (z), respectively ?
(A) Y (z) = (1 - z-1) X (z)
(B) Y (z) = z-1 X (z)
X (z)
dX (z)
(C) Y (z) =
(D) Y (z) =
-1
dz
1-z
Convolution of two sequence x1 [n] and x2 [n] is represented as
(A) X1 (z) * X2 (z)
(B) X1 (z) X2 (z)
(C) X1 (z) + X2 (z)
(D) X1 (z) /X2 (z)
1z-1 (1 - z-4)
. Its final value is
4 (1 - z-1) 2
(B) zero
(D) infinity
MCQ 6.4.32
GATE EC 1999
(A) 1/4
(C) 1.0
MCQ 6.4.33
MCQ 6.4.34
IES E & T 1998
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.35
IES EC 1999
The Z-Transform
The impulse response of a discrete system with a simple pole shown in the
figure below. The pole of the system must be located on the
i. n
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MCQ 6.4.37
IES EC 2001
o
.c
a
i
d
real axis at z =- 1
real axis between z = 0 and z = 1
imaginary axis at z = j
imaginary axis between z = 0 and z = j
.
w
w
o
n
Which one of the following digital filters does have a linear phase response ?
(A) y [n] + y [n - 1] = x [n] - x [n - 1]
(B) y [n] = 1/6 (3x [n] + 2x [n - 1] + x [n - 2])
(C) y [n] = 1/6 (x [n] + 2x [n - 1] + 3x [n - 2])
(D) y [n] = 1/4 (x [n] + 2x [n - 1] + x [n - 2])
w
MCQ 6.4.38
IES EC 2001
MCQ 6.4.39
IES EC 2001
The poles of a digital filter with linear phase response can lie
(A) only at z = 0
(B) only on the unit circle
(C) only inside the unit circle but not at z = 0
(D) on the left side of Real (z) = 0 line
The impulse response of a discrete system with a simple pole is shown in the
given figure
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
The Z-Transform
(D)
/ k d [n - k]
k=0
MCQ 6.4.41
IES EC 2002
s [n + 1] = As [n] + Bx [n]
y [n] = Cs [n] + Dx [n]
where A, B, C and D are matrices, s [n] is the state vector. x [n] is the input
and y [n] is the output. The transfer function of the system H (z) = Y (z) /X (z)
is given by
(A) A (zI - B) -1 C + D
(B) B (zI - C ) -1 D + A
(C) C (zI - A) -1 B + D
(D) D (zI - A) -1 C + B
MCQ 6.4.42
IES EC 2004
MCQ 6.4.43
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
What is the number of roots of the polynomial F (z) = 4z3 - 8z2 - z + 2 , lying
outside the unit circle ?
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
y [ n] =
/ x [k]
k =- 3
IES EC 2004
Which one of the following systems is inverse of the system given above ?
(A) x [n] = y [n] - y [n - 1]
(B) x [n] = y [n]
(C) x [n] = y [n + 4]
(D) x [n] = ny [n]
MCQ 6.4.44
For the system shown, x [n] = kd [n], and y [n] is related to x [n] as
= x [n]
y [n] - 12 y [n - 1]
IES EC 2006
MCQ 6.4.46
IES EC 2011
(B) (1/2) n k
(D) 2n
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.47
IES EC 2011
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.4.48
GATE EC 2009
MCQ 6.4.49
GATE EC 2004
MCQ 6.4.50
GATE EC 2003
System transformation function H (z) for a discrete time LTI system expressed
in state variable form with zero initial conditions is
(A) c (zI - A) -1 b + d
(B) c (zI - A) -1
(C) (zI - A) -1 z
(D) (zI - A) -1
A system with transfer function H (z) has impulse response h (.) defined
as h (2) = 1, h (3) =- 1 and h (k) = 0 otherwise. Consider the following
statements.
S1 : H (z) is a low-pass filter.
S2 : H (z) is an FIR filter.
Which of the following is correct?
(A) Only S2 is true
(B) Both S1 and S2 are false
(C) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a reason for S1
(D) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a reason for S1
The z -transform of a system is H (z) =
impulse response of the system is
(A) (0.2) n u [n]
(B) (0.2) n u [- n - 1]
(C) - (0.2) n u [n]
(D) - (0.2) n u [- n - 1]
z
z - 0.2
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
MCQ 6.4.51
GATE EE 2009
- ji
MCQ 6.4.52
GATE EE 2008
- ji
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 549
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
(C) an u [n]
(D) an u [- n - 1]
MCQ 6.4.54
IES E & T 1998
MCQ 6.4.55
IES EC 1999
MCQ 6.4.56
IES EC 1999
MCQ 6.4.57
IES EC 2005
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.58
GATE EC 2002
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.4.59
GATE IN 2010
MCQ 6.4.60
i. n
o
.c
IES EC 2002
MCQ 6.4.61
IES EC 2002
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Assertion (A) : For a rational transfer function H (z) to be causal, stable and
causally invertible, both the zeros and the poles should lie within the unit
circle in the z -plane.
Reason (R) : For a rational system, ROC bounded by poles.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false but R is true
2 - 34 z-1
1 - 34 z-1 + 18 z-2
MCQ 6.4.62
GATE EC 2010
MCQ 6.4.63
GATE EC 2004
2y [n] = ay [n - 2] - 2x [n] + bx [n - 1]
The system is stable only if
(A) a = 2 , b < 2
(B) a > 2, b > 2
(C) a < 2 , any value of b
(D) b < 2 , any value of a
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 551
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
(A) 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
(B) either 2 or 4
(C) 2
(D) 4
MCQ 6.4.65
IES EC 2000
Consider the compound system shown in the figure below. Its output is equal
to the input with a delay of two units. If the transfer function of the first
system is given by
H1 (z) = z - 0.5 ,
z - 0.8
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1 - 0.6z-1
z-1 (1 - 0.4z-1)
z-1 (1 - 0.4z-1)
(C)
(1 - 0.6z-1)
(A)
MCQ 6.4.67
GATE EC 2010
MCQ 6.4.68
GATE EE 2009
(B)
z-1 (1 - 0.6z-1)
(1 - 0.4z-1)
(D)
1 - 0.4 z-1
z-1 (1 - 0.6z-1)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.69
IES EC 2001
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.4.70
GATE IN 2004
i. n
o
.c
p 0 + p1 z-1 + p 3 z-3
is
1 + d 3 z-3
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Consider the discrete-time system shown in the figure where the impulse
response of G (z) is g (0) = 0, g (1) = g (2) = 1, g (3) = g (4) = g = 0
In the IIR filter shown below, a is a variable gain. For which of the following
cases, the system will transit from stable to unstable condition ?
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
MCQ 6.4.75
IES EC 2007
MCQ 6.4.76
IES EC 2008
The poles of an analog system are related to the corresponding poles of the
digital system by the relation z = est . Consider the following statements.
1. Analog system poles in the left half of s -plane map onto digital system
poles inside the circle z = 1.
2. Analog system zeros in the left half of s -plane map onto digital system
zeros inside the circle z = 1.
3. Analog system poles on the imaginary axis of s -plane map onto digital
system zeros on the unit circle z = 1.
4. Analog system zeros on the imaginary axis of s -plane map onto digital
system zeros on the unit circle z = 1.
Which of these statements are correct ?
(A) 1 and 2
(B) 1 and 3
(C) 3 and 4
(D) 2 and 4
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
IES EC 2010
(A) s = ln z
(C) s = z
IES EC 2010
MCQ 6.4.79
GATE IN 2004
The Z-Transform
MCQ 6.4.77
MCQ 6.4.78
Page 553
Chap 6
(B) s = ln z
T
(D) T
ln z
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.1
Page 554
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.1.1
/ x [ n] z
X (z) =
-n
n =- 3
-1
-1
-b 1 l z-n
2
n =- 3
n
-1
=-
1 -1 n
^2z h-n
b 2 z l =n =- 3
n =- 3
=-
/ (2z)
Let - n = m so,
m=1
i. n
|n |
We have
/ x [ n] z
z -transform is X (z) =
=
.
w
w
-n
n =- 3
-1
n =- 3
3
1 -n -n
b 2 l z u [ - n - 1] +
1
-n
b2l z +
-n
/
n =- 3
1 n -n
b 2 l z u [ n]
/ b 21z l
n=0
/ b 12 z l + / b 21z l
n
n=1
n=0
14
42
4
43
II
o
.c
a
i
d
n =- 3
3
o
n
=
n
-n
= b 1 l u [ n ] + b 1 l u [ - n - 1]
2
2
14
42
4
43
I
1
1 + 2z = z - z
1 - 21z 1 - 12 z
z - 12 z - 2
SOL 6.1.3
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
-1
n =- 3
3
-n
1 n -n
b 2 l z u [ - n - 1] +
1 -n
b2l z +
/ (2z)
n=1
/
n =- 3
1 n -n
b 3 l z u [n]
/ b 31z l
n=0
/ b 31z l
n=0
2z +
1
1 - 2z 1 - 13 z-1
S
14243
I
II
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.4
Page 555
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
/ x [ n] z
-n
n =- 3
3
/a
an z-n u [n] +
n =- 3
3
-n -n
z u [ n]
n =- 3
/ (az
-1 n
) +
n=0
/ (az)
-n
n=0
1
1
+
1 - az-1 1 - (az) -1
14 2
4 3 1 44 2 44 3
I
II
-1
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
x1 [n] = u [n - 2]
X1 (z) =
/ u [n - 2] z
-n
=-
z
,
1 - z-1
z >1
/ u [- n - 3] z
-n
n =- 3
-3
/z
-n
/z
=-
/ u [n + 4] z
-n
-n
n =- 4
= z -1 = -4 1 -1 ,
1-z
z (1 - z )
n
x 4 [n] = (1) u [- n]
z <1
/z
n =- 3
4
Let, n =- m
m=3
= - z = -2 1 -1 ,
1-z
z (1 - z )
n
x 3 [n] = (1) u [n + 4]
X 3 (z) =
z >1
/ u [ - n] z
n =- 3
0
-n
/z
-n
n =- 3
SOL 6.1.6
n=2
n =- 3
3
(S " 2)
-n
-2
x2 [n] =- u [- n - 3]
X2 [z] =-
(R " 3)
/z
n =- 3
(Q " 1)
/z
m=0
1 = - z-1 ,
1 - z 1 - z-1
z <1
/e
n =- 3
jnp -n
z u [ n] =
/ (e
jp -1 n
z )
n=0
1
, z >1
1 - e jp z-1
= z jp = z
z+1
z-e
Option (D) is correct.
We can write, transfer function
Az2
H (z) =
(z - 2) (z - 3)
=
SOL 6.1.7
a e jp =- 1
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 556
Chap 6
H (1) =
The Z-Transform
h [n] = (- 4) 2n u [n] + (- 6) 3n u [- n - 1]
(Q " 4)
For ROC : z < 2 , ROC is interior to circle passing through inner most pole,
hence the system is non causal.
i. n
h [n] = (4) 2n u [- n - 1] + (- 6) 3n u [- n - 1]
o
.c
a
i
d
(R " 3)
(S " 1)
X (z) = ez + e1/z
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.9
2
3
X (z) = c1 + z + z + z + .....m + b1 + 1 + 1 12 + .....l
z 2! z
2! 3!
2
3
-2
= c1 + z + z + z + ....m + b1 + z-1 + z + ....l
2! 3!
2!
Taking inverse z -transform
x [n] = d [ n] + 1
n!
Option (A) is correct.
2
z (z + 5)
X (z) = 2 z + 5z =
(z - 3) (z + 1)
z - 2z - 3
X (z)
z+5
By partial fraction
= 2 - 1
=
z
z-3 z+1
(z - 3) (z + 1)
Thus
X (z) = 2z - z
z-3 z+1
Poles are at z = 3 and z =- 1
ROC : z < 1, which is not exterior of circle outside the outermost pole
z = 3 . So, x [n] is anticausal given as
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
x [n] = [- 2 (3) n + (- 1) n] u [- n - 1]
SOL 6.1.10
Page 557
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
X (z) = 2z - z
z-3 z+1
If ROC is 1 < z < 3 , x [n] is two sided with anticausal part 2z , z < 3
z-3
z
, z >1
and causal part
z+1
SOL 6.1.12
/ (0.7)
n -n
z u [ n - 1] =
n =- 3
/ (0.7z
-1 n
n=1
0.7z-1
1 - 0.7z-1
< 1 or z > 0.7
=
ROC : 0.7z-1
X2 (z) =
=
=
(- 0.4) n z-n u [- n - 2] =
n =- 3
3
/ (- 0.4)
m=2
3
/ (- 0.4)
n -n
n =- 3
-m m
Let n =- m
[(- 0.4) -1 z ] m =
m=2
-2
- (0.4) -1 z
1 + (0.4) -1 z
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
If
x [n]
X (z)
From time shifting property
The Z-Transform
x [n - n 0]
So
SOL 6.1.14
1
8z5 - 2z 4 - z3
so
SOL 6.1.16
z-n X (z)
SOL 6.1.15
i. n
o
.c
x [n]
X (z)
x [n - n 0]
x [ n - 1]
z-n X (z), n 0 $ 0
z-1 a z k = 1
z-1
z-1
If,
a
i
d
o
n
x [n + n 0]
.
w
w
zn e X (z) 0
n0 - 1
/ x [n] z
-m
o, n0 > 0
m=0
x [ n + 1]
z ^X (z) - x [0]h
We know that x [n] = u [n] so x [0] = 1
and
SOL 6.1.17
x [ n + 1]
z ^X (z) - 1h = z a z - 1k = z
z-1
z-1
a x [- n]
Xb 1 l
z
1/z
= 1a z k + 1e
2 z - 0.4
2 1/z - 0.4 o
1 44 2
44 3 1 444 2 4 44 3
I
II
Region of convergence for I series is z > 0.4 and for II series it is z < 2.5
. Therefore, Xe (z) has ROC 0.4 < z < 2.5
SOL 6.1.18
If
then,
y [n] = n (- 1) n u [n]
(- 1) n u [n]
x [n]
nx [n]
1 ,
1 + z-1
X (z)
dX (z)
-z
dz
z >1
(z -domain differentiation)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
so,
- z d ; 1 -1 E, ROC : z > 1
dz 1 + z
Page 559
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
Y (z) =
(Q " 3)
We know that,
- 1 , ROC : z < 1
(1 - z-1)
Again applying z -domain differentiation property
Z
- nu [- n - 1]
z d : - 1-1 D, ROC : z < 1
dz 1 - z
z-1 , ROC : z < 1
Y (z) =
(1 - z-1) 2
(R " 2)
y [n] = (- 1) n u [n]
u [- n - 1]
Y (z) =
/ (- 1)
/ (- z
n -n
z u [n] =
n =- 3
-1 n
n=0
1 , ROC : z > 1
1 + z-1
= nu [n]
Z
1 , ROC : z > 1
1 - z-1
Z
z d b 1 -1 l, ROC : z > 1
dz 1 - z
-1
z
, ROC : z > 1
=
(1 - z-1) 2
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
=
(S " 1)
y [n]
We know that
u [n]
so,
nu [n]
Y (z)
SOL 6.1.19
SOL 6.1.20
X (z) =
Y (z) =
=
SOL 6.1.21
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
3
-n
, ROC : Rx
y [n] z-n =
n =- 3
3
/ a x [n] z
n
-n
n =- 3
x [n] a z k
a
n =- 3
-n
= X a z k, ROC : aRx
a
x [n]
X (z), ROC : Rx
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
x [n - n 0]
z-n X (z)
with same ROC except the possible deletion or addition of z = 0 or z = 3.
So, ROC for x [n - 2] is Rx (S1, R1)
Similarly for x [n + 2], ROC : Rx (S2, R1)
Using time-reversal property of z -transform
Z
then,
The Z-Transform
If,
x [n]
If,
x [n]
an x [n]
X (z), ROC : Rx
Z
then,
x [- n]
X b 1 l, ROC : 1
z
Rx
Z
For S 3 ,
x [- n]
X b 1 l,
z
Because z is replaced by 1/z , so ROC would be z < 1 (S 3, R 3)
a
S 4 :(- 1) n x [n]
Using the property of scaling in z -domain, we have
then,
X (z), ROC : Rx
Xa z k
a
i. n
o
.c
ROC : z > a
so,
SOL 6.1.22
o
n
.
w
w
then,
Time shifting property :
If,
a
i
d
(S 4, R1)
x [n]
X (z)
x [n/2]
X (z2)
x [n]
X (z)
(P " 2)
then,
x [ n - 2] u [ n - 2 ]
z-2 X (z)
For x [n + 2] u [n] we can not apply time shifting property directly.
Let,
y [n] = x [n + 2] u [n]
so,
= an + 2 u [n + 2] u [n] = an + 2 u [n]
Y (z) =
/ y [n] z
-n
n =- 3
3
2
=a
Let,
/a
n + 2 -n
n=0
/ (az
-1 n
) = a2 X (z)
(R " 4)
n=0
2n
g [ n] = b x [n]
G (z) =
=
/b
g [n] z-n =
n =- 3
3
n
2n
an z-n u [n]
n =- 3
n
/ a b bz
n=0
SOL 6.1.23
(Q " 1)
z
l = Xb b 2 l
(S " 3)
/ x [2n] z
n =- 3
3
-n
/ x [ k] z
-k/2
k =- 3
Put 2n = k or n = k , k is even
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 561
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
=1
x [k] z-k/2 + 1
x [k] (- z1/2) k
2 k =- 3
2 k =- 3
= 1 8X ( z ) + X (- z )B
2
SOL 6.1.24
/ x [k ]
If,
then,
X (z)
z X (z)
(z - 1)
k =- 3
Here,
y [n] =
/ x [k ]
k=0
Y (z) =
SOL 6.1.25
z X (z) =
4z2
(z - 1)
(z - 1) (8z2 - 2z - 1)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
y [n] x [n ] * h [n]
Applying convolution property of z -transform, we have
Y (z) = X (z) H (z)
or,
SOL 6.1.26
/x
n =- 3
) -n
...(1)
n =- 3
/ 6x [n] (z )
[n] z-n =
/ x [ n] z
-n
n =- 3
/ [ x [ n] z
-n )
n =- 3
) -n
6x [n] (z ) @
...(2)
n =- 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 562
Chap 6
5/2
= 5b z 1 l
2 z- 2
1 - 12 z-1
n
h [ n] = 5 b 1 l , n $ 0
2 2
The Z-Transform
H (z) =
SOL 6.1.28
SOL 6.1.29
i. n
o
.c
1
z = 2 = Y (z)
X (z)
z + 12
z + 12
1
1
bz + 2 l Y (z) = 2 X (z)
1 -1
1 -1
b1 + 2 z l Y (z) = 2 z X (z)
Taking inverse z -transform
y [n] + 1 y [n - 1] = 1 x [n - 1]
2
2
H (z) = 1 -
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.1.30
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Y (z) =
z2
z
z
=
(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
(z - 0.5) (z - 1)
Y (z)
z
=
z
(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
= 2 - 1
z - 1 z - 0.5
Thus
Y (z) = 2z - z
z - 1 z - 0.5
Taking inverse z -transform
Page 563
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
By partial fraction
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
y [n] = 2d [n + 1] - 6 (- 2) n u [n]
SOL 6.1.33
Causality :
We know that a discrete time LTI system with transfer function H (z) is
causal if and only if ROC is the exterior of a circle outside the outer most
pole.
For the given system ROC is exterior to the circle outside the outer most
pole (z = ! j). The system is causal.
Stability :
A discrete time LTI system is stable if and only if ROC of its transfer
function H (z) includes the unit circle z = 1.
The given system is unstable because ROC does not include the unit circle.
Impulse Response :
H (z) = 2 z
z +1
We know that
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
z sin W0
, z >1
z - 2z cos W0 + 1
z2 + 1 = z2 - 2z cos W0 + 1
2z cos W0 = 0 or W0 = p
2
The Z-Transform
Here
So
SOL 6.1.35
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.1.36
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.37
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
h [1] = 1
h [2] = d [2] + h [1]
n = 2,
Page 565
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
h [2] = 1
In general form
h [ n] = u [ n]
Let
x [n]
h [ n]
X (z)
X (z) = z
z - 0.5
H (z) =
H (z)
z
z-1
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
System pole lies at unit circle z = 1, so the system is not BIBO stable.
SOL 6.1.38
SOL 6.1.39
P (z - 0.9)
z - 0.9 + Pz
P (z - 0.9)
z - 0.9
= P
=
1
+
P
(1 + P) z - 0.9
f z - 0.9 p
1+P
z = 0. 9
1+P
H (z) =
Pole at
0. 9 < 1
1+P
0.9 < 1 + P
P > - 0.1 or P < - 1.9
SOL 6.1.40
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 566
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.1.41
n =- 3
n =- 3
X (z) =
ROC : We can find that X (z) converges for all values of z except z = 0 ,
because at z = 0 X (z) " 3.
SOL 6.1.42
n =- 3
n =- 3
X (z) =
ROC : We can see that above summation converges for all values of z .
SOL 6.1.43
X (z) =
n =- 3
3
-n
/z
1
1 - z-1
o
.c
S
I
ROC : Summation I converges if
n=0
/z
-n
SOL 6.1.44
o
n
.
w
w
X (z) =
=
=
a
i
d
" 3.
n=0
i. n
n =- 3
z < 1, then
/ x [n] z
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
4
-n
1 n
-n
b 4 l (u [n] - u [n - 5]) z
/ b 14 z-1l
u [n] - u [n - 5] = 1, for 0 # n # 4
n=0
1 44 2
44 3
I
1 - ^ 14 z-1h5 z5 - (0.25) 5
, all z
=
= 4
1 - ^ 14 z-1h
z (z - 0.5)
ROC : Summation I converges for all values of z because n has only four
value.
SOL 6.1.45
/ x [n] z
-n
n =- 3
0
n =- 3
1 n
-n
b 4 l u [ - n] z
0
n
= / b 1 z-1 l = / ^4z h-n
4
n =- 3
n =- 3
/ (4z) m = 1 -1 4z ,
z <1
4
m=0
Taking n "- m ,
14 2
43
I
ROC : Summation I converges if 4z < 1 or z < 14 .
SOL 6.1.46
/ x [n] z
n =- 3
-1
-n
/ 3 u [- n - 1] z
n =- 3
3
-n
/ (3z-1) n = / b 13 z l
n =- 3
u [- n - 1] = 1, n # - 1
n=1
14
42
4
43
I
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1
3
z
= z , z <3
3-z
1 - 13 z
ROC : Summation I converges when 13 z < 1 or z < 3
=
SOL 6.1.47
Page 567
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
x [n] z-n =
n =- 3
-1
n =- 3
n =- 3
3
2
-n
b3l z +
-n
2 n -n
b3l z
/ b 23 l z-n
n
n=0
/ b 23 z l
m=1
1 44 2
44 3
I
/ b 23 z-1l
n=0
1 44 2
44 3
II
2
3
z
1
+
2
2 -1
1
z
1
^
^
3 h
3z h
1
-1
=
3 -1 +
2 -1
1
z
1
^
h ^
2
3z h
ROC : Summation I converges if 23 z < 1 or z < 23 and summation II
converges if 23 z-1 < 1 or z > 23 . ROC of X (z) would be intersection of
both, that is 23 < z < 23
=
SOL 6.1.48
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
j ^ hn
+ e-j^
x [n] = cos a p n k u [n] = e
3
2
1
1
j^ hn
-j^ hn
= e u [ n] + e
u [ n]
2
2
1
1
X [z] = 1
+
2 >1 - e z-1 1 - e- z-1 H
1 44 2
44 3 1 44 2
44 3
I
II
p
3
p
3
hn
u [ n]
p
3
jp
3
a n u [ n]
p
3
jp
3
1 ,
1 - az-1
z > a
2 - z-1 6e- + e @
, z >1
= 1>
2 1 - z-1 ^e + e- h + z-2 H
(2z - 1)
=z 2
, z >1
2 (z - z + 1)
ROC : First term in X (z) converges for z > e & z > 1. Similarly II term
also converges for z > e- & z > 1, so ROC would be simply z > 1.
jp
3
jp
3
jp
3
jp
3
jp
3
jp
3
SOL 6.1.49
SOL 6.1.50
0 < z < 3 d [n ! n 0]
z! n
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.52
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
ROC : 12 < z < 2 has a radius less than the pole at z =- 2 therefore the I
term of X (z) corresponds to a left sided signal
Z
2
(left-sided signal)
- 2 (2) n u [- n - 1]
-1
1 + 2z
While, the ROC has a greater radius than the pole at z = 12 , so the second
term of X (z) corresponds to a right sided sequence.
Z
1 u [ n]
1
(right-sided signal)
1 -1
2n
1- 2z
So, the inverse z -transform of X (z) is
x [n] =- 2 (2) n u [- n - 1] - 1n u [n]
2
-1
-1
SOL 6.1.53
49
32
47
32
+
1 + 4z-1 1 - 4z-1
Poles are at z =- 4 and z = 4 . Location of poles and ROC is shown in the
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
figure below
Page 569
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ROC : z > 1 has radius grater than both the poles at z =- 1 and z = 1,
therefore both the terms in X (z) corresponds to right sided sequences.
Z
1
(right-sided)
(- 1) n u [n]
1 + z-1
Z
1
(right-sided)
u [ n]
-1
1-z
Now, using time shifting property the complete inverse z -transform of X (z)
is
-1
-1
x [n] = 2d [n + 2] + ((- 1) n - 1) u [n + 2]
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.55
The Z-Transform
z >0
x [n] = d [n] + 2d [n - 6] + 4d [n - 8]
SOL 6.1.56
z-n
Z-1
d [n - n 0]
z-n
Z-1
d [n - n 0]
/ k1 d [n - k]
x [n] =
k=5
SOL 6.1.57
x [n] = d [n] + 3d [n - 1] + 3d [n - 2] + d [n - 3]
SOL 6.1.58
Z-1
d [n - n 0]
i. n
x [n] = d [n + 6] + d [n + 2] + 3d [n] + 2d [n - 3] + d [n - 4]
SOL 6.1.59
o
.c
X (z) =
1 -2
4
z >1
2
1- z
The power series expansion of X (z) with z >
a
i
d
-2 2
-2
1
2
or
1 -2
4
< 1 is written as
-2 3
X (z) = 1 + z + b z l + b z l + .......
4
4
4
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.60
-2
k=0
1 -2
4
3
l =
/ b 14 l z
k
-2k
k=0
/ b 14 z
-1
1 ,
= *b 4 l
0,
2-n,
=*
0,
n
2
n even and n $ 0
n odd
n even and n $ 0
n odd
/ ^2z h
2k
=- / 22 (k + 1) z2 (k + 1)
k=0
k=0
x [n] =- / 22 (k + 1) d [n + 2 (k + 1)] z2 (k + 1)
Z-1
d [n + 2 (k + 1)]
k=0
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ (- 1k)
3
k-1
Page 571
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
(z-1) k
k=1
z-k
Z-1
d [n - k]
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
ROC is exterior to the circle passing through right most pole so both the
term in equation (1) corresponds to right sided sequences
n
x1 [n] = a b 1 l u [n] + b (2) n u [n]
3
ROC : 1 < z < 2
3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Since ROC has greater radius than the pole at z = 13 , so first term in equation
(1) corresponds to right-sided sequence
n
z
a
(right-sided)
a b 1 l u [n]
1 -1
3
^1 - 3 z h
ROC z < 2 has radius less than the pole at z = 2 , so the second term in
equation (1) corresponds to left sided sequence.
z
b
(left-sided)
b (2) n u [n - 1]
-1
(1 - 2z )
n
So,
x2 [n] = a b 1 l u [n] + b (2) n u [n - 1]
3
ROC : z < 1
3
-1
-1
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
ROC is left side to both the poles of X (z), so they corresponds to left sided
signals.
n
x 3 [n] = a b 1 l u [- n - 1] + b (2) n u [- n - 1]
3
All gives the same z -transform with different ROC so, all are the solution.
SOL 6.1.63
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1
2
1
2
< z <2
Page 573
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
2
-1
1 -1 +
1 -1
1
z
1
+
2
3z
^1 - z h^1 + z h
1
1
X (z) has poles at z = 2 and z = - 3 , we consider the different ROCs and
location of poles to obtain the inverse z -transform.
1. ROC z > 12 is exterior to the cicle which passes through outtermost pole,
so both the terms in equation (1) contributes to right sided sequences.
We have
2.
3.
X (z) =
1 -1
2
1 -1
3
n
x [n] = 2n u [n] - b - 1 l u [n]
3
2
1
ROC z < 3 is interior to the circle passing through left most poles, so
both the terms in equation (1) corresponds to left sided sequences.
n
x [n] = ;-n2 + b - 1 l E u [- n - 1]
3
2
1
1
ROC 3 < z < 2 is interior to the circle passing through pole at z = 12
so the first term in equation (1) corresponds to a right sided sequence,
while the ROC is exterior to the circle passing through pole at z = - 13 , so
the second term corresponds to a left sided sequence. Therefore, inverse
z -transform is
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n
x [n]=- 2n u [- n - 1] - b - 1 l u [n]
3
2
SOL 6.1.65
A
+ B
1 - 12 z-1 1 + z-1
ROC is exterior to the pole at z = 12 , so this term corresponds to a right-sided
sequence, while ROC is interior to the pole at z =- 1 so the second term
corresponds to a left sided sequence. Taking inverse z -transform we get
x [n] = An u [n] + B (- 1) n u [- n - 1]
2
For n = 1,
x [1] = A (1) + B # 0 = 1 & A = 1& A = 2
2
2
X (z) =
For n =- 1,
So,
SOL 6.1.66
x [- 1] = A # 0 + B (- 1) = 1 & B =- 1
x [n] = n1- 1 u [n] - (- 1) n u [- n - 1]
2
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Let,
Page 574
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
So,
SOL 6.1.67
/ b 12 z-1l
n=0
n
-1
/
n =- 3
1 -1 n
b4z l
3
n
1
1
= / b 1 z-1 l + / (4z) m =
2
1
-1
n=0
m=1
1- z
1 - 1 z-1
1
4
2
4
3
1 44 2
44
3
2
4
II
I
SOL 6.1.69
x [n - 2]
SOL 6.1.70
.
w
w
x [n]
x [- n]
x [- n] * x [n]
(Scaling in z -domain)
z2 , ROC z < 4
z2 - 16
( z1 ) 2
(Time reversal property)
( z1 ) 2 - 16
( z1 ) 2
z2
(Time convolution property)
= 1 2
G
( z ) - 16 ;z2 - 16 E
z2
257z2 - 16z 4 - 16
nx [n]
SOL 6.1.72
z2 , ROC z < 4
z - 16
(2z) 2
z2
=
(2z) 2 - 16 z2 - 4
2
w
SOL 6.1.71
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
1 x [n]
2n
i. n
z2 , ROC z < 4
z2 - 16
2
(Time shifting property)
z-2 c 2 z
= 2 1
m
z - 16
z - 16
z2 , ROC z < 4
z2 - 16
2
(Differentiation in z -domain)
-z d 2 z
dz z - 16
32z2
2
(z - 16) 2
x [n]
x [n + 1]
zX (z)
(Time shifting)
x [n - 1]
z-1 X (z)
(Time shifting)
x [n + 1] + x [n - 1]
(z + z-1) X (z)
(Linearity)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.1.73
x [n - 3]
x [n] * x [n - 3]
X (z)
Z-1
X (2z)
Z-1
SOL 6.1.79
(Scaling in z -domain)
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Z-1
3 n n 2 u [n]
Z-1
3(- n) (- n) 2 u [- n]
Z-1
3-n n2 u [- n]
X (z)
Z-1
3 n n 2 u [n]
- z d X (z)
dz
z-1 :- z d X (z)D
dz
dX (z)
dz
Z-1
nx [n]
Z-1
(n - 1) x [n - 1]
Z-1
- (n - 1) x [n - 1]
Z-1
- (n - 1) 3n - 1 (n - 1) 2 u [n - 1]
Z-1
- (n - 1) 3 3n - 1 u [n - 1]
Z-1
1 x [n + 2]
2
1 x [n - 2]
2
(Time reversal)
SOL 6.1.78
3 n n 2 u [n]
1 3 n n 2 u [ n]
"
,
2n
So,
SOL 6.1.77
z2 , ROC z < 4
z2 - 16
-1
2
(Time shifting property)
z-3 c 2 z
= 2z
m
z - 16
z - 16
z2
z-1
c z2 - 16 mc z2 - 16 m (Time convolution property)
z
2
(z - 16) 2
X (z)
Xb 1 l
z
SOL 6.1.76
Page 575
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
x [n]
We have,
SOL 6.1.75
SOL 6.1.74
Z-1
(Differentiation in z -domain)
(Time shifting)
dX (z)
- z-1 :- z d X (z)D =
dz
dz
Z-1
1 (x [n + 2] - x [n - 2])
2
X (z)
Z-1
3 n n 2 u [n]
X (z) X (z)
Z-1
x [n ] * x [n ]
(Time shifting)
(Time shifting)
(Linearity)
H (z) =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 576
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.1.80
SOL 6.1.81
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.1.82
n-1
h [n] = 3 b 1 l u [n - 1]
4 4
z-1 c
1
o
1 - 14 z-1 m
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 577
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
y [n] = x [n] - x [n - 5]
SOL 6.1.85
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
1
1
+
1 - 2z-1 1 + 12 z-1
Poles of H (z) are at z = 2 and z = - 12 . Since h [n] is stable, so ROC includes
unit circle z = 1 and for the given function it must be 12 < z < 2 . The
location of poles and ROC is shown in the figure below
We have
H (z) =
Z-1
- (2) n u [- n - 1]
(left-sided)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 578
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
1
1 + 12 z-1
Impulse response,
Z-1
-1 n
b 2 l u [ n]
(right-sided)
SOL 6.1.87
We have
SOL 6.1.88
i. n
o
.c
SOL 6.1.89
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
27
- 38
8
+
1 - 13 z-1 1 - 3z-1
Poles are at z = 13 and z = 3 . Since X (z) converges on z = 1, so ROC must
include this circle. Thus for the given signal ROC : 13 < z < 3
ROC is exterior to the circle passing through the pole at z = 13 so this term
will have a right sided inverse z -transform. On the other hand ROC is interior
to the circle passing through the pole at z = 3 so this term will have a left
sided inverse z -transform.
n+3
x [n] =- n 1- 1 u [n] - 3 u [- n - 1]
8
3 8
X (z) =
w
SOL 6.1.90
Since ROC includes the unit circle z = 1, therefore the system is both stable
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
and causal.
SOL 6.1.91
SOL 6.1.92
Page 579
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.1.93
z-2 =- 1 +
4
4
+
2 1 - 2 z-1 1 + 2 z-1
1 - 2z-2
Taking inverse laplace transform we have
h [n] =- 1 d [n] + 1 {( 2 ) n + (- 2 ) n} u [n]
2
4
Option (D) is correct.
or
H (z) =
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.2
Page 580
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.2.1
Correct answer is 2.
z -transform is given as
X (z) =
/ b 12 l z
n
-n
n=0
/ b 21z l
n=0
= 2z
= 1
2z - 1
1
12z
From the given question, we have
X (z) = az
az - 1
So, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we get a = 2
SOL 6.2.2
SOL 6.2.3
...(1)
...(2)
i. n
X (z) = z3 + z2 - z1 - z0
= z 3 + z2 - z - 1
3
2
Now
X b 1 l = b 1 l + b 1 l - b 1 l - 1 =- 1.125
2
2
2
2
Correct answer is 3.
X (z) = z + 1 =- 1 + 2
z z-1
z (z - 1)
=- 1 + 2z-1 a z k
z
z-1
Taking inverse z -transform
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
x [n]
x [0]
x [1]
x [2]
By partial fraction
=- d [n - 1] + 2u [n - 1]
=- 0 + 0 = 0
=- 1 + 2 = 1
=- 0 + 2 = 2
Thus, we obtain
x [0] + x [1] + x [2] = 3
SOL 6.2.4
Correct answer is 3.
Let,
x [n] = an u [n]
y [n] = x [n + 3] u [n] = an + 3 u [n + 3] u [n]
u [n + 3] u [n] = u [n]
= an + 3 u [n]
Y (z) =
/ y [n] z
n =- 3
3
3
=a
-n
an + 3 z-n u [n] =
n =- 3
/ (az
-1 n
) = a3
n=0
/a
n + 3 -n
n=0
1
z
3
-1 = a a z - a k
1 - az
...(1)
...(2)
NOTE :
Do not apply time shifting property directly because x [n] is a causal signal.
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 581
Chap 6
an u [n]
an - 10 u [n - 10]
z
z-a
The Z-Transform
z-10 z
z-a
So,
x [n] = an - 10 u [n - 10]
From the given question, we have
...(1)
x [n] = a n - k u [ n - k ]
So, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we get
...(2)
k = 10
SOL 6.2.6
Correct answer is 9.
We know that
a n u [ n]
or
3 n u [ n]
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
3 n - 3 u [ n - 3]
So
SOL 6.2.7
z
z-a
z
z-3
z-3 a z k
z-3
x [n] = 3n - 3 u [n - 3]
x [5] = 32 u [2] = 9
Correct answer is 2.
y [ n ] = n [n + 1] u [ n ]
y [n] = n2 u [n] + nu [n]
Z
z
We know that u [n]
z-1
Applying the property of differentiation in z -domain
If,
x [n]
X (z)
then,
nx [n]
- z d X (z)
dz
Z
so,
nu [n]
-z d a z k
dz z - 1
Z
z
or,
nu [n]
(z - 1) 2
Again by applying the above property
Z
n (nu [n])
- z d : z 2D
dz (z - 1)
z (z + 1)
Z
n 2 u [ n]
(z - 1) 3
z (z + 1)
z
2z2
So
Y (z) =
+
=
(z - 1) 2 (z - 1) 3
(z - 1) 3
From the given question, we have
kz k
x [n] =
(z - 1) k + 1
So, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we get
Z
...(1)
...(2)
k =2
SOL 6.2.8
Correct answer is - 1.
Given that
Differentiating
Buy Online: shop.nodia.co.in
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 582
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.2.9
Y (z) =
x 9n C z-n
2
n =- 3
/
3
ia
/ x [ k] z
d
o
=
k =- 3
SOL 6.2.10
i. n
o
.c
Correct answer is 2.
-2k
...(1)
...(2)
Put n = k or n = 2k
2
= X (z2)
From the given question, we have
...(1)
Y (z) = X (z k )
So, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we get k = 2
...(2)
n
.
w
w
Correct answer is 0.
X (z) =
Y (z) = X (z3) =
=
/ x [ n] z
n =- 3
3
-n
x [n] (z3) -n =
n =- 3
3
/ x [ n] z
-3n
n =- 3
/ x [k/3] z
-k
Put 3n = k or n = k/3
k =- 3
Thus
Thus
SOL 6.2.11
y [n] = x [n/3]
(- 0.5) n/3,
y [n] = *
0,
n = 0, 3, 6, ....
otherwise
y [4] = 0
Correct answer is - 6 .
By taking z -transform of x [n] and h [n]
H (z) = 1 + 2z-1 - z-3 + z-4
X (z) = 1 + 3z-1 - z-2 - 2z-3
From the convolution property of z -transform
Sequence is
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
y [4] =- 6
SOL 6.2.12
Page 583
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
= 1 lim (z - 1) 9 z + z C
2 z"1
z-1 z+1
z (z - 1)
= 1 lim =z +
2 z"1
(z + 1) G
= 1 (1) = 0.5
2
SOL 6.2.13
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
0.5z2
z " 3(z - 1) (z - 0.5)
0.5
= 0.5
= lim
1
0.5
z"3
1
1
b
z lb
z l
= lim
SOL 6.2.14
= 1 - 2.5z-1 + z-2
Taking inverse z -transform
h [n] = {1, - 2.5, 1}
-
Therefore
SOL 6.2.15
h [1] =- 2.5
Correct answer is 4.
Comparing the given system realization with the generic first order direct
form II realization
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 584
Chap 6
y [ n ] + a 1 y [ n - 1] = b 0 x [ n ] + b 1 x [ n - 1 ]
Here a1 =- 2, b1 = 3, b 0 = 4
So y [n] - 2y [n - 1] = 4x [n] + 3x [n - 1]
Taking z -transform on both sides
The Z-Transform
...(1)
...(2)
k =4
SOL 6.2.16
i. n
o
.c
1
^z + 2 h
= b1 + 1 z-1 lb z 1 l =
1
2
z- 2
^z - 2 h
Input,
x [n] = cos (np)
- 1 + 12
So, z =- 1 and H (z =- 1) =
=1
3
- 1 - 12
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
Output of system
...(1)
y [n] = k cos np
So, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we get
k = 1 = 0.3333
3
Correct answer is 1.
From the given block diagram
...(2)
w
SOL 6.2.17
Correct answer is - 2 .
X+ (z) =
n=0
n=0
...(1)
/ f [ n] d [ n - n ] = f [ n ]
0
n =- 3
...(2)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 585
Chap 6
k =- 2
SOL 6.2.19
The Z-Transform
Correct answer is - 1.
X+ (z) =
n=0
n=0
...(1)
...(2)
k =- 1
SOL 6.2.20
/ ((-2k1))!
3
a2k
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
k=0
Thus,
/ ((-2k1))!
3
(z-3) 2k ,
z >0
k=0
SOL 6.2.21
SOL 6.2.22
***********
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.3
Page 586
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
Answers
1.
(B)
5.
(C)
9.
(A)
13. (D)
17. (C)
21. (C)
25. (B)
2.
(D)
6.
(C)
10. (C)
14. (C)
18. (A)
22. (D)
26. (B)
3.
(C)
7.
(D)
11. (C)
15. (B)
19. (A)
23. (C)
4.
(D)
8.
(A)
12. (A)
16. (D)
20. (B)
24. (C)
***********
i. n
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOLUTIONS 6.4
Page 587
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.4.1
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
/ (az
1
z
-1 = z - a
1 - az
-1 n
) =
n=0
SOL 6.4.2
/ an u [n] z-n
x [n] =
X (z) =
/ d [n - k]
k=0
3
/ x [n] z-n
/ ; / d [n - k] z-nE
3
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
k=0
n =- 3 k = 0
/ anT z-n
n =- 3
n =- 3
T n
/ b az
3
n=0
SOL 6.4.4
Option ( ) is correct.
SOL 6.4.5
/ (aT ) n z-n
l =
z
z - aT
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
3
bn u [n] z-n +
n =- 3
3
n -n
/b
/ b-n u [- n - 1] z-n
n =- 3
-1
/ b-n z-n
n=0
n =- 3
/ bn z-n + / bm zm
n=0
3
/ (bz
m=1
3
) + / (bz) m
n=0
m=1
43
1 44 2
44 3 1 4 2
II
I
-1 n
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
/ an u [n] z-n
X (z) =
u [n] = 1, n $ 0
n=0
n =- 3
The Z-Transform
/ (az-1) n
1 44 2
44 3
I
1
= z
1 - az-1 z - a
Similarly, z -transform of signal an u [- n - 1] is
=
/ - an u [- n - 1] z-n
X (z) =
n =- 3
-1
/ an z-n
=-
a u [- n - 1] = 1, n #- 1
n =- 3
Let n =- m , then
i. n
SOL 6.4.7
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
X (z) =
=
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
3
Putting z = re jW
n =- 3
n =- 3
or
n =- 3
n=3
n =- 1
/ b 13 l z-n - /
1 n -n
b2l z
/ b 13 z-1l
1 -1 n
b2z l
n=0
n=3
n=0
n =- 3
n =- 1
n =- 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
1< z <1
3
2
SOL 6.4.9
Page 589
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
Here
SOL 6.4.10
x [n] = 2 n u [ n]
z -transform of x [n]
3
/ x [n] z-n
X (z) =
/ 2n u [n] z-n
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
/ (2z-1) n
n=0
1
1 - 2z-1
the above series converges if 2z-1 < 1 or z > 2
=
SOL 6.4.11
/ x [ n] z
H (z) =
-n
n =- 3
H (z) is convergent if
/ 1z
-n
n=0
/ (z
-1 n
n=0
/ (z-1) n < 3
n=0
and this is possible when z-1 < 1. Thus ROC is z-1 < 1 or z > 1
SOL 6.4.12
(B)
(C)
sin wt
(D)
cos wt
Z
Z
z sin wT
z - 2z cos wT + 1
z - cos wT
z2 - 2z cos wt + 1
2
t = nT
Z
t = nT
SOL 6.4.13
SOL 6.4.14
(B " 1)
(C " 4)
(D " 2)
H (z) = z-m
h [n] = d [n - m]
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.15
The Z-Transform
an u [n]
u [n]
For a = 1,
SOL 6.4.16
1
1 - az-1
1
1 - z-1
i. n
z -transform
f (k) = d (k) - (- 1) k
Z
1
Thus
(- 1) k
1 + z- 1
Option (C) is correct.
z ^2z - 56 h
X (z) =
1
1
^z - 2 h^z - 3 h
5
^2z - 6 h
X (z)
=
= 11 + 11
1
1
z
^z - 2 h^z - 3 h
^z - 2 h ^z - 3 h
or
...(1)
X (z) = z 1 + z 1
^z - 2 h ^z - 3 h
S
S
term I
term II
1
Poles of X (z) are at z = and z = 1
2
3
1
ROC : z > 2 Since ROC is outside to the outer most pole so both the terms
in equation (1) corresponds to right sided sequence.
so,
SOL 6.4.18
o
.c
1 = 1- z = 1- 1
z+1
z+1
1 + z- 1
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
So,
n
n
x [n] = b 1 l u [n] + b 1 l u [n]
2
3
(A " 4)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
ROC : z < 13 :Since ROC is inside to the innermost pole so both the terms
in equation (1) corresponds to left sided signals.
Page 591
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
n
n
So,
x [n] =-b 1 l u [- n - 1] - b 1 l u [- n - 1]
(D " 2)
2
3
1
1
1
ROC : 3 < z < 2 : ROC is outside to the pole z = 3 , so the second term
of equation (1) corresponds to a causal signal. ROC is inside to the pole at
z = 12 , so First term of equation (1) corresponds to anticausal signal.
So,
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
n
n
x [n] =-b 1 l u [- n - 1] + b 1 l u [n]
2
3
(C " 1)
ROC : z < 13 & z > 12 : ROC : z < 13 is inside the pole at z = 13 so second
term of equation (1) corresponds to anticausal signal. On the other hand,
ROC : z > 12 is outside to the pole at z = 12 , so the first term in equation
(1) corresponds to a causal signal.
So,
n
n
x [n] = b 1 l u [n] - b 1 l u [- n - 1]
2
3
(B " 3)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.19
Given,
The Z-Transform
z
, z <2
(z - 2) (z - 3)
X (z)
1
= 1 - 1
=
z
z-3 z-2
(z - 2) (z - 3)
or,
X (z) = z - z
z-3 z-2
Poles of X (z) are z = 2 and z = 3
ROC : z < 2
By partial fraction
...(1)
i. n
o
.c
Since ROC is inside the innermost pole of X (z), both the terms in equation
(1) corresponds to anticausal signals.
a
i
d
o
n
z
, z >a
Given that
X (z) =
(z - a) 2
Residue of X (z) zn - 1 at z = a is
= d (z - a) 2 X (z) zn - 1 z = a
dz
z
zn - 1
= d (z - a) 2
dz
(z - a) 2
z=a
d
n
n-1
= z
= nz
= nan - 1
z=a
dz z = a
.
w
w
w
SOL 6.4.21
1
2
3
,
+
1 - az-1 1 - bz-1
Poles of the system are z = a , z = b
ROC : a < z < b
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Since ROC is outside to the pole at z = a , therefore the first term in X (z)
corresponds to a causal signal.
1
2
1 (a) n u [n]
2
1 - az
ROC is inside to the pole at z = b , so the second term in X (z) corresponds
to a anticausal signal.
1
3
Z-1
Page 593
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
-1
- 1 (b) n u [- n - 1]
3
x [n] = 1 (a) n u [n] - 1 (b) n u [- n - 1]
2
3
x [0] = 1 u [0] - 1 u [- 1] = 1
2
3
2
Z-1
-1
1 - bz
SOL 6.4.22
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
X (z) =
/ x [n] z-n
n =- 3
Z-1
ad [n ! a]
aZ ! a
2
X (z) = 5z + 4z-1 + 3
x [n] = 5d [n + 2] + 4d [n - 1] + 3d [n]
We know that
Given that
Inverse z -transform
SOL 6.4.24
SOL 6.4.25
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.26
The Z-Transform
/ x [n] z-n
X (z) =
=
n =- 3
3
/ an z-n
u [n] = 1, n $ 0
n=0
/ (az-1) n
n=0
1
,
az-1 < 1 or z > a
1 - az-1
x [n] =- an u [- n - 1]
=
(B)
/ an u [- n - 1] z-n
X (z) ==-
n =- 3
-1
/ an z-n
u [- n - 1] = 1, n #- 1
n =- 3
3
-m m
X (z) =- / a
Let n =- m ,
z =- / (a-1 z) m
m=1
-1
m=1
= - a -z1 ,
a-1 z < 1 or z < a
1-a z
1
, z < a
=
(1 - az-1)
x [n] =- nan u [- n - 1]
i. n
(C)
We have,
(A " 2)
(B " 3)
o
.c
a
i
d
1
, z < a
(1 - az-1)
From the property of differentiation in z -domain
Z
z < a
- z d : 1 -1 D,
- nan u [- n - 1]
dz 1 - az
Z
az-1 ,
z < a
(1 - az-1) 2
(D)
x [n] = nan u [n]
Z
1
We have,
, z > a
an u [n]
(1 - az-1)
From the property of differentiation in z -domain
Z
1
,
z > a
-z d ;
nan u [n]
dz (1 - az-1)E
Z
az-1
,
z > a
(1 - az-1) 2
- an u [- n - 1]
o
n
.
w
w
(C " 4)
w
SOL 6.4.27
(D " 1)
/ x [n] z-n
X (z) =
z -transform of {x [n] e
n =- 3
jw0 n
/ x [n] e jw n z-n
Y (z) =
n =- 3
so,
/ x [n] (ze-jw ) -n
0
n =- 3
= X (zl) zl = ze
-jw0
Y (z) = X (ze-jw )
0
SOL 6.4.28
SOL 6.4.29
(A " 3)
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
z
z-a
From the property of scaling in z -domain
an - 2 u [n - 2]
x [n]
If,
then,
an x [n]
so
(e j ) n an
If,
then,
nan u [n]
z-2
X (z)
Z
Xa z k
a
z
-j
ae j k
Z
= ze
j
z
ze - a
ae j - a k
differentiation in z -domain
Z
z
z-a
Z
d
z
= az
dz a z - a k (z - a) 2
(B " 4)
Page 595
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
(C " 2)
(D " 1)
SOL 6.4.30
SOL 6.4.31
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
y [n] = x [n] * u [n] =
/ x [k ]
k=0
Taking z -transform
Y (z) = X (z)
SOL 6.4.32
SOL 6.4.33
1
1 - z-1
X1 (z) X2 (z)
z-1 (1 - z-4)
4 (1 - z-1) 2
Applying final value theorem
C (z) =
n"3
z"1
z-1 (1 - z-4)
z"1
z"1
4 (1 - z-1) 2
z-1 (1 - z-4) (z - 1)
= lim
z"1
4 (1 - z-1) 2
z-1 z-4 (z 4 - 1) (z - 1)
= lim
z"1
4z-2 (z - 1) 2
-3 (z - 1) (z + 1) (z2 + 1) (z - 1)
= lim z
z"1 4
(z - 1) 2
-3
= lim z (z + 1) (z2 + 1) = 1
z"1 4
Option (C) is correct.
lim (z - 1) F (z) = lim (z - 1)
SOL 6.4.34
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.35
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.4.36
c [k + 2] + ac [k + 1] + bc [k] = u [k]
z2 + za + b = 0
SOL 6.4.37
i. n
o
.c
SOL 6.4.38
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
y [ n ] + y [ n - 1] = x [ n ] - x [ n - 1]
Taking z -transform
SOL 6.4.39
kX (z)
zn
0
Pole lies at z = 0
SOL 6.4.40
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 597
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
x2 [n] = nu [n]
z
X2 (z) =
(z - 1) 2
Y2 (z) = X2 (z) H (z)
(z - 1)
= : z 2 D=
= 1
(z) G (z - 1)
(z - 1)
Output,
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Y2 (z)
1
(z - 1)
SOL 6.4.42
Z-1
Z
-1
y 2 [n]
u [n - 1]
s [n + 1] = As [n] + Bx [n]
y [n] = Cs [n] + Dx [n]
Taking z -transform of equation (1)
...(1)
...(2)
SOL 6.4.44
/ x [k ]
k =- 3
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
so
Page 598
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
Transfer function,
H (z) =
Y (z)
1
=
X (z) (1 - z-1)
Now consider the inverse system of H (z), let impulse response of the inverse
system is given by H1 (z), then we can write
H (z) H1 (z) = 1
X (z)
H1 (z) =
= 1 - z-1
Y (z)
(1 - z-1) Y (z) = X (z)
Y (z) - z-1 Y (z) = X (z)
Taking inverse z -transform
y [n] - y [n - 1] = x [n]
SOL 6.4.45
i. n
o
.c
y [ n ] - 1 y [ n - 1] = x [ n ]
2
Taking z -transform on both sides
Y (z) - 1 z-1 Y (z) = X (z)
2
Y (z)
1
Transfer function
H (z) =
=
X (z) 1 - 12 z-1
Now, for input x [n] = kd [n]Output is
o
n
a
i
d
.
w
w
X (z) = k
n$0
SOL 6.4.46
SOL 6.4.47
y [ n ] + y [ n - 1] = x [ n ]
For unit step response, x [n] = u [n]
y [ n ] + y [ n - 1] = u [ n ]
Taking z -transform
Y (z) + z-1 Y (z) = z
z-1
(1 + z-1) Y (z) = z
(z - 1)
(1 + z)
Y (z) = z
z
(z - 1)
z2
Y (z) =
(z + 1) (z - 1)
Option (A) is correct.
SOL 6.4.48
SOL 6.4.49
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
is as follows :
Page 599
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
z
z - 0.2
z < 0.2
1
1 - az-1
h [n] =- (0.2) n u [- n - 1]
- an u [- n - 1] *
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
Thus
SOL 6.4.51
z <a
Taking z transform
= 2z-3 (z 4 + z2 - 2z + 2 - 3z-4)
= 2 (z + z-1 - 2z-2 + 2z-3 - 3z-7)
Taking inverse z transform we have
y [n] = 2 [d [n + 1] + d [n - 1] - 2d [n - 2] + 2d [n - 3] - 3d [n - 7]]
At n = 4 ,
y [4] = 0
SOL 6.4.52
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 600
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
x [n - 1]
z-1 x (z)
U (z) = z-1
y [n] = d [n - 2] - 3d [n - 3] + 2d [n - 4] - 6d [n - 5]
SOL 6.4.54
i. n
H (z) H1 (z) = 1
1
1 =
H (z)
1 - az-1
-1
For stability H (z) = (1 - az ), z > a but in the inverse system z < a , for
stability of H1 (z).
so
h1 [n] =- an u [- n - 1]
H1 (z) =
SOL 6.4.55
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
z
z + 12
Pole,
z =- 1
2
The system is stable if pole lies inside the unit circle. Thus (A) is true, (R)
is false.
SOL 6.4.56
.
w
w
H (z) =
H (z) =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 601
Chap 6
(z2 + 1)
z"3
z " 3(z + 0.5) (z - 0.5)
1
b1 + z2 l
= lim
=1
0.5
0.5
z"3
b1 + z lb1 - z l
The Z-Transform
SOL 6.4.58
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
H (z) = 2 + 4z-1
Taking inverse z -transform
1
where z < a
1 - az-1
Z
1
Thus
where z < 5
- 5n u [- n - 1]
1 - 5z-1
Z
z
or
where z < 5
- 5n u [- n - 1]
z-5
Since ROC is z < 5 and it include unit circle, system is stable.
- an u [- n - 1]
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
h [n] =- 5n u [- n - 1]
H (z) =
Let n =- m, then
/ h [n] z
-n
n =- 3
H (z) =-
-3
-1
/-5 z
n -n
=-
n =- 3
/ (5z
-1 -m
= 1-
n =- 1
1
= 1,
1 - 5-1 z
= 1- 5 = z
5-z
z-5
-1
/ (5z
-1 n
n =- 3
3
/ (5
-1
z) -m
m=0
SOL 6.4.60
SOL 6.4.61
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 602
Chap 6
/ h [ n] < 3
The Z-Transform
n =- 3
H (z) =
/ h [n] z-n
n =- 3
/ h [n] e-jWn
H (z) =
=
=
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
3
n =- 3
h [n] e-jWn
h [ n] < 3
i. n
SOL 6.4.62
o
.c
a
i
d
o
n
SOL 6.4.63
.
w
w
SOL 6.4.64
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 603
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
or
a <2
But zero can lie anywhere in plane. Thus, b can be of any value.
SOL 6.4.65
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
or
Y (z)
= H (z) = z-1
X (z)
or
Now
SOL 6.4.68
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
We have
Page 604
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
or,
SOL 6.4.69
H1 (z) = z2 + z1 + 1 (non-causal)
Assume
H2 (z) = z3 + z2 + 1 (non-causal)
Overall response of the system
H (z) = H1 (z) H2 (z) H3 (z)
i. n
o
.c
SOL 6.4.70
a
i
d
o
n
1 + az-1 + bz-2
1 + cz-1 + dz-2 + ez-3
We know that number of minimum delay elements is equal to the highest
power of z-1 present in the denominator of H (z).
No. of delay elements = 3
SOL 6.4.71
.
w
w
H (z) =
-2
-1
^X (z) + Y (z) z a2 + Y (z) a1 z h # a 0 = Y (z)
System Function
Y (z)
a0
H (z) =
=
X (z) 1 - a1 z-1 - a2 z-2
1
=
1 - a1 z-1 - a2 z-2
a0 a0
a0
Comparing with given H (z)
1 =1&a =1
0
a0
- a1 =- 0.7 & a1 = 0.7
a0
- a2 = 0.13 & a2 =- 0.13
a0
SOL 6.4.72
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
Page 605
Chap 6
The Z-Transform
i. n
o
c
.
a
i
d
o
n
.
w
w
w
K ! K2 + 4K # 2
K2 + 4K # 2 - K
K2 + 4K # 4 - 4K + K2
8K # 4
K # 1/2
SOL 6.4.74
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*
SOL 6.4.76
The Z-Transform
...(1)
...(2)
(3)
z = re jW = e(s + jw) T
= esT e jwT
z = re jW = esT e jwT
From above relation we can find that z = esT and W = wT . It is concluded
that,
If s = 0 then z = 1, the jw-axis of s -plane maps into unit circle.
If s < 0 , z < 1, it implies that left half of s -plane maps into inside of
unit circle _ z < 1i.
Similarly, if s > 0 , z > 1 which implies that right half of s -plane maps
into outside of unit circle.
SOL 6.4.77
i. n
o
.c
/ Kn d [t - nTs]
a
i
d
n=0
o
n
.
w
w
SOL 6.4.78
X (s) = X (z) z = e
z = esT
ln z = sT
s = ln z
T
w
SOL 6.4.79
SOL 6.4.80
sT
a
s + a2
Poles in s -domain are at s = ! ja . In z -domain poles will be at z = esT , so
H (s) =
*Shipping Free*
*Maximum Discount*